Generator Manual 1

3%5
QATARGAS 3 & 4 ONSHORE PROJECT
%JK[QFC6GEJPKR
,QKPV8GPVWTG
PO NO. QCSE1D5003
REQ NO. QCS/50/00/EL/RQ/NA/009-B
4'80Q
IDENT NO. QCSE1D5003-B-8005
B1
A-REVIEWED WITH SECTION:
Digitally signed
NO COMMENT
B-REVIEWED WITH
LOIG by LOIG
GALLIOU -
TECHNIP
COMMENTS AS NOTED GALLIOU - DN: cn=LOIG

GALLIOU -
TECHNIP, c=US
C-DO NOT PROCEED
WITH FABRICATION
Signature
Not Verified TECHNIP Date: 2007.05.04
10:55:30 +02'00'
D-RECEIVED AS
DATE: May 04, '07
INFORMATION
PURCHASER'S PERMISSION TO PROCEED OR REVIEW TAKEN ON VENDOR

PRINTS SHALL NOT RELIEVE VENDOR FROM ITS RESPONSIBILITIES OR
LIABILITIES UNDER PURCHASE ORDER.
Project Emergency Diesel Generator Sets

Item 59-G9101, 59-G9102, 59-G9103, 59-G9104
Vendor Document No: QCSE1D5003-B-8005

Document Description: Alternator - O & M Manual
Internal Reference : #1789/10/15
B1 11.03.2007 FOR APPROVAL VN VN NQ

4'8 &#6' &'5%4+26+10 $; %*'%-'& #22418'&
Contents
1 General Notes and Instructions
Safety precautions
Check list
Maintenance schedule
Customer contact list & Complaint report
2 Drawings
Dimension drawing alternator AZ 20657
Rotor drawing 87664
3 Circuit Diagram
Circuit diagram K850.3.123
Legend to circuit diagram K850.3.123
4 Operating Instructions
Three-phase synchronous electrical machines series DIG 110...191
Enclosure to operating instructions
5 Cooler Description
User manual KLIMA air-air cooler
6 Regulator Descriptions
Voltage regulator Basler DECS 200
Mounting plate 251
Drawings to mounting plate 251
7 Technical Data
Technical Data
Test reports 8428196A003
Al Bahar 03/2007
Your order: PZ06Q002 THRU
Your project: 1789 Qatar Gas/on-shore
AvK Order no. 8428196A003
General Notes
General Notes
Safety Precautions
Read this advice as well as additional parts can be found in the
the operating instructions documentation.
supplied prior to
commissioning or storage of The documentation, including the
the generator. operating instructions, are part of the
Any works on the generator have to be machine and have to be passed on to the
performed by qualified and trained next user in case the generator is sold or
personnel only. moved.
Any person, working on the generator
has to read and understand these 1.2 Liability and guarantee
operating instructions.
All statements and advice in the operating
instructions are made under consideration
1. General Notes of our present knowledge and experience.
1.1 Important notes for users The technical information

and data, described in this
In the following instructions you will find manual, is the correct state
important information and safety advice for of information at time of
transportation, installation and operation printing. We reserve the right to
for AvK generators of the series DSG and changes due to technical progress
DIG. without changing this operating
instruction. Accordingly, no claims can
AvK generators are designed for different be made from statements and
applications for the use on land as well as descriptions in this manual.
offshore. Series DIG is dimensioned for a
nominal voltage bigger than 1 kV, DSG for
a nominal voltage up to 1 kV. Please refer We will not be liable for any damages or
to the rating plate mounted on the breakdowns due to operating mistakes in
generator for design data and as well as in disregard of these instruction or improper
the data of the respective order. repairs.
Any works on the generator has to be We particularly point out, that spare parts
performed by qualified and trained and additional parts not supplied by AvK,
personnel only. The necessary have to be accepted by AvK. AvK will
qualification can be obtained by training or exclude any liability for damages that
courses through the manufacturer. result from the use of spare and additional
Technicians can obtain a special parts that have not been accepted by AvK.
generator training at AvK Germany. The installation or use of foreign products
may possibly change the constructively
The installation should preferably be given design of the electric machine in a
performed by an AvK service technician or negative way, and may restrict the safety
by a specially trained qualified technician. of persons, machine or other values.
The operating instructions are to be kept Any unauthorized modifications and

close to the generator and have to be changes on the generator are not allowed
available for the personnel at any time. for reasons of safety and will exclude any
liability of AvK for resulting damages. If
Please take notice of the safety transformers supplied by the customer
precautions in chapter 2. Further safety shall be installed in the terminal box, AvK
precautions are mentioned in the has to be consulted first.
respective chapters.
The preceding notes do not extend the
The order related data of the generator as terms of liability and guarantee of the
well as the operating instructions for general delivery terms of AvK.
General Notes
AH/e-04-2003/A page 2
Besides these safety notes all local valid
Manufacturer's Address instructions for safety and accident
prevention have to be followed.
AvK Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG
Bunsenstraße 17 Follow all warnings and
D-85053 Ingolstadt advice and act very carefully
in these cases. Inform all
Phone (+49) (0)841 / 792-0 persons working on the
FAX (+49) (0)841 / 792-250 generator about all work-safety
regulations.
All rights reserved. Reprints
or copies - even extracts -
need the permission of AvK. 2.2 Signs on the generator
2. Safety Precautions At particular dangerous points on the

generator you will find safety notes. To
During transportation, installation, avoid damages to persons or values these
commissioning and maintenance, certain safety notes have to be followed very
works might have to be performed on the strictly.
generator, e.g. on feet support, shaft end,
bearings, terminal box, etc. The working
area and area of danger includes the Achtung!
surroundings of the generator and the Betriebsanleitung
prime mover. Im Klemmenkasten!
During normal operation, the working area Vor Inbetriebnahme unbedingt lesen.
should be limited to the operating and
monitoring devices of the switchboard. Caution!
Operating instructions are inside the
Despite taking into consideration all safety terminal box. These must be read prior to
precautions, the generator may be a commissioning.
source of danger, electrically and
mechanically. To avoid damages to The documents for the generator are in
persons and values, all safety precautions the terminal box
have strictly to be followed.
Beside all safety notes in the operating Transportsicherungen.

instruction the local safety precautions and Vor Inbetriebnahme entfernen
rules for the prevention of accidents have
to be followed. Transport Safety Devices
Remove prior to commissioning.
2.1 Description of symbols and advice During transportation the rotor is secured
against shifting. The transport safety
The following symbols are used in the devices have to be removed before
instructions to highlight particular points commissioning.
and actions:
Maschine nicht betriebsfähig!

Warning! Life in danger!
Machine out of order
Danger! This sign is mounted when the installation

of transformers in the terminal box is
necessary. The transformers have to be
installed prior to commissioning. In this
General Notes
AH/e-04-2003/A page 3
case the installation manual for the Unprotected machine parts
transformers is in the terminal box and in may cause severe injuries.
the enclosed documents.
All safety devices like covers, barriers and

E-Teile im Klemmenkasten protections have to be in place and must
be functioning perfectly at all times.
Spare Parts are inside
It is not permitted to operate
the generator with damaged
Spare parts that are delivered with the safety devices!
generator are in the terminal box. The
spare parts have to be removed.
2.3 Safety at site
ABSTANDSMAß-PROTOKOLL For operating the electrical machine the

AM GLEICHRICHTERTÄGER responsibilities have to be determined
clearly and kept, so that no unclear
Mounting-distance test-report is inside situation regarding safety may occur.
The generator must only be operated
when it is in an excellent state and
For the alignment of single bearing according to the design data. Any change
machines it is important to keep the that reduces the safety has to be reported
mounting distance between rotor and to the responsible person immediately.
stator on the NDE of the generator.
The respective report can be found on the Modifications on the
rectifier carrier at the NDE of the machine are only allowed in
generator. agreement with AvK and
these are to be performed
under supervision of qualified
ACHTUNG! personnel.
Vor Inbetriebnahme Öl einfüllen.
Menge und Qualität laut Beschreibung The way to the operating and monitoring
devices has to be free and must not be
Caution! obstructed by any objects.
Fill in oil prior to commissioning!
Please refer to operating instructions of Prior to commissioning and
the sleeve bearing manufacturer for during maintenance works, all
amount and quality. persons in the danger area
have to be warned. They must
Generators with sleeve bearings need oil be ordered to leave the area.
to be re-filled before commissioning. The
instructions from the sleeve bearing After completion of work, the generator
manufacturer are enclosed. must be checked by qualified personnel to
ensure it is in a safe working state.
2.2 Safety Devices
2.4 Safety precautions for maintenance
Special covers are mounted to protect
against mechanical danger (e.g. rotating Maintenance should normally
parts). Protection against electrical danger only be performed when the
is provided by covers and devices against generator is out of operation
over-voltage and over-current. It is not (except for the re-lubrication
allowed to change or dismount any safety of anti-friction bearings). The prime
devices or to put them out of order. mover has to be disconnected.
General Notes
AH/e-04-2003/A page 4
After completion of the maintenance work, They are only used as mounting device
it must be ensured that all protection and for these add-ons.
safety devices are back in place properly.
• The ring bolts can only be used for the
2.5 Special Dangers transport of the separate machine,
they are not designed to lift the
The operator of the machine complete unit (generator and prime
has to take care, that the mover)
rules for fire protection are
kept and the equivalent • For transporting the machine, the
agents for fire extinction are available following devices are permitted:
near the machine and ready for use.
- Cable and chains,
3. Shipping, Handling, Storage
that comply with the local regulations,
3.1 Safety precautions for transport that have a sufficient carrying capacity,
that are in an excellent working condition
Please comply with the local
valid regulations for It is not permitted to use
shipments. cables that are torn or worn.
Cables and chains may not be
knotted. Cables and chains
Warning! must not touch any sharp edges.
Never move loads over
persons! - Lifting devices: cranes
overhead cranes
• The shipment and the unloading of the
generator must only be performed by • Moving the machine over rough
personnel, who are familiar with the ground e.g. rails, by using a haulage
lifting cranes and corresponding car is not permitted. This may cause
devices. damage to the bearings and the
windings. This is especially important
• The lifting devices have to be designed for the moving of the machine within
for the weight of the generator the factory.
(Chapter 3.4).
3.2 Packaging
• Follow the shipping instructions
(pictographs) on the cover of the The material used for the packing of the
generator. generator is made of ozone-friendly
material – like wood. The packaging
• The generator must only be supported depends on the mode of transport used –
on its feet. The support on any other surface, water or air freight.
part is not permitted. That is why the When the transport time is for a longer
generator is delivered with a period, then the generator will be packed
transportation construction. in a protective covering against dust or
humidity.
• For the lifting of the generator, ring
bolts are mounted on the generator 3.3 Checking for Shipping Damage
housing.
We recommend checking the
Ring bolts, that are mounted generator for shipping
on add-on pieces like e.g. the damages and complete
cooler top, must not be used delivery by the time of
to lift the whole machine! delivery.
General Notes
AH/e-04-2003/A page 5
If there are damages on the goods (open
damages) report these to the haulage
contractor at take-over. In this case, the
receipt should only be given under
reservation with a written statement
regarding the estimated amount of the
damage.
If damages that were not noticeable by the

time of delivery (covered damages), are
detected later, they have to be reported
promptly to AvK, latest 6 days after receipt
of the delivery.
3.4 Unloading the generator
The unloading has to be performed in

compliance with the safety precautions for
transport (see chapter 3.1) and the local
safety precautions and rules for the
prevention of accidents.
Please refer to the freight

papers and the data of the
respective order (Rating
plate) for the weight of the
generator.
The weight of the generator is also
written on the rating plate.
3.5 Storage of the generator
After unloading, the

generator and possible
boxes with loose parts have
to be stored until installation,
following the shipping instructions.
Wrapped parts and assessories must not

be unwrapped if the generator is stored for
a longer period of time.
The machine and packages have to be

stored in a safe place, dust-free and dry
(humidity < 75%). Avoid mechanical
vibrations and damages.
If it is planned to store the

generator for a longer period
of time, please contact AvK
for further information.
General Notes
AH/e-04-2003/A page 6
Bunsenstraße 17
85053 Ingolstadt, Germany
Phone: +49(0)841-792-0
Fax: +49(0)841-792-250
e-mail: [email protected]
www.newage-avkseg.com

Dreieich branch
Benzstraße 47-49
63303 Dreieich, Germany
Phone: +49(0)6103-5039-0
Fax: +49(0)6103-5039-40
AvK Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG / Service Date: 22.07.2002
AvK Checklist to Order No. Page 2
Customer: .............................................................
Order No.: .............................................................
Generator Type: .............................................................
Operation Hours: .............................................................
Bearing design: Roller bearing
Sleeve bearing
YES NO
Replacement of oil:
YES NO
Bearing inspection performed:
I. Electrical Inspection
Pos. 1.1 - 1.19
II. Mechanical Inspection
Pos. 2.1 - 2.20
III. Test Run
Pos. 3.1 - 3.14
IV. Maintenance Result

Environmental Conditions:
a) Location: building marine
b) Atmosperic conditions: dry high humidity

dust salt
c) Ventilation: unrestricted adequate

restricted inadequate
Operating Conditions:
a) Site duty: single parallel idle
b) Duty cycle: 24 hours daily occasionally standby
c) Load condition: inductive non linear
d) Operation: manned unmanned
Generator Conditions:
a) Dirt content: slight dust light layer dirt

thick dust thick compact dirt
b) Corrosion: none, very little steel/iron

copper severe (....................)
c) Engine: Type: ....................

Serial No.: ....................
Fuel: ....................

I. Electrical Inspection
performed Complaints
see page 11
1.1 Examination of cable entry and cable shoes

to main terminal box
1.2 Examination of strain relief of connecting power cables
1.3 Check of fixation of transformers installed
1.4 Examination of cable entry and cable shoes

to auxiliary terminal box
1.5 Check of strain relief of connection cables
1.6 Insulation test of stator windings
a) Stator winding phase U against ground

Resistance ............. MΩ Voltage ............. V
b) Stator winding phase V against ground

c) Stator winding phase W against ground

1.7 Insulation test of stator windings
a) Stator winding phase U against phase V

b) Stator winding phase U against phase W

c) Stator winding phase W against phase V

1.8 Resistance measurement of stator

see page 11
1.9 Check and re-tightening of all screws and nuts

in main terminal box by dynamometric key
1.10 Cleaning and examination of insulators for cracks
1.11 Re-tightening of contact screws and nuts on

auxiliary terminal strip
1.12 Resistance measurement of auxiliary windings
1.13 Insulation test of auxiliary windings
1.14 Examination of anti-condensation heater
............. V ............. A
1.15 Insulation resistance measurement of rotor winding
a) Insulation measurement main rotor

b) Insulation measurement exciter rotor

1.16 Resistance measurement of rotor
1.17 Inspection of rotating rectifiers
1.18 Inspection of stator end winding with endoscope
Inspection of stator end winding without endoscope
1.19 Inspection of rotor winding with endoscope
Inspection of rotor winding without endoscope

II. Mechanical Inspection
see page 11
Sleeve Bearing Design
YES NO
Oil lubrication system installed:
2.1 Check of oil level in sleeve bearing
2.2 Check for leakage of sleeve bearings
2.3 Inspection of sleeve bearing with endoscope
Inspection of sleeve bearing without endoscope
2.4 Check of oil quantity of oil lubrication system
2.5 Check of oil pressure of oil lubrication system:
.................... mbar
2.6 Check of oil temperature of oil lubrication system
2.7 Check of oil pressure inside the bearing housing
.................... mbar
2.8 Check of lubrication ring
2.9 Check for any corrosion on drive side and non-drive side bearing
2.10 Oil viscosity used: according to ISO VG .................

see page 11
Roller/Ball Bearing Design
2.11 Relubrication of roller/ball bearing according to operating instructions
2.12 Removal of surplus grease
2.13 Removal of old grease from bearing covers
Additional Mechanical Checks
2.14 Inspection of abrasion of earthing brush
2.15 Inspection of base frame for mechanical deviations
Mounting of alternator / Check of feet fixation
2.16 Visual inspection of the drive coupling
2.17 Check of inlet and outlet airducts for dust and dirt
2.18 Check of inlet and outlet airducts for corrosion
2.19 Cooler / leakage monitoring
2.20 Check of drainage stoppers / drainage for condensation

water

III. Test Run
see page 11
3.1 Check whether earthing switch is disconnected
3.2 Check of bearing noise
3.3 SPM bearing analysis: DE: LR .......... HR ..........
NDE: LR .......... HR ..........
3.4 Check of oil amount in sleeve bearings during operation
3.5 Effectivity of lubrication ring
3.6 Tripping of temperature protector for check

of alarm and shut down
3.7 Vibration test / Vibration values (mm/s)
DE: .......... Hor. .......... Ver. .......... Axi.
NDE: .......... Hor. .......... Ver. .......... Axi.
Frame: ............. Airduct inlet: ............. Airduct outlet: .............
Output: ............. kW

see page 11
3.8 Check of regulator functions at no-load operation
a) Exciter current at rated voltage and rated speed:
I1-I1': ............. A
b) Exciter current at rated load:
I1-I1': ............. A
c) Supply voltage: UH1-UH2: ............. V
UH1-WH2: ............. V
WH1-WH2: ............. V
d) Under speed protection: H1 LED off ............. Hz
3.9 Check of parallel operation
Check of distribution of load
Statics adjustment .......... %
3.10 Check of overcurrent and short circuit protection trip
3.11 Check of differential protective trip
3.12 Check of exciter monitoring system
XE2
TO 109/110.1
3.13 Check of generator voltage in parallel operation
grid voltage min.: ............. kV

grid voltage max.: ............. kV

see page 11
3.14 Bearing and winding temperature after continuous

operation
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________
__________________________________________

IV. Maintenance Result
Complaints:
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________
The operation of the alternator can be continued without immediate

elimination of the complaints.
Electrical and mechanical checks were performed without any

complaints.
The alternator must be stopped immediately due to the complaints.
Date: ________________ ________________________

(Signature Customer)
________________________
(AvK-Service-Technician)

Bunsenstraße 17
Phone: +49(0)841-792-0
Fax: +49(0)841-792-250

Dreieich branch
Benzstraße 47-49
Phone: +49(0)6103-5039-0
Fax: +49(0)6103-5039-40
AvK Deutschland GmbH und Co. KG Page 1 of 2
Suggested Maintenance Schedule for AvK Order No.:

Customer:
Date:
Pos. A Components Frequency Maintenance Carried out by

1 General alternator check 12 month According to AvK Checklist. AvK
Pos. B Additional components Frequency Maintenance Carried out by

1 Rotor windings 12 month *) The insulation resistance must be checked with a megger AvK
when the alternator has reached ambient temperature.
2 Exciter approx. 25,000 h *) Remove any accumulated dust from the rotating rectifier AvK
and the exciter stator. Check if the electrical connections
are secure.
3 Rectifier assembly approx. 25,000 h *) Remove dirt adhering to the rectifier unit parts. AvK
4 Stator end winding approx. 25,000 h *) Inspect and remove deposits of dust, dirt and grease. Do AvK
not use any abrassive materials or fluids. Use only
electrocleaner.
Caution: In case of heavy winding contamination please

call the AvK Service Department.
5 Protection equipment 12 month *) Check mechanical and electrical connections according AvK
to the supplier´s specification / manual.
6 Space heater 6 month Ensure that the electrical heater is operating to prevent Customer
condensation. Check the power supply as well as the
insulation resistance.
*) Maintenance frequency depends on the operating conditions at site.
Maintenance-e.xls Service / Steller Date: 18.04.2000

AvK Deutschland GmbH und Co. KG Page 2 of 2
Suggested Maintenance Schedule for AvK Order No.:

Customer:
Date:
Pos. B Additional components Frequency Maintenance Carried out by

7 Ball and roller bearings Grease relubrication acc. Check oil or grease for any contamination particles. AvK / Customer
to supplier´s manual
and/or name plate.
6 month SPM bearing analysis. AvK

8 Sleeve bearing: Oil ring 6 month Ensure that the oil ring is rotating freely and picking up Customer
enough oil when the shaft is turning.
9 Sleeve bearing: Oil seals 6 month Check for oil leaks. Customer
25,000 h *) The oil seals must be changed. AvK

10 Sleeve bearing: Complete check 50,000 h The bearing check must be done (according to supplier´s AvK
manual) and the oil seals must be changed.
11 Oil pipes and flanges 6 month Check for oil leaks. Customer
After the first 500 running hours it is recommended to
tighten the screws of the flanges again.
12 Sleeve bearing: Oil level monthly The oil level must be visible in the viewing glass. Customer
(Approx. one third of the diameter.)
13 Bearing earthing brush 3 month Check the earthing brush for abrasion. Customer
14 Dust filter 3 month *) At the appropriate intervals, the filters must be checked Customer
to establish their degree of contamination with dust and
dirt.
15 Cooler 6 month Check the cooler elements and leakage detector. Customer
16 Complete alternator 100,000 h Review with manufacturer for recommendations for full AvK
inspection / overhaul.
*) Maintenance frequency depends on the operating conditions at site.
Maintenance-e.xls Service / Steller Date: 18.04.2000

Customer Complaint Report FM 7.5-14
Kunden- Beanstandungsbericht Page 1 of 1

Distribution List: Customer => AvK Contact person, according to Customer Contact List DA 7.5-1 or
AvK Hompage www.newage-avkseg.com
1.0 General Complaint information

Allgemeine Daten der Beanstandung:
Customer Place of Complained

Kunde
Alternator Einsatzort
Contact Person Customer Customer Fax No.:
Ansprechpartner Kunde Kunden Fax Nr.
Customer Phone No.: Customer Complain No.:

Kunden Beanstandungs - Nr.
Kunden Tel. Nr.
Customer email Type of alternator:

Kunden Email Generator Typ
AvK Order.- Nr.: AvK Serial No.:

AvK Masch. - Nr.:
2.0 Failure description / Fehlerbeschreibung
Defect Part
Defektes Bauteil
3.0 Immediate measure by customer/ Sofortmaßnahme durch den Kunden

Initiated (date) / eingeleitet am:
Successfully completed (date):

erfolgreich abgeschlossen am
4.0 Enclosures / Anlagen

Photos / Fotos others:
sonstiges
Dokumentenname: Revisionsstand:
7_5f14a.doc AvK Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG A vom 09.10.03
Customer Contact List DA 7.5-1
Service and Warranty Claim Handling for AvK Alternators 1 von 2
Technical Service on-site (after warranty):

Products Countries Contact E-mail Phone Fax
All AvK
UK Sarah Nicholls [email protected] +44-(0)1780-484 ~767 ~104
Products
All AvK Spain
John Johnson [email protected] Mobile: +34-(0)629183929
Products Portugal
All AvK France

Rene Moulin [email protected] +33-(0)16074 ~9843 ~9844
Products french speaking North Africa
All AvK Italy

Guiseppe Cinnirella [email protected] +39-(0)2-38000 ~714 ~664
Products
Norway
Sweden
All AvK Denmark
Jan Jakobsen [email protected] +47-(0)22-9744~37 ~45
Products Finland
Baltic States
Russia
North America 001-763-528-7301-6
South America
All AvK Direct: 001-763-574 ~5000 ~5082
Mexico Gary O`Malley [email protected]
Products Central America TOLL FREE: (1) 800 ~367-2764 ~863-9243
Canada
Australia +61-(0)2-9680 ~2299 ~1545
All AvK
New Zealand Theo Dragonas [email protected]
Products Mobile: +61-(0)412-886643
South Pacific
All AvK +41 317 408 282
Switzerland Martin Läderach [email protected] +41 317 408 280
Products Mobile: +41 7920 17561
Dokumentenname:
Revisionsstand:
Customer contact.doc AvK Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG
B vom 30.03.05
Stand: B vom 07.04.05
Customer Contact List DA 7.5-1
Service and Warranty Claim Handling for AvK Alternators 2 von 2
Products Countries Contact E-mail Phone Fax

Singapore Richard Lee, [email protected] +65-(0)6794-3737/5 +65-(0)6898-9065
Malaysia
Philippines
All AvK Anthony Tan [email protected] Mobile: +65-(0)979-192-57
Indonesia
Products Thailand Trisno Sumarlin [email protected] +62-214601685
Taiwan
Vietnam (Indonesia)
All AvK +86-(0)510-521 ~6212 ~7673
China Jason Xu [email protected]
Products Mobile: +86-(0)139-5157-0763
All AvK +81-(0)354-415 ~588 ~590
Japan, Korea Darryl Hanna [email protected]
Products Mobile: +81-(0)906-386-574
All AvK
India, Nepal R.K. Kapur [email protected] +91-(0)9811196343
Products
Contact for Warranty Claims:

Product Countries Contact E-mail Phone Fax
All AvK +49-(0)841-792 ~163 ~195
Worldwide Norbert Steller [email protected]
Products Mobile: +49-(0)171-221-9453
Issued Approved
am: 30.03.03 30.03.03
von: Norbert Steller Emilia Sandau

Service Manager Assistant Service Manager
Unterschrift:
Norbert Steller Emilia Sandau
Dokumentenname:
Revisionsstand:
Customer contact.doc AvK Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG
B vom 30.03.05
Stand: B vom 07.04.05
Drawings
Circuit Diagrams
Seite 1 Legende zum Schaltbild Nr. Legend to Circuit Diagram No.
Page 1 K 850.3.123 mit 2xDECS200 Regler K 850.3.123 with 2xDECS200 AVR
F1 Schutzschalter für G3 Protection switch for G3

NUR IM STILLSTAND BETÄTIGEN ONLY SWITCH ON AT STANDSTILL
G1 Hauptmaschine Main machine
G2 Erregermaschine Exciter machine
G3 Hilfserregerwicklungen Auxiliary exciter windings
Q1 Spannungswandlerschutzschalter Voltage transformer protection switch
NUR IM STILLSTAND BETÄTIGEN SWITCH ON ONLY AT STANDSTILL
13-14,21-22 Meldung 13-14,21-22 Signal
R11 Rotierender Varistor Rotating varistors
V1 Rotierende Gleichrichter Rotating rectifiers
T25,T26 Spannungswandler in V-Schaltung zur 3-phasigen Voltage transformers in V-connection for sensing voltage
Istwerterfassung, 11kV/110V 10VA Klasse 0,5 measurement, 11kV/110V 10VA cl.0,5
T32 Spannungswandler für G3 mit integriertem Voltage transformer for G3 with integrated protection
Schutzschalter F1 switch F1
F1 - nur im Stillstand betätigen! F1 - only switch at standstill!
DECS 200 2 Spannungsregler DECS200 2 Alternator voltage regulator DECS200 on

auf Montageplatte MP251 mounting plate MP251
Versorgungsspannung 24 VDC supply voltage 24 VDC
T6 Stromwandler für Strommessung Phase V ( B ) Current transformer for line B sensing input
Übersetzung 150 / 1A <=3VA, 1/3 Nennstrom Ratio 150/ 1A <=3VA, 1/3 of rated current led through
durchgeführt
Messspannungsanschluß 3-phasig Sensing voltage connection 3-phase , pay attention to

Bedienungsanleitung unbedingt beachten! DECS manual!
3-phasiger Anschluß: 3phase sensing:
Verbindungen: U-E1, V-E2, W-E3 connect: A-E1,B-E2, C-E3
Bedienungsanleitung DECS200 Pay attention to DECS 200 manual!

unbedingt beachten!
Schnellentregung: Quick de-excitation:
Brücken UH1-24 öffnen Open bridges UH1-24
Schnellentregung: Quick de-excitation:

Brücken UH1-24 öffnen Open bridges UH1-24
X1 Hauptklemmen Main terminals

X2 Klemmleiste für Regleranschluß Terminal strip for AVR connection
X3 Klemmleiste für Regleristwertspannung Terminal strip for AVR sensing voltage measurement
X4.1 Klemmleiste für Stillstandsheizung Terminal strip for heaters
X4.2 Klemmleiste für PT100 Terminal strip for RTD`s (PT100)
X5.1 Klemmleiste für Stromwandler Terminal strip for CT`s
X5.2 Klemmleiste für Rotorerdschlußüberwachung Terminal strip for rotor earth fault monitoring
X7.1,7.2,7.3 Klemmleiste für Lagerölversorgungsanlagen Terminal strips for bearing oil supply systems
,7.4
X8 Klemmleiste für Lüftermotoren Terminal strips forfan motors
---- Verbindungen außerhalb des Generators Connections outside the alternator
Erstellt am: 5.8.06 Issued on: 5.8.06

AvK geprüft von: Diegeler Checked by: Diegeler
Revision Nr.: 0 Revision No.: 0
Seite 2 Legende zum Schaltbild Nr. Legend to Circuit Diagram No.
Page 2 K 850.3.123 mit 2xDECS200 Regler K 850.3.123 with 2xDECS200 AVR
ZUBEHÖR ACCESSORIES
Widerstandsthermometer PT100 Resistance Thermometer PT100
A1-12 Statorwicklung Stator winding
Phase U: 1, 4 , 7, 10 Phase U: 1, 4 , 7, 10
Phase V: 2, 5 , 8, 11 Phase V: 2, 5 , 8, 11
Phase W: 3, 6 , 9, 12 Phase W: 3, 6 , 9, 12
A13,14 Lager, B-Seite Bearing, NDE
A15,16 Lager, A-Seite Bearing, DE
A20,21 Generator Zuluft Alternator air inlet

A22 Generator Abluft Alternator air outlet
H1 Stillstandsheizung 230V 1500W Anti condensation heater 230V 1500W

H2 Stillstandsheizung 230V 1500W Anti condensation heater 230V 1500W
Stromwandler Current Transformer

T14-16 Für Schutz (P) for Protection (P)
Kern Nr. 1: X5, 1-6 (P) Core No. 1: X5, 1-6 (P)
Kern Nr. 2: X5, 7-12 (P) Core No. 2: X5, 7-12 (P)
400 / 1 / 1 A; 20 / 20 VA; 5P10 / 5P10 400 / 1 / 1 A; 20 / 20 VA; 5P10 / 5P10
M3-11kV Zorc Spannungsableiter 3-phasig Zorc voltage arrester 3 phase
Erstellt am: 5.8.06 Issued on: 5.8.06

AvK geprüft von: Diegeler Checked by: Diegeler
Revision Nr.: 0 Revision No.: 0
Operating Instructions DIG
Operating instructions
Three-phase synchronous electrical machines,
Series DIG 110…191 with „COSIMAT N“ voltage regulator
Before installing and starting up this machine, please read these instructions carefully.
Machine Type:___________________ Dimension sheet No.____________________
Machine No._____________________ Circuit diagram No._____________________

CONTENTS
1. Operating and maintenance instruction ………… 3

1.1. Checking for damage incurred during transit ………… 3
1.2. Transport ………… 3
1.3. Storage ………… 3
1.3.1. Preservation ………… 3
Complete machine ………… 3
Shaft end, flange and bright metal areas ………… 3
Bearings ………… 3
Sleeve bearings ………… 3
Ball and roller bearings ………… 3
Cooler ………… 3
1.4. Setting up the machine ………… 3
1.5. Cooling the machine ………… 4
1.5.1. Coolant temperature ………… 4
Direction of cooling air ………… 4
Quality of cooling air ………… 4
1.6. Dust filter ………… 4
1.6.1. Synthetic filter elements ………… 4
1.6.2. Woven metal filter elements ………… 4
1.7. Preparations prior to starting up ………… 4
1.7.1. Removing preservation ………… 5
Complete machine ………… 5
Shaft end, flange and bright metal areas ………… 5
Bearing ………… 5
Sleeve bearing ………… 5
Ball and roller bearings ………… 5
Cooler ………… 5
1.8. Machine drive ………… 5
1.8.1. Belt drive ………… 5
1.8.2. Coupling drive ………… 5
1.9. Aligning the machine ………… 6
1.10. Changing direction of rotation ………… 7
1.11. Electrical connections ………… 7
1.12. Starting up ………… 7
1.12.1. Insulation resistance ………… 7
1.12.2. Operating speed ………… 8
1.12.3. No-load operation ………… 8
1.12.4. Parallel operation ………… 8
1.12.5. Loss of remanence ………… 9
1.13. Power factor regulation ………… 9
1.14. Interference suppression ………… 9
1.15. Operation ………… 9
1.16. Maintenance ………… 9
1.17. Bearings ………… 9
1.17.1. Ball and roller bearings ………… 9
Re-lubricating the bearings …………10
Re-lubrication intervals …………10
Re-lubrication quantity …………10
Lubrication chart …………10
Ball and roller bearing grease …………10
Dismantling the bearings …………11
Assembling the bearings …………11
Monitoring the bearings …………11
1.18. Drying out the machine …………11
Operating Instructions DIG 110...191 page 2

Rev. November 2001
1.Operating and maintenance instructions • Complete machine
Store the machine in a dry, dust-free condition, for

1.1.Checking for damage incurred during transit example heat-sealed in plastic foil into which a quantity
of desiccant has been placed, or ventilated with dry air.
Immediately after receiving the machine, inspect it for Make sure that no moisture can condense on or in the
damage incurred during transit. The transport or machine and its attached assemblies. The machine must
delivering company must be notified of possible not be exposed to vibration while in storage.
complaints immediately, or at the latest within seven days
of delivery (covered by warranty). • Shaft end, flange and bright metal areas
Clean rust and dirt off the bright metal surfaces and
1.2. Transport apply a protective lacquer coating. Make sure that the
coating is not porous.
During transit, support the machine only on its feet. Do
not allow the weight to be taken by any other • Bearings
components.
Sleeve bearings
Lift the machine at the crane rings attached to the stator Drain the oil and apply a corrosion inhibitor to the
housing. Note that crane rings on attached components bearing, for instance Tectyl 511 M in the case of sleeve
such as the cooler assembly must not be used to lift the bearings lubricated with mineral oil. If the bearings are
complete machine. They are intended only to simplify lubricated with a synthetic oil, make sure that the bearing
attachment of these components. materials, the oilcontent and the preserving agent are all
compatible.
In the case of complete machine sets on a base frame,
use only the lifting facilities provided on the base frame. Ball and roller bearings
The crane rings on the electrical machine itself are not To prevent brinelling marks caused by vibration when at
rated for lifting the complete machine set. a standstill, bearings should either be pre-loaded with a
transit keeper or the rotor should be turned once a
If transported over long distances, it is advisable to month to alter the position of the balls or rollers. The
protect the machine against environmental influences by bearing´s grease content should be increased to the
sealing it in a plastic cover together with a quantity of maximum.
desiccant (moisture indicator), so that it remains dust-free
and air-tight. • Cooler
Machines with plain or taper roller bearings, and Drain out the cooling water, clean the pipes, flush
machines in a single bearing design are supplied with through with clean water and dry the complete cooler,
shipping brace. This shipping brace should never be using warm or pre-dried air.
removed until the machine has been set up in its future
operating position on site. Install the shipping brace Check the efficacy of the protective treatment measures
again if the machine is, for instance, to be shipped on or once a year. If ambient conditions are particularly
stored as a separate unit after trials. unfavorable, check at more frequent intervals. If
necessary, repeat the protective treatment.
For transport as a complete machine set, take the
necessary safety precautions, for instance support the
machine set on anti-vibration elements or attach transit 1.4. Setting up the machine
keepers.
The installation site must comply with the machine´s
enclosure rating and be sufficiently large for cooling and
1.3. Storage maintenance purposes. When setting up the machine,
make sure that:
If the machine is to be stored after trial running, note the
following points: • The relevant operation and maintenance safety
regulations are observed
1.3.1. Preservation
• Cooling air can enter and exit freely

Rev. November 2001
• Exhaust gas and heated cooling air cannot be drawn 1.6. Dust filter
in by the machine
If the machine is equipped with dust filters, please note
the following points.
1.5. Cooling the machine
• The cooling air must not exceed the temperature
1.5.1. Coolant temperature stated on the machine´s data plate.
Unless otherwise specified, the machine is built to run at • At the appropriate intervals, the filters should be
a coolant temperature of up to 40°C and at an checked to establish their degree of contamination
installation height of up to 1000 meters above mean sea with dust and dirt.
level. Please refer to the machine´s data plate for
coolant temperature and power rating. To ensure that the machine´s windings cannot overheat
as a result of blocked filters, three temperature sensors
Coolant temperatures higher than stated on the are provided in the stator winding. These sensors must
machine´s data plate will result in power loss. be connected to the warning system.
Coolant temperature Max. available power 1.6.1. Synthetic filter elements

45°C 96%
50°C 92,5% These are dry-type filters and must be cleaned at regular
intervals, which depend on the amount of dust and dirt
If the machine is ordered to run at coolant temperatures trapped by the fliter. FIlter elements can be cleaned with
higher than 40°C, this is shown on its rating plate compressed air, water at a temperature not exceeding
together with the alteration in power rating. 50°C or a liquid detergent, but it is often a more
economical proposition to renew them.
1.5.2. Direction of cooling air
Comply with all relevant environmental protection and
The machine is cooled by an integral fan dependent on safety regulations.
the direction of rotation, mounted on the shaft. It draws
cooling air through the machine and expels it at the fan 1.6.2. Woven metal filter elements
side.
These are supplied dry, that is to say not wetted with oil.
To ensure proper cooling, make sure that the direction of They can either be operated dry or sprayed with special
fan rotation is as indicated by the arrow on the machine. filter oil. If the filter elements are sprayed with oil, comply
with the relevant environmental protection laws when
If it is intended to use forced cooling, either alone or to cleaning them. They can be cleaned with a high-pressure
support the integral fan, the direction of airflow and
rotation must be correct here too. cleaning unit. Additives to dislodge grease can be used,
provided that they have been checked for compatibility
with the filter material. After cleaning, dry the fliter
Important: elements and if necessary spray the with fresh oil.
The distance between the air inlet or outlet on the
machine and any nearby wall must not be less than the Comply with all relevant environmental protection and
dimension stated below, otherwise ventilation will be safety regulations.
obstructed.
Minimum distance (guide value): Regular cleaning of the filter elements is still needed even
1 x diameter of machine if the electrical machine´s windings are protected against
overheating by built-in temperature sensors. Careful
1.5.3. Quality of cooling air attention to this point will ensure that the machine always
runs cool and reliably.
To extend the service life of the machine, and in
1.7. Preparations for starting up
particular its windings and bearings, it is extremely
important that neither contaminated not aggressive
Pull the protective lasquer coating off the end of the shaft
cooling air be allowed to enter it. An air fliter can be
and the flange, or remove it with solvent. Never clean it
installed if requested by the customer, or can be trofitted
off with emery cloth. Comply with the relevant
provided sufficient space is available.
regulations on environmental protection and safety.

Rev. November 2001
There is a threaded hole on the shaft, to which a puller bearings so that only the specified amount remains in the
can be attached for installing and removing discs or bearing (see chapter on renewing bearings and
couplings. Hammering is not permitted, as this can lubrication plate).
damage the bearings. If the machine is delivered with
shipping brace in position, remove it. • Cooler
If the machine ist of singlebearing design, its rotor is Add water to the cooling circuit and operate it in
delivered attached to the shaft flange and the housing by accordance with the cooler manufacturer´s operating
a steel hoop to prevent axial displacement and is located and maintenance instructions.
in position radially between the shaft and fan housing by
an angle bracket. Both these transit keepers (axial and 1.8. Machine drive
radial) must be removed.
1.8.1. Belt drive
Make quite sure that the radial transit keepers are
removed from the gap only after the rotor has been If the machine is driven by a belt, the machine must be
centered on the drive shaft flange. Failure to do so can ordered specifically with bearings and bearing
result in damage to the exciter machine and the NDS lubrication to match the higher loadings. Most belt-
(Non-drive-side) bearing. driven machines have roller bearings on the input side.
In the case of machines with a steel disc coupling, the The rotor must be ordered with balancing by solid key,
radial transit keepers are screws in the flange bell. They and the grooved belt pulley must be dynamically
must be removed after the machine has been aligned balanced on a smooth mandrel. The belt must run
and its position fixed in relation to the drive input. smoothly, without jerking.
Desired balancing accuracy: = Q 2,5 according to
If the machine was given protective treatment following a German VDI 2060 standard.
trial run, the following measures must be taken:
When flat-type belts or V-belts which have already been
1.7.1. Removing preservation in operation for a fairly long time are removed for
maintenance purposes, they must be replaced by new
• Complete machine ones (in case of hardening).
Check the machine´s insulation resistance. If it is below Important:

the minimum value (see Chapter 1.12.1, Insulation
resistance), the machine must be dried out. The Belts that are tensioned too tightly can put the bearings
procedure is described in Chapter 1.18., Drying out the at risk. For this reason, establish the correct belt tension
machine. with the belt manufacturer or the plant that supplied the
machine, and have checks carried out on site.
• Shaft end, flange and bright metal areas
1.8.2. Coupling drive
Remove the protective lacquer coating with a suitable
solvent. Do not rub it off with emery cloth. Comply with Unless expressly ordered otherwise, the rotor is balanced
the relevant environmental protection and safety with a solid key. The grooved drive elements must
regulations. therefore be balanced on a smooth mandrel.
• Bearings The coupling must be dynamically balanced to an

accuracy of
Sleeve bearings = Q 2,5 according to VDI 2060.
Dismantle and clean the sleeve bearings. The corrosion
inhibiting agent must be removed. (this is not necessary if When installing the coupling on to the shaft end, make
Tectyl 511 M was used and the storage period was fairly sure that no hammer-blows or shocks are transmitted to
short, provided that the bearing is then lubricated with the machine´s bearings. Always use a suitable puller.
mineral oil).
Fill the sleeve bearings with oil as stated on the When pulling the coupling on, comply with its
lubrication plate and in the operating instructions. manufacturer´s assembly instructions. Unless otherwise
stated by the supplier, the coupling half can be heated
Ball and roller bearings up to 80°C. It can then be pushed on to the shaft end
Open the bearing housing and remove the additional easily. Ensure that the drive element is securely located
quantity of grease which was previously added to the

Rev. November 2001
after tightening, and securely clamped against the While checking, turn the coupling slowly through 360°C,
mechanical stop on the shaft. at the same time taking the readings at the individual
dial gauges. Attach one dial gauge radially and two
axially, to compensate for rotor displacement. Refer to
1.9. Aligning the machine the coupling manufacturer´s data as a guide to
permissible deviations from true alignment.
Precise, careful alignment of the machine ensures that it
runs with the minimum vibration, thus extending the
service life of the machine and in particular of the
bearings. This applies to machnies with either flexible or
rigid couplings.
Even slight errors of alignment can rapidly result in

damaged bearings.
It is vital that all the feet are fully in contact. Uneven
undersurfaces cause stresses in the bearings and must be
compensated for by attaching sheet metal strips. Once
the machine is aligned correctly, secure it with dowel
pins. When aligning a machine of single bearing design,
it is important to comply with the reference dimensions
specified on the dimension sheet and the drawing
showing tolerances and clearances included with the
machine. For further instructions, see the chapter on
plain bearings.
On machines with a steel disc coupling, radial rotor
alignment is by means of centering screws inserted into Possible test method:
the centering bell. These screws also act as transit Slowly turn the coupling through
keepers in a radial direction. They replace the 360°C and determine maximum
pressboard inserts otherwise placed in the air gap. deflection of the dial gauge.
Alignment is checked by measuring the distance between
the outer rim of the steel disc coupling and the machined M = dial gauge
inner diameter of the centering bell.
In the case of single-bearing machines with a divide DS
(drive side) end shield, accuracy of alignment is checked
by measuring the air gap.
If the machine has an undivided bearing plate, a

machined end disc is installed at the drive side. The
measurement is then made between the shaft and the
machined inner diameter of te end plate.
Take three measurements in each case, at 120-degree
intervals round the shaft. The results must not vary by
more than 0,2 mm.
This will ensure a uniform air gap beneath all poles and
the correct axial position of the rotor. Check alignment
accuracy at the end of the shaft or at the coupling.

Rev. November 2001
Guide values
Shaft center displacement Shaft tilt Coupling gap*

* Note coupling manufacturer´s data and allow for thermal expansion at the electrical machine and the drive.
If the coupling manufacturer specifies closer tolerances, The machine must be connected up according to the
always comply with them or obtain even lower values if accompanying circuit diagram. The marked earthing
possible. (grounding) screw must be connected to the earth
conductor. Installation is permitted by a qualified
During alignment, remember that the length may electrician only. Comply with the following points:
increase as a result of thermal expansion in the machine.
This change in length is approximately 0,1 ,, per meter • VDE safety regulations or those of the local safety
of machine length and per 10 degrees Centigrade of authorities
temperature rise.
• Local electricity supplier´s guidelines regarding
In all cases, try to approach the ideal clearance values protective measures
as closely as poosible.
• Phase sequence or direction of rotation of machine
Important points to be checked before starting up: field as stated on rating plate
a) have pressboard transit keeper inserts been removed • Correct direction of rotation as stated on the
from the air gap? machine´s data plate
b) Have the aligning screws been removed from the When connecting the cables, make sure that no
centering bell? mechanical forces can act on the machine´s connecting
terminals. This also applies during assembly work.
1.10. Changing direction of rotation Unused cable glands in the terminal box and machine
must be protected against dust and moisture, and closed
Before reversing the machine´s direction of rotation, it is so that they cannot turn. Take up slack at all screw
important that the manufacturer be consulted. contacts and nuts.
In most cases the fan is of a directional pattern and will If current surges or vibration are to be expected, secure
have to be renewed. the cables with cable clips or racks. If the plant is set up
on flexible mountings, ensure adequate clack in the
Note that the rotary field also changes with a reversal in cables.
the direction of rotation.
If the machine is to be used in parallel operation, the 1.12. Starting up

sensing lead plug connections on the regulator (U and
W) must be changed over so that connections U V W on 1.12.1. Insulation resistance
the regulator again receive a right-handed field. The
rotary field will change at the main terminas. After a long period out of use or in storage, the
machine´s insulation resistance must be measured.
1.11. Electrical connections Before starting uf any machine, measure the insulation
resistance of the winding between phases (if the star
point is separate) and between phase and earth. All parts
not subjected to the measuring voltage must be earthed.

Rev. November 2001
Use a maximum test voltage of 500 V DC for all
When measuring the insulation resistance, all secondary and measuring connections. Insulation
connections (main connection, measuring connection, resistance should not fall below 5 MO.
connection to regulator and protection or suppression
circuit) must be disconnected from the winding. 1.12.2. Operating speed
The suppression elements and measuring leads must be The machine´s speed must correspond to the value
disconnected during high-voltage insulation tests and stated on its rating plate. The machine must run
tests with insulation measuring appliances. smoothly, both at no-load and when under load.
Measure at 500 V DC on low-voltage machines (< 1 kV) If the drive machine runs at reduced speed, the voltage
or at above 2 kV on high-voltage machines (= 1 kV). regulator´s underspeed protection cuts in and de-excites
the machine. Irregular running will lead to deviations
Due to the capacitive charge in the winding, the from the nominal ratings.
measuring unit indicates the correct insulation resistance
value only after several seconds have elapsed. Earth the The machine is voltage-regulated and maintains a
winding immediately after the measuring voltage has voltage accurate to ± 1% in any condition between no
been switched off. load and full load, even if its speed fluctuates by ± 5%.
If the insulation values are too low, first check the In the case of special versions, the order values
terminal insulation for dirt and moisture. Clean or dry confirmed by the manufacturer should be adopted.
them as the case may be, and repeat the measurement.
1.12.3. No-load operation
Damp windings can lead to current leakage, flash-over
or breakdown. The no-load voltage can be adjusted within a range of
UN ± 8% by connecting the voltage setting rheostat to
If insulation resistance on new, cleaned or repaired terminals s and t.
windings is less than that stated below, drying out is
needed (see Item 1.18, Drying out the machine). The voltage regulator ensures that the voltage remains
constant as the machine warms up to its normal
On low-voltage machines with a nominal voltage below operating temperature.
1 kV, and in the rotor winding, insulation resistance
should not be less than 5 MO at a winding temperature 1.12.4. Parallel operation
of 25°C.
Machines operated in parallel are equipped with a
In the case of medium- and high-voltage machines with damper cage. They can be operated with identical or
a nominal voltage equal to or greater than 1 kV, the dissimilar machines or if necessary in parallel with the
insulation resistance in MO must be calculated using the mains.
following formula:
R = 3 + 2 x UN The three familiar preconditions for parallel operation

must be complied with:
Where UN is the nominal voltage of the machine
expressed in kV. • Identical voltages
• Identical frequencies
When testing insulation and measuring the windings, • Identical phase angles
these must be connected to the posts or bars as the case
may be, so that these parts are tested as well. Matching can be carried out manually or by an
automatic synchronizing device. For further details, see
Secondary connections such as measuring connections the supplier´s technical description.
to transformers and all connections to regulating,
protection or interference suppression circuits, must be In parallel operation, a distinction must be made
tested separately. Each of these connections must be between active and reactive load distribution.
checked individually at the terminal strip. This also
register the insulation resistance of the terminal strip. Active load distribution depends only on the speed
characteristic of the drive and cannot be influenced by
the electrical machine itself.

Rev. November 2001
Reactive load distribution is determined by the electrical
machine´s voltage characteristic, according to load. If there is moisture or dust in the terminal box, it must be
removed from the surface of the insulating parts. The
1.12.5. Loss of remanence reason for the accumulation of moisture or dust must
then be established and rectified.
If the auxiliary exciter machine (G3) has lost its
remanence, that is to say there is no voltage at terminals If severe dust occurs, the electrical machine should be
UH1-UH2 and WH1-WH2, terminal I2 (+) and K2 (-) blown through at regular intervals with dry compressed
must be excited briefly with a DC voltage (1,5 – 12 Volt) air, as it is running down to a standstill.
while the machine is running.
Clean the machine´s surface regularly as well, to prevent
dust and dirt from bulding up and adversely affecting the
1.13. Power factor regulation dissipation of heat.
For operation in parallel with the mains the machine can Make sure that the air inlets and outlets are not
be equipped with an additional automatic power-factor obstructed during operation.
regulator (for preset co phi range, see test report). For
further details, refer to the description and adjustment Apart from the bearings the dust filters (if installed) and
instructions for the additional „Cos“ power-factor the attached cooler, the machine requires no routine
regulating module in conjunction with the „COSIMAT N“ maintenance.
voltage regulator.
If carbon brushes are installed on the machine in
1.14. Interference suppression equipment designed to perform various monitoring
functions, they must be checked for wear at regular
The machine comply with radio inteference requirement intervals.
„N“ as stated in German VDE 0875. Note that the
standard of interference suppression is related to the If the machine has add-on equipment, for example a
quality of earthing. cooler, the additional maintenace instructions issued by
the manufacturers of this equipment must be complied
Disconnect suppressor capacitors, measuring with.
transfomers and regulators during high-voltage
insulation tests or if insulation measuring equipment is in Like any other machine, the electrical machine requires
use (if the test voltage reaches 80% of the factory´s test to be treated with care.
voltage).
1.17. Bearings
1.15. Operation 1.17.1. Ball and roller bearings
During operation, current-conducting and rotating parts The machine is fitted with anti-friction bearings. The DS
must be sealed with the covers provided for this purpose. has a floating bearing, the NDS a fixed bearing.
Increased vibration may result from insufficiently assurate If the bearings on either side are of the deep groove ball
alignment, poorly fitted foundations or frame, or weak bearing type, they are pre-loaded in relation to each
mountings. In addition, vibration can be introduced from other by spring elements, this ensures smoother running
the drive and non-drive sides. and reduces the negative effects of external sources of
vibration on the bearings. Deep-groove ball bearings are
1.16. Maintenance installed at both bearing points only to special order.
Before starting work on the machine make sure that it is The standard bearing specification is as follows: on the
switched off and take action to prevent it from being drive side, a roller bearing, on the non-drive side, a ball
switched on again. bearing or a duplex bearing consisting of one roller
bearing an one ball bearing.
Ensure that machine components which are live during
operation are at zero voltage (by earthing or Each of the machine´s bearings is normally provided
disconnecting the wiring). with a relubricating device. If a duplex NDS bearing is
installed, note that there are two grease nipples for
All work must be performed by qualified staff possessing relubricating. Refer to the appropriate column in the
the necessary knowledge and experience.

Rev. November 2001
lubrication chart for the correct volume of grease per Lubrication chart
nipple.
Type Lubrication Relubrication intervals in hours
Regreasing should be carried out with a grease gun at points* for machine running speed of:
the nippples provided on the machine. Quantity in
g
A regulator is installed to control grease volume, so that
1000-1200
1500-1800
old grease is expelled from the bearing.
500-600
750-900
bearing
bearing
Double
Single
Before regreasing, clean the nipple so that dirt cannot
min-1
min-1
min-1
min-1
DIG
enter the bearings.
120/
Where possible, apply grease when the machine is
… 60 40 2500 2000 1500 1000
running at reduced speed, unless this represents a
121
hazard for the operating personnel.
130/
… 80 60 2500 1500 1200 800
• Relubricating the bearings
131
140/
Ball and roller bearings are supplied ex- factory pakked
with high-quality anti-friction bearing grease and are … 100 60 2000 1500 800 600
therefore ready for immediate operation. Machines with 141
relubricating devices bear a plate on which the following 150/
information is stated: … 100 60 2000 1000 800 600
151
Relubricating interval in hours of operation
Quantity of grease 156 100 60 1800 900 700 500
Type of anti-friction bearing grease * In the case of double bearing, the amount of grease
stated in the „double bearing“ column is to be injected
• Regreasing interval into each of the grease nipples.
Bearing must be relubricated regularly in accordance

with the specified relubricating intervals (see chart). • Ball and roller bearing greases
Machines which have not been run for very many hours On delivery, the bearings are lubricated with high-grade,
must be relubricated at least once a year. If the stated lithium-saponified grease of Grade 3 consistency )NLGI
relubricating interval is below 1,200 hours, relubricate classification). The factory uses Shell Alvania R3 for this
twice a year. purpose.
Under adverse operating conditions, e.g. a humid The grease channels and the channel between the nipple
atmosphere, relatively high dirt accumulations, severe and bearings are filled with anti-friction bearing grease
vibrational loadings ets., the relubricating interval must before leaving the factory. The following alternative types
be reduced accordingly. If the permitted coolant of lithium-saponified anti-friction bearing grease may be
temperature is exceeded by app. 15°C, the relubricating used:
interval must be halved.
Shell Alvania R3
• Relubricating quantity Arcanol L71
Alpha lub LGMT 3
The machine´s bearings must each be relubricated with
the amount of grease stated. Remove expelled grease Or a lithium-saponified brand-name grease of
from the bearing points. equivalent specification, heat-resistant up to at least
When relubricating the bearings, run the machine if 130°C and complying with German Industrial Standard
possible at half speed for one hour to distribute the DIN 51825.
grease effectively. During this period, check the
temperatures of the bearings and compare them with the Recommendation:
temperatures recorded before relubricating.
Always relubricate the bearings with the same selected
brand of grease.

Rev. November 2001
• Dismantling the bearings
Once they have cooled down, pack the bearings fully
During shaft production, the bearing seat and the with grease. The inner and outer bearing covers must
bearing stop shoulder on the shaft are subject to each be filled with grese to approx. 50% of their full
particularly stringent quality control. This is essential to capacity.
maintain the accuracy of shape needed to keep the
bearings fully operational. When dismantling the • Monitoring the bearings
bearings, it is therefore important to handle the bearings
and bearing rings with particular care, otherwise the The first indication of damaged bearings is usually a
bearing seats on the shaft and bearing plate could noticeable change in temperature or running behavior,
become damaged. or noise and vibration if bearing damage has reached
and advanced stage.
To simplify dismantling, the parts can be heated
uniformly all round to a temperature of app. 80°C. Do Recommendation:
not install bearings previously removed, but renew them.
Monitor the bearings by measuring transmitted noise and
• Assembling the bearings vibration at regular intervals, and compare the readings
with those taken on previous occasions.
Bearings must only be renewed by a qualified person
possessing the necessary knowledge and experiece,
working in a dust-free environment, on a clean surface 1.18. Drying out the machine
and using suitable tools including metric wrenches.
The grease and bearings must be kept free of impurities, To protect the machine against moisture, the built-in
otherwise they will wear out faster and possibly even fail. heating should always be switched on when the machine
The correct arrangement of the bearing components does not emit any heat of its own. Even a slight increase
must be retained, this applies particularly in the event of in the temperature of the air inside the machine will
repair work. prevent moisture condensation on the insulating
components.
When renewing bearings, install original type-approved If the machine´s insulation value drops below that stated
bearings only, and maintain the corect amount of in the chapter „Insulation resistance“, the machine must
bearing play. The grease regulating disk should be be dried out.
rigidly attached to the shaft. Do not remove new
bearings from their packs until just before they are In many cases it can be dried suitably using its own
installed. Do not wash the bearings out, as the ventilation system, but it should not be electrically live
anticorrosion agent applied to them is compatible with while this is being carried out. De-excite the machine as
most customary anti-friction beraing greases. indicated in its circuit diagram. Operate the built-in
Clean the parts of the bearing that are to be re-installed. heating when drying out with the machine´s own
Before fitting the bearing, check for dimensional ventilation system.
accuracy and lack of distortion at the bearing seats on
the shaft and in the housing. If no improvement in the insulation resistance is
registered after a running period of approx. 2 hours,
When single-piece bearings (e.g. deep-groove ball the machine must be dried out additionally with dried
bearings) are installed, the force exerted to fit them must air supplied from the outside.
always be applied to the firmly located race, which has If this in turn does not increase the insulation resistance
to be mounted first. Forces applied to the free-moving after approx. 4 hours, the machine must be dried out by
race have to be transmitted through the balls or rollers, passing an electric current through the stator and rotor
which can damage them and their tracks. windings.
Installation of separable bearings (e.g. roller bearings) is However, this taks requires special knowledge and must
more straightforward. The two races can be installed therefore only be performed by personnel that has
separately. A screwing movement when assembling them received specific training. Please contact our service
helps to avoid rub marks. organization in this case.
When fitting the bearing on the shaft, heat it to about For additional information on bearing renewal or special
80°C in an oilbath, oven or by a suitable inductive operating conditions such as run-up synchronization,
heating method. Make absolutely sure that it is located rapid excitation or de-excitation, please do not hesitate
centrally and in positive contact with the shaft shoulder. to contact our engineers.

Rev. November 2001
Bunsenstraße 17
Phone: +49(0)841-792-0
Fax: +49(0)841-792-250

Dreieich branch
Benzstraße 47-49
Phone: +49(0)6103-5039-0
Fax: +49(0)6103-5039-40
Enclosure to Operating Instructions
Advise for Commissioning
Generator with vibration
absorbers on foundation
The relative movements between the gen-set and

By connection of the cables it must be ensured that
the foundation have to be compensated for by a
no forces have an effect on the machine connection
sufficiently long free cable length between the cable
terminals. The same counts for the time during
fixing on the gen-set and the foundation.
assembly.
If shock load or vibrations are to be expected, the

cables should be fixed over the cable clips and the
cable platform.
By elastic mounted gen-sets (see picture above)

sufficient 'free cable length' should be ensured to
compensate the movements of the diesel/gas motor.
In order to ensure that the movements do not have
a negative influence on the connection terminals,
the cable must be fixed with max. 300 mm distance
from the terminal box screw fitting. This cable fixing
has to be connected rigidly to the gen-set in order
to avoid relative movements between the cable
fixing and the terminal box.
AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 2

Generator with vibration
absorbers on frame base
By connection of the cables it must be ensured that In order to ensure that the movements do not have
no forces have an effect on the machine connection a negative influence on the connection terminals,
terminals. The same counts for the time during the cable must be fixed with max. 300 mm distance
assembly. from the terminal box screw fitting. This cable fixing
has to be connected rigidly to the gen-set in order
If shock load or vibrations are to be expected, the to avoid relative movements between the cable
cables should be fixed over the cable clips and the fixing and the terminal box.
cable platform.
The relative movements between the gen-set and
By elastic mounted gen-sets (see picture above) the foundation have to be compensated for by a
sufficient 'free cable length' should be ensured to sufficiently long free cable length between the cable
compensate the movements of the diesel/gas motor. fixing on the gen-set and the foundation.
AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 3

Connections
Using the Protection switches Q1, F1, F2

Cable connection acc. to DIN 46200
The purpose of these switches is to protect the
voltage transformers T24 (Q1) and the auxiliary
Elastic parts, such as spring washers, can be used
exciter winding (F1, F2). In case of failure, these
in the electrical connection, however, only on one
switches will lead to a quick de-excitation of the
side of the clamped conductor. If necessary,
machine.
additional washers are to be used. The other side is
for current conduction, why only washers or security
These switches are not to be used for de-exciting
locking plates of copper-zinc-alloys must be used.
the machine during operation or maintenance!
By electrical connection with eyelet rings, the eyelets
have to be protected by washers on both sides
Open star point
against bending.
The voltage transformer T24 has to be disconnected
and the cables sufficiently insulated! De-excite the
De- excitation
machine as described above.
Open the bridges UH1-24 and WH1-14 on the No tests are to be performed with open star point!
terminal strip X2. De-excitation with extern switch The correct connection of the power cables can be
takes place on these terminals, too. checked with appropriate equipment.
AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 4

Maintenance for earthing brush
All brushes and holders must be checked for free

Optimum maintenance and care for earthing movement. Blocked brushes may lead to damage.
brushes is the base for smallest brush wear. The
maintenance of brushes must take place after Worn out brushes must be renewed in time, so that
certain intervals that depend on the alternators size damages at the contact surface on the shaft can be
as well as load and ambient conditions. avoided. New earthing brushes do not need grind-
in (other than slip rings).
Brushes are subject to wear and tear and must be
cleaned by air (pressure or suction) from time to Using brushes bigger than the original size is only
time. Routine check every 3 months is possible after agreement with the supplier.
recommended by AvK to ensure about operational
behaviour and suitable changing intervals.
AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 5

Maintenance of Earthing Fault
Monitoring
Optimum maintenance and care of ht e brushes Note:

and slip rings is the base for smallest wear. The
maintenance must take place in certain time The Earthing Fault Monitoring is mounted on the
intervals. The frequency of the maintenances NDE of the machine.
depends on alternator size as well as on load and
ambient conditions. Attention:
Maintenance works must be performed only during

Brushes are subject to wear and tear and must be
standstill of the machine.
cleaned by air (pressure or suction) from time to
time. Routine checks every 3 months is
recommended by AvK in order to estimate the
necessary time intervals during the actual operation
Electrical Machines with two shaft
conditions.
ends
All brushes and holders must be checked for free
Bearing currents by electrical machines with two
movement. Blocked brushes may lead to damage.
shaft ends must be avoided.
Worned out brushes must be replaced in time in
AvK recommends an insulated coupling mounted
order to avoid damages on the slip rings and to
on the NDE.
ensure the perfect function of the Earthing Fault
Monitoring. New brushes need grind-in with the
Another possibility is that all bearings of the NDE
slip rings. The use of larger brushes than originally
aggregate are insulated.
mounted is only possible after agreement with the
supplier.
AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 6

Anti - condensation heater:
The anti condensation heater is to be connected

according to correct rating and supply voltage.
Please refer to rating plate of the machine.
Control of the anti – condensation heater should be

done that the heater
- is switched on after the machine has stopped,

- is switched off before starting up the machine.
Tubular heater type RHK T + H art. no.

100870 and 100872
Description
2 heaters type RHK dia. 8, 5mm x 500mm long

assembled into two brackets made of stainless steel
as per our drawing no 31522, heaters wired in
parallel by brass brackets, silicon insulated
connection cable 3000mm long.
Number of heater elements is according to required
heating power.
Technical data of the heaters
Heater sheath: Chrome-Nickel-Steel AISI 321
Heater wire: NiCr 8020, Mat. no.: 2.48869
Insulation material:
pure magnesium oxide, highly compacted
Connection:
threaded bolt M4 with silicon insulated cable
Tolerances
Diameter of heaters: 8,5mm ± 0,15mm

Straight length of
heaters: 500 ± 2 %
Wattage per heater: 500 Watt ± 10 %
Total wattage (4 heaters):1000 Watt ± 10 %
Voltage: 230 Volt
Dielectric strength: 1250 V
Final test: per standard
DIN EN 60 335
AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 7

AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 8
Bolting torque for fixing screws
If no further indications are made , use the

following bolting torque for connections of fixing
screws and fixing nuts:
screws screws
property class property class
8.8 4.6
M4 3,0 1,1
M5 3,5 2,2
M6 9,0 3,7
M8 18 9,0
M10 45 18
M12 50 31
M16 110 75
M20 250 150
M24 440 255
M30 980 510
M36 1730 890
M42 2700 1450
starting torque in Nm
Values according to VDI 2230 calculated

considering the maximal admissible surface
pressure under the screw head and a frictional co –
efficient µ ges = 0,125
AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 9

Dust filter made of metal fabric
Description
Design of the filter
The frames and the plates of the filter are fabricated

of:
• Constructional steel with zinc coated mesh wire
• Stainless steel with stainless steel mesh wire
alternatively depending on application
conditions
Type of filter
B1 according to DIN 24185 / part 100

EU2 according to DIN 24185 / part 2
Medium degree of deposition 65 = 80 %
Maintenance
The maintenance intervals depend on the local dust

accumulation. The dust protective filter plates have
to be cleaned with the usual commercial detergents.
Cleaning with high-pressure cleaning devices is
also possible.
Caution:
Do not wet the filter plates with oil!

Observe the instructions for pollution
control.
The following detergents can be used when

cleaning mechanically:
Calgonit / Somat / Topmat 760 (or equivalent)
If only a manual cleaning is possible, use the

following detergents:
Rivonit / RG 1083 (or equivalent)
Regular checks and cleaning of the dust

protective filter system is indispensable for
the safety in operation of the electrical
machines
AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 10

AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 11
Bunsenstraße 17
Phone: +49(0)841-792-0
Fax: +49(0)841-792-250

Dreieich branch
Benzstraße 47-49
Phone: +49(0)6103-5039-0
Fax: +49(0)6103-5039-40
AnB / e / 20-10-2003 / B Page 12
Cooler Description
USER MANUAL
KLIMA
AIR-AIR COOLER
Supplier information:
Homepage:
www.Klima.com
The Netherlands:
Klima Thermo-Tech B.V.
Rogier van de Weydenstraat 45
5642 JG Eindhoven
P.O. Box 300
5600 AH Eindhoven
Telephone: +31 (0)40-2981818
Telephone service: +31 (0)40-2981858
Fax: +31 (0)40-2981800
E-mail [email protected]
Supplier Belgium:
S.A. Klima Belgium N.V.
Leuvensesteenweg 49c
1932 Zaventem
Telephone: +32 (0)2-7206026
Fax: +32 (0)2-7203407
Supplier Belgium:
Klima warmtetechniek N.V.
Buitenheide 4
3930 Hamont-Achel
Supplier France:
Klima S.A.R.L.
Chateau Rouge - 276
Avenue de la Marne
59708
Marcq-en-Baroeul
Telephone: +33 (0)320-65-91-65
Fax: +33 (0)320-65-91-60
Publication: 03.12.2002
2
Table of Contents
1 General Information...........................................................................4
1.1 Product Information ...........................................................4
1.2 Installation Parts ................................................................5
1.3 Prohibitions on (putting into) Operation .............................6
1.4 Guarantee..........................................................................6
2 Safety ...........................................................................................7
2.1 General Safety...................................................................7
2.2 Protection: .........................................................................9
3 Transport, Storage and Installation Site. .........................................10
3.1 Instructions for Transport and Hoisting ............................10
3.2 Transport and Packaging.................................................11
3.3 Storage: ...........................................................................11
3.4 Installation Siting:.............................................................11
4 Installation .......................................................................................12
4.1 Safety Measures and Facilities on
the Heat Exchanger / Installation. ....................................12
4.1.1 Electrical Connections. ....................................................12
4.1.1.1 Connection Regulations...................................................12
4.1.2 Moving Parts....................................................................12
4.2 Preparation for Installation...............................................13
4.3 Installation .......................................................................13
5 Start-up .........................................................................................14
5.1 Inspection before putting the unit into operation ..............14
5.2 Air Inflow..........................................................................15
5.3 Inspection after Start-up: .................................................15
5.4 Shut-Down of the Installation:..........................................15
6 Maintenance and Inspection:...........................................................16
6.1 Inspection ........................................................................17
6.2 Cleaning the Heat Exchanger..........................................17
6.2.1 Disassembly of the Heat Exchanger................................17
6.2.1.1 Disassembly Centrifugal Fan...........................................18
6.2.1.2 Disassembly Axial Fan. ...................................................20
6.2.2 Cleaning the Heat Exchanger..........................................20
6.2.2.1 Air Side Cleaning .............................................................20
6.2.2.2 Cleaning the Housing. .....................................................21
6.2.3 Assembly of the Heat Exchanger.....................................21
6.2.3.1 Assembly Centrifugal Fan................................................21
6.2.3.2 Assembly Axial Fan. ........................................................21
7 Malfunctions ....................................................................................22
7.1 Identification and Correction of Malfunctions. ..................22
7.2 Safety Measures / Facilities:............................................23
8 Customer Service:...........................................................................24
8.1 Ordering Spare Parts:......................................................24
8.2 Complaints Procedure: ....................................................24
9 Technical Specifications / Documentation .......................................25
3
1 General Information
Pictograms used in this manual
Dangerous situation with possibility of personal injury as well

as damage to the equipment.
Reference to tips, comments and supplements with regard to

using the equipment.
The general standards apply to symbols that are applied to the installation by
the owner.
This manual supplies information and instructions for the correct and safe
use of the unit.
Many accidents are the result of incorrect use.
Instructions in this manual must therefore always be followed.
The safety instructions must also always be observed when work is done on
0the equipment.
The complete manual must be carefully read.
If, after reading this manual, questions still exist, you must contact the
supplier / contractor for more information.
The installation may NOT be put into operation before all
unclear issues have been resolved.
1.1 Product Information

Product : Air/Air Cooler.
Type : See Technical Specification Sheet or type plate
For exchanging heat between two airflows. The cool air flows (inner circuit)
in a cross current to the cool air (outer circuit) through a tube bundle with
one airflow flowing through the tubes and the other airflow flowing around
the tubes. The flow of air is maintained by fans.
Air/Air Coolers are used for cooling and extracting excess heat converted
from energy by electromotors, generators, and transformers, etc.
4
1.2 Installation Parts
Fig. 1 A few examples of Air/Air Coolers.
Fig 1
1. Housing
2. Centrifugal Fan
3. Axial Fan
4. Cold air in
5. Cold air out
6. Air to be cooled, in
7. Air to be cooled, out
5
1.3 Prohibitions on (putting into) Operation
It is Prohibited to operate the Unit beyond Design

Conditions
The unit is designed according to the design parameters as stated in

the enclosed technical specification sheet. If these parameters are
exceeded then it is PROHIBITED to put the installation into operation
without prior consultation with the manufacturer.
Moreover, all continued use in such a non-design situation is
considered contrary to the regulations. The manufacturer is not liable
for any material damage or personal injury that results from further
use: this risk is solely the responsibility of the owner / user.
Prior to using the unit, the user must have read and understood the
accompanying MANUFACTURERS STATEMENT (Guideline 89/392/EEC
art.4 paragraph 2 and Appendix II under B).
Klima has advised on the choice of materials, the user remains responsible
for the media used with regards to corrosion.
1.4 Guarantee
Unless covered by a separate agreement, Klima guarantees the products

supplied by the company to be sound and in good working order, according
to the technical specifications, for a period of 6 months after being put into
operation, up to a maximum of 12 months after delivery.
The General Terms of Sale and Delivery can be requested from your
supplier.
Any damage and/or decrease in capacity due to non-observance of this user
manual are not covered by the guarantee.
The guarantee expires if any adaptations or changes are made to the heat
exchanger.
The equipment must always be inspected upon delivery for damage to the
equipment during transport.
The manufacturer must immediately be notified of any damage during
transport.
6
2 Safety
2.1 General Safety

Physical injuries
Physical injuries can be caused by:
• Burning, by touching the heat exchanger, the motor or
other hot parts of the installation.
• Electrocution from contact with the electrical components
• Electrocution from touching live parts due to short
circuiting of the motor
• Maiming from contact with the rotating fan
• Sucking in or trapping of clothing
• Flying parts of the unit (breakage)
• Fire and explosion caused by the motor (ignition of the
medium).
• Bumping against pointed and/or sharp parts of the
installation
Damage to the equipment

Damage to the equipment can be caused by:
• External forces.
• Corrosion.
• Erosion.
• Fatigue.
• Pressure / temperature too high.
• Impact load.
• Transport
• Imbalance of the fan (vibrations).
• Assembly errors of the motor installation.
• Assembly errors in the fan installation.
• Overheating of the motor (from overloading)
For transport see: the Instructions for Transport and Hoisting

If handled incorrectly, danger for physical injury and/or
damage to the equipment exists
Even after switching off the installation the heat exchanger

surface can still be hot.
The unit may only be fed with the mediums stated in the
technical specification sheet.
7
No fatigue analysis has been taken into account and therefore
the unit should only be used for static load.
To avoid damage to the equipment being cooled, first turn off

the equipment being cooled and only then stop the cooler.
Sudden changes in pressure and temperature must be

avoided.
The values stated in the technical specification sheet must not

be exceeded.
This manual describes other safety instructions than those

safety instructions related to the chapter in which they occur.
The complete manual must therefore be read to be aware of
all safety provisions and measures to be taken when using
this installation.
The fan's electrical components must be earthed, except for

those components with double insulation.
The application of an operating switch in the main or driving

current, if safe maintenance of the fan cannot be guaranteed
during normal operation.
The fan is only suitable for transporting non-aggressive air

unless otherwise agreed with the customer (in writing).
Inspect the clearance of the fan before using for the first time
or after maintenance.
After switching off the fan's motor it will take a little while
before the fan stops.
The motors assembled by Klima are suited to working in

environmental temperatures between -20°C en +55°C. For
lower temperatures, if stated on the order, the motor can be
greased with special grease for operating temperatures down
to -40°C. For higher environmental conditions than +55°C it is
necessary to place the motor outside the airflow. A special
motor (suitable for higher temperatures) is also available.
8
2.2 Protection:
For the protection of others, place the heat exchanger out of reach, in a
closed space, e.g. a boiler house, only accessible to authorized staff
acquainted with the safety requirements applying to the equipment stored
there.
If the heat exchanger is set up close to people, presenting a risk of burns,
insulation of the heat exchanger is mandatory.
The user must take care to provide adequate danger signs on exposed un-
insulated parts of the installation, which present risk of burns or other injury
and/or damage.
The fan's drive is protected.
If the cooler is set up close to people, presenting a risk of contact, the fan
must be shielded in accordance with Euro Norm EN 294. These protective
materials can be delivered by the manufacturer if requested.
9
3 Transport, Storage and Installation Site.
3.1 Instructions for Transport and Hoisting

Use the hoisting facilities/crane hooks on the unit.
These hoisting facilities are only intended for hoisting the air-water cooler
prior to it being assembled to other equipment. The hoisting facilities may no
longer be used to lift and/or move the assembly once the cooler is
assembled with other equipment.
For global hoisting instructions, see Fig. 2.
Fig 2
10
3.2 Transport and Packaging
For transport see: the Instructions for Transport and Hoisting
Always use the appropriate hoisting facilities and equipment.
Respect the prescribed safety norms and regulations.
If handled incorrectly, danger for physical injury and/or

damage to the equipment exists
Any packaging must be removed carefully and disposed of in

an environmentally friendly way.
3.3 Storage:
The unit must always be stored covered and dry.
Long-term storage from 2 to 24 months requires airtight packaging of the unit
adding a moisture absorbent material e.g. silica-gel.
3.4 Installation Siting:
General conditions on installation siting / location should satisfy:

• Sufficiently firm and level ground or construction, adapted to the load
that is expected.
• Sound construction and vibration-free installation of the unit.
• Protect if necessary against possible damage by e.g. internal transport.
• See the technical specification sheet for product-related information.
• Protection. For safety, see Chapter 2.2 under “Safety”.
• The location where the equipment is placed must have enough space
for installation, maintenance and cleaning. See the relevant chapters.
• Sufficient light and space for inspection and maintenance.
• The unit is anti seismic to maximum earthquake intensity in accordance
with Eurocode 8.
11
4 Installation
The assembly and start-up must be carried out by a suitably
qualified person appointed by the buyer or by a qualified
contractor.
The installation may only be operated, maintained and
repaired by authorised, trained and instructed personnel.
4.1 Safety Measures and Facilities on the Heat Exchanger /

Installation.
Installation must be carried out in such a manner that all likely risks are
excluded.
To achieve this, the following points must at least be observed:
• A temperature-limiting device must be placed in the circuit to protect

against excessive temperatures.
• The fitting of inspection facilities such as temperature gauges.
4.1.1 Electrical Connections.

Prior to connecting the fan motor one must consult the wiring diagram in the
connector box. One must be very careful specially when connecting
pole reversible motors. Experience shows that many mistakes are
made when installing these motors.
The connection must be in accordance with local regulations. A thermal
safety switch for the motor is built into the electrical circuit of 3 phase motors
for which the setting corresponds to the maximum allowable current as
stated on the motor type plate. If the relay is incorrectly set then any damage
to the motor will not be compensated either by the manufacturer of the
electromotor or by Klima Thermo-Tech B.V. How the unit is switched on, the
thickness of the wiring, type and settings of the safety measures, must be
chosen in consultation with your contractor or power supplier. All electrical
components must be earthed, except for those components with double
insulation.
4.1.1.1 Connection Regulations.

• The electrical equipment must be connected in compliance with Euro
Norm EN 60204-1.
• Local connection regulations (e.g. NEN 1010) must be complied with.
4.1.2 Moving Parts

The installation is equipped with moving parts like an electromotor that
drives a fan.
These moving parts must be shielded. See the Chapter "Protection".
12
4.2 Preparation for Installation
General:
• Sufficient space for carrying out assembly, disassembly , maintenance,
cleaning, and other activities on the heat exchanger.
• Before the heat exchanger can be connected, all tubes must be clean
so that no pollutants can enter the unit.
• The gaskets used must be suitable for the medium, temperature and
pressure to be applied.
• The bedplate, construction and mounting must be of sufficient strength
and designed to deal with expansion caused by temperature changes.
• Mechanical vibrations in the heat exchanger must be prevented.
The design specifications stated in the technical specification

sheet must always be adhered to. If the user deviates from
these values, the responsibility rests with him.
4.3 Installation
• The instructions for transport and hoisting must be observed when
placing or moving the equipment.
• The cooler must be mounted, stress and vibration free, to the equipment
to be cooled.
• Any ducts must be mounted stress free to the cooler.
• Bolt-nut connections must be clean and lightly oiled.
13
5 Start-up
contractor.
5.1 Inspection before putting the unit into operation

Refer to the accompanying documentation if inspection, control and/or safety
devices are built in.
As a rule, the safety devices in the system to guard against excesses in
temperature must be properly adjusted and tested before start-up. The entire
circuit must also be inspected to check whether all connections have been
properly made.
All relevant safety regulations must be observed both before and during
start-up.
The following instructions also apply when starting the fan:

• The suction and exhaust openings must be connected to a duct system.
• The suction and/or exhaust openings must be fitted with a protective
grid in the case of free suction or exhaust.
• There must be no foreign objects in the fan.
• Check if all bolts are properly tightened.
• Check that the fan is running freely (manually).
Utmost caution must be taken when inspecting that the fan is

running freely due to the extreme risk for physical injury if the
fan were to unexpectedly go live during inspection.
• Inspect -if applicable- the setting of grids, valves, appendages and

suchlike.
• Check the direction of the fan by applying current briefly.
Danger of maiming from contact with the rotating fan.
• The direction of the fan must be checked based on the directional arrow
on the housing or the motor.
N.B. Never turn on again immediately; always wait until the

fan and/or motor has completely stopped and never stop the
fan by hand.
14
5.2 Air Inflow
Once all inspections have been carried out, the fan(s) may be started and
the rest of the installation may be put into operation.
5.3 Inspection after Start-up:

After heating the heat exchanger for a certain period of time, all connections
must be inspected for leakage. In case of leakage they must be repaired.
See Chapter 7.
Check whether the settings of the measuring and control devices reflect the
expected values.
Check after starting the fan for:

• Vibrations.
• Unusual sounds.
• Current consumption in relation to the motor's maximum allowable
amperage.
If any deviation is observed, the fan must immediately be

stopped and the deviation must be corrected.
5.4 Shut-Down of the Installation:

To shut down the heat exchanger the supply and return flows of the circuit
must be closed.
Normal operation is done with the on/off switch that is installed in the
installation with an "on" and "off" indication. For remote control the switch
must be marked with a functional description.
The supplier of a third party must install a work switch enabling the main or
drive current to be switched off.

15
6 Maintenance and Inspection:
contractor.
The owner must post warnings against environmental factors

that can pose a threat. Preferably using pictograms and/or
text.
The owner must enforce the wearing of protective clothing

and gloves by the personnel wherever necessary.
Maintenance, cleaning etc. must only take place on a

shutdown unit.
Special measures apply to a shutdown unit. See Chapter 5.5.
Depending upon operating conditions, maintenance should be carried out

every 1000 hours of operation or minimally 1x per year.
16
6.1 Inspection
To guarantee a high degree of operational reliability regular inspection of the
equipment by the maintenance and operating personnel is necessary for the
following:
• Leakage.
• Temperature within the permissible limits.
• Fouling of the fan, motor and possibly the heat exchanger (drop in
capacity).
• Vibrations / strange noises.
• General condition of the installation.
• Corrosion.
• Functioning of the safety devices.
• Torque of the bolts.
• Temperature of the bearings max. 95°C (ambient temperature + 40°C).
• Temperature of the motor max. 135°C (ambient temperature +80°C).
6.2 Cleaning the Heat Exchanger.
Maintenance, cleaning etc. must only take place on a

shutdown device. If this is not possible then these activities
must be able to be carried out without danger.
6.2.1 Disassembly of the Heat Exchanger.
Proceed as follows:

Wait until the heat exchanger has cooled down!
17
6.2.1.1 Disassembly Centrifugal Fan.
The electromotor is mounted on a mounting plate and then the fan is

mounted on the motors' shaft. Motor, fan and mounting plate are attached
to/on the housing as one unit. Disassembly of the fan or motor is therefore
done in reverse order. Use of a tackle here is advised (See Fig. 3).
Fig 3
1. Housing
2. Electromotor.
3. Shaft
4. Mounting Plate
5. Fan
6. Bolt
7. Nut
18
Fan, fitted with a clamping bush.
Loosen all Allen screws. Place one or two screws in the disassembly hole(s).
Tighten the Allen screw(s) and fan and bush will come loose (See Fig. 4. A
clamping bush with 2 disassembly holes is shown here as an example).
Fig 4
1. Electromotor.
2. Fan
3. Clamping bush
4. Allen screw
5. Disassembly hole
6. Assembly hole
19
Fan, fitted with drawing plate.
Disassemble the locking plate. Then assemble a drawing plate to the boss
and pull the fan off the shaft by turning the central bolt (See Fig. 5).
Fig 5
1. Locking plate
2. Drawing plate
3. Boss part
4. Fan
5. Shaft
6. Central bolt
7. Locking nut
6.2.1.2 Disassembly Axial Fan.

For more information on the axial fan, refer to the manual „KLIMA AXIAL
FAN“.
6.2.2 Cleaning the Heat Exchanger

Cleaning the Filters.
If any filters are built in these must be replaced or cleaned when they reach
their replacement date.
6.2.2.1 Air Side Cleaning

• Using a vacuum cleaner.
• Using compressed air blow through (in the opposite direction to the
normal airflow).
20
6.2.2.2 Cleaning the Housing.
If the housing needs to be cleaned care must be taken to avoid dirt falling on
or into the equipment being cooled.
To do so the housing is disassembled prior to cleaning.
6.2.3 Assembly of the Heat Exchanger.
6.2.3.1 Assembly Centrifugal Fan.

Fan, fitted with a clamping bush.
Clean and degrease all bare surfaces. Position the bush in the correct
position in the shaft and hand tighten the Allen screws in the assembly
holes.
Slide the boss with the bush on the shaft. Line them up.
Tighten the Allen screw completely.
Firmly tighten the Allen screws one by one.
Fill all holes with grease.
(See Fig. 4).
Fan, fitted with drawing plate.

Slide the fan onto the shaft (note the pin) and attach the fan using the
locking plate and nut and lock the nut.
Assembly of the fan/motor with mounting plate to the housing must be done
carefully to avoid damage to the fan. Mind the position of the junction box
during assembly and check that the fan is running freely before tightening
the bolts.
(See Fig. 5).
6.2.3.2 Assembly Axial Fan.

For more information on the axial fan refer to the manual „KLIMA AXIAL
FAN“.
21
7 Malfunctions
7.1 Identification and Correction of Malfunctions.
Malfunction Possible cause Correction of the malfunction
Heat Imbalance of the fan Resolve the imbalance

exchanger Fan malfunctioning / Replace fan
has damaged
insufficient The operating conditions Adjust the operating conditions.
capacity. deviate from those stated in
the technical specification
sheet.
The heat exchanger is Clean the heat exchanger (see
fouled. Chapter: Cleaning the Heat
Exchanger).
Assembly error(s) in the Correct assembly error(s) in the
motor installation. motor installation.
Assembly error(s) in the Correct assembly error(s) in the
ventilator installation. ventilator installation.
Overheating of the motor Resolve the overload
(from overloading)
Insufficient stability Optimise stability
The connections have been Correct the connections.
interchanged.
Fan running in reverse Change motor connection
direction. according to description in
terminal box.
Malfunction Possible cause Correction of the malfunction

Heat Gasket faces dirtied or Clean gasket faces. In case of
exchanger is damaged. damaged gasket faces, contact
leaking your supplier.
Defective gasket. Replace gasket.
Bolt tightened insufficiently. Check joints and re-tighten
carefully.
Defective tube. Contact your supplier.
The operating conditions Adjust the operating conditions.
deviate from those stated in
the technical specification
sheet.
External forces. Assemble the installation so that it
is stress-free.
22
7.2 Safety Measures / Facilities:
Facilities must be provided (ladders, steps, cat ways etc.) to be able to safely
reach all places to make adjustments and to perform maintenance and
repairs.
23
8 Customer Service:
8.1 Ordering Spare Parts:

When ordering spare parts it is important to provide the correct data.
One should at least state:
• Project and order number.
• Complete description of product / type (See Technical Specification /
type plate).
• Required part (for name see documentation).
8.2 Complaints Procedure:

For complaints, requirements, or imperfections of the unit, please contact
Klima, or your supplier’s, service department.
24
9 Technical Specifications / Documentation
Technical specification sheet must be added here.
25
26
27
28
Regulator Descriptions
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR
DIGITAL EXCITATION CONTROL SYSTEM
DECS-200
Digital
Excitation
Control
System DECS-200
Null Internal Pre- Limits

Balance Tracking Position Lower Upper
Edit Reset
RS-232
COM 0
P0003-26
06/04/01
Publication: 9360100990
Revision: E 12/05
INTRODUCTION
This instruction manual provides information about the operation and installation of the DECS-200 Digital
Excitation Control System. To accomplish this, the following information is provided:
• General Information and Specifications

• Controls and Indicators
• Functional Description
• Installation
• Maintenance
WARNING!
To avoid personal injury or equipment damage, only qualified personnel should
perform the procedures in this manual.
NOTE
Be sure that the device is hard-wired to earth ground with no smaller than 12
AWG copper wire attached to the ground terminal on the rear of the unit case.
When the DECS-200 is configured in a system with other devices, it is
recommended to use a separate lead to the ground bus from each unit.
DECS-200 Introduction i
First Printing: January 2002
Printed in USA
© 2002, 2004, 2005 Basler Electric, Highland Illinois 62249 USA
All Rights Reserved
December 2005
CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION
of Basler Electric, Highland Illinois, USA. It is loaned for confidential use, subject
to return on request, and with the mutual understanding that it will not be used in
any manner detrimental to the interest of Basler Electric.
It is not the intention of this manual to cover all details and variations in equipment, nor does this manual
provide data for every possible contingency regarding installation or operation. The availability and design
of all features and options are subject to modification without notice. Should further information be
required, contact Basler Electric.
BASLER ELECTRIC
ROUTE 143, BOX 269
HIGHLAND IL 62249 USA
http://www.basler.com, [email protected]
PHONE +1 618.654.2341 FAX +1 618.654.2351
ii Introduction DECS-200
REVISION HISTORY
The following information provides a historical summary of the changes made to the DECS-200 hardware,
firmware, and software. The corresponding revisions made to this instruction manual (9360100990) are
also summarized. Revisions are listed in chronological order.
Hardware
Version and Date Change
A, B, 11/01 • Pre-production manufacturing improvements and releases
C, 01/02 • Released hardware to production
• Added CSA, UL, and CE logos to the part number labels
D, 03/02 • Revised engineering documents
E, 05/02 • Revised packing material
F, 05.02 • Implemented firmware version 1.01.02
G, 06/02 • Implemented BESTCOMS version 1.03.04 and updated production test
H, 08/02 • Improved circuit board component labeling
I • Revision level not used
J, 10/02 • Revised terminal numbering overlays
K, 01/03 • Began using new front panel LCD (display)
L, 05/04 • Improved dielectric strength of “C” power supply (P/N 9360100100, 102 only)
L, M, 06/04 • Released firmware version 1.02.00. (9360100100, 102 advanced to revision M,
9360100101, 103 advanced to revision L.)
M, N, 07/04 • Updated power supply circuit boards. (9360100100, 102 advanced to revision N,
9360100101, 103 advanced to revision M.)
N, P, 07/04 • Released firmware version 1.02.01 and BESTCOMS version 1.04.01.
(9360100100, 102 advanced to revision P, 9360100101, 103 advanced to revision
N. Revision level O not used.)
P, Q, 03/05 • Improved mounting of front panel communication connector. (9360100100, 102
advanced to revision Q, 9360100101, 103 advanced to revision P.)
Q, R, 06/05 • Released firmware version 1.02.03 (9360100100, 102 advanced to revision R,
9360100101, 103 advanced to revision Q.)
R, S, 07/05 • Updated packing material. (9360100100, 102 advanced to revision S, 9360100101,
103 advanced to revision R.)
Firmware
1.01.01, 09/01 • Initial release
1.01.02, 05/02 • Resolved field overcurrent indication problem when field overvoltage alarm was
triggered
• Improved var to AVR mode (online) tracking
• Resolved nuisance EDM indication on secondary DECS in dual DECS applications
• Resolved field overvoltage and field overcurrent alarm indication of secondary
DECS during startup in dual DECS applications
1.01.03, 11/02 • Added the EDM pole ratio calculator. Removed the Number of Poles parameter
1.02.00, 06/04 • Added takeover-style OEL
• Added option of specifying on-line/off-line OEL activation via the 52J/K and 52L/M
contact inputs
• Added stator current limiting and loss of field protection
• Added automatic alarm reset when generator frequency decreases below 10 Hz
• Improved crosscurrent compensation
1.02.02, 04/05 • Improved Auxiliary input measurement accuracy
1.02.03, 06/05 • Modified firmware for compatibility with new LCD
DECS-200 Introduction iii

Software
1.03.00, 09/01 • Initial Release
1.03.03, 05/02 • Updated BESTCOMS to add oscillography trigger to step response
1.03.04, 06/02 • Improved overall functionality. Allowed V/Hz Slope Setting adjustments to be made
in increments of 0.01 instead of 0.1. The default value of the Analysis screen was
changed from 10% steps to 2% steps.
1.03.05, 11/02 • Added the EDM pole ratio calculator. Removed the Number of Poles parameter.
1.04.00, 06/04 • Added takeover-style OEL, SCL, and loss of field settings to interface.
Manual
Revision and Date Change
—, 01/02 • Initial release
A, 01/02 • Changed introduction section to reflect the January first printing date. Repaginated
the introduction so that the table of contents begins on an odd page. Edited the
table of contents entries for sections five and seven to reflect the appropriate
names.
B, 10/02 • Updated Figure 4-3 to correct error in terminal numbers. Updated terminal
assignments in Section 1 to correct the error reflected from old Figure 4-3. Added
Section 8, Troubleshooting. Corrected various minor errors.
C, 11/02 • Changed Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM) Protection in Section 1 to reflect the pole
ratio and increment. Removed Gen Poles and added Pole Ratio to Figure 2-2.
Made changes to Figures 2-6 and 2-8. Deleted reference to Generator Poles and
Exciter Poles in Sec. 3, Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM) Function but added Pole
Ratio. Updated the list of internal variable on page 3-14.Revised the Installation
portion in Sec. 5 for using a CD-ROM disc. Added the Pole Ratio Calculator in Sec
5 as well as updated the screen shots. Updated screen shots in Figures 6-1, 6-3, 6-
7 and 6-14. Changed increment levels of register 47747-48, Table 7-17. Updated
Table 7-25.
D, 06/04 • Section 1: Updated output contact ratings.
• Section 2: Modified tables and menu branch drawings to show added settings.
• Section 3: Added functional description of takeover OEL and SCL. Removed
reference to A-phase and C-phase as acceptable sensing current source for
crosscurrent compensation applications.
• Section 4: Added Crosscurrent Sensing sub-section with table listing crosscurrent
sensing terminals.
• Section 5: Revised or added all applicable BESTCOMS screens and setting
descriptions to accommodate new settings/features.
• Section 6: Added/changed BESTCOMS screens and DECS-200 settings to
accommodate changed BESTCOMS screens and new DECS-200 settings.
• Section 7: Added/revised Modbus register tables to accommodate new DECS-200
settings.
E, 12/05 • Removed expired patent information from Section 1.
• Added missing setting descriptions to Section 5
• In Section 4, added caution box regarding the length of screws used to attach
escutcheon plate to DECS-200
• Made various minor corrections/changes throughout manual
iv Introduction DECS-200
CONTENTS
Section 1 • General Information ................................................................................................................ 1-1
Section 2 • Human-Machine Interface....................................................................................................... 2-1
Section 3 • Functional Description............................................................................................................. 3-1
Section 4 • Installation ............................................................................................................................... 4-1
Section 5 • BESTCOMS Software............................................................................................................. 5-1
Section 6 • Setup ....................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Section 7 • Modbus™ Software................................................................................................................. 7-1
Section 8 • Maintenance............................................................................................................................ 8-1
DECS-200 Introduction v
This page intentionally left blank.
vi Introduction DECS-200
SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION ............................................................................................. 1-1
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................... 1-1
FEATURES ............................................................................................................................................ 1-1
Functions ............................................................................................................................................ 1-1
Inputs and Outputs ............................................................................................................................. 1-1
HMI Interface ...................................................................................................................................... 1-1
APPLICATION........................................................................................................................................ 1-2
Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Operating Power................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Control Power ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Sensing ............................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Excitation Limiters............................................................................................................................... 1-3
External Tracking and Transfer Between DECS-200 Units (Optional)............................................... 1-3
Internal Tracking Between DECS-200 Operating Modes................................................................... 1-3
Communication With a PC.................................................................................................................. 1-3
MODEL AND STYLE NUMBER DESCRIPTION ................................................................................... 1-3
Sample Style Number......................................................................................................................... 1-4
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................................................. 1-4
Control Power ..................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Operating Power................................................................................................................................. 1-4
Generator Voltage Sensing ................................................................................................................ 1-5
Generator Current Sensing................................................................................................................. 1-5
Bus Voltage Sensing .......................................................................................................................... 1-5
Accessory Inputs ................................................................................................................................ 1-5
Communication Ports ......................................................................................................................... 1-5
Contact Inputs..................................................................................................................................... 1-6
Contact Outputs.................................................................................................................................. 1-6
Field Output ........................................................................................................................................ 1-6
Regulation........................................................................................................................................... 1-6
Parallel Compensation........................................................................................................................ 1-7
Field Overvoltage Protection .............................................................................................................. 1-7
Field Overcurrent Protection............................................................................................................... 1-7
Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM) Protection............................................................................................. 1-7
Generator Undervoltage Protection.................................................................................................... 1-7
Generator Overvoltage Protection...................................................................................................... 1-8
Loss of Sensing Protection ................................................................................................................. 1-8
Loss of Field Protection ...................................................................................................................... 1-8
Soft Start Function .............................................................................................................................. 1-8
Voltage Matching ................................................................................................................................ 1-8
On-Line Overexcitation Limiting ......................................................................................................... 1-8
Off-Line Overexcitation Limiting ......................................................................................................... 1-9
Underexcitation Limiting ..................................................................................................................... 1-9
Manual Excitation Control................................................................................................................... 1-9
Metering .............................................................................................................................................. 1-9
Sequence of Event Recording (SER) ............................................................................................... 1-10
Data Logging (Oscillograpy) ............................................................................................................. 1-10
Temperature Range.......................................................................................................................... 1-10
Type Tests ........................................................................................................................................ 1-10
Physical............................................................................................................................................. 1-10
UL Recognition ................................................................................................................................. 1-10
CSA Certification .............................................................................................................................. 1-10
CE Compliance................................................................................................................................. 1-10
Figures
Figure 1-1. Block Diagram of Typical DECS-200 Application.................................................................... 1-2
Figure 1-2. Style Number Identification Chart............................................................................................ 1-3
DECS-200 General Information i
ii General Information DECS-200

SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
The Basler Digital Excitation Control System (DECS-200) is a microprocessor-based control device
intended for generator power management. Programmability of system parameters and regulation
settings enables the DECS-200 to be used in a wide range of applications and provides greater flexibility
in excitation system optimization. The DECS-200 can accommodate generator exciter field requirements
up to 15 Adc continuously in 32, 63 or 125 Vdc applications with one model.
FEATURES
DECS-200 units have the following features and capabilities.
Functions
• Four control modes
o Automatic voltage regulation (AVR)
o Manual or field current regulation (FCR)
o Power factor (PF)
o Reactive power (var)
• Soft start buildup with an adjustable ramp in AVR and FCR control modes
• One adjustment range or pre-position setpoint for each control mode
• Overexcitation limiting (OEL) and underexcitation limiting (UEL) in AVR, var and PF control modes
• Twenty stability selections
• Underfrequency compensation or volts per hertz ratio limiter
• Autotracking between operating modes and between DECS-200 units (optional)
• Automatic transfer to a backup DECS-200 unit (optional)
• Eight generator protection features
o Field overvoltage
o Field overcurrent
o Generator overvoltage
o Generator undervoltage
o Watchdog timer
o Loss of sensing
o Exciter diode monitor (EDM)
o Loss of field
• Generator paralleling with reactive droop compensation and reactive differential compensation
• Data logging and event recording
Inputs and Outputs

• Single-phase rms bus voltage sensing
• Single-phase or three-phase rms generator voltage sensing
• Single-phase generator current sensing (1 or 5 amperes, nominal)
• Analog inputs (±10 Vdc and 4 to 20 mAdc) provide proportional, remote control of the setpoint
• Eleven PLC-compatible contact sensing inputs for system interface
• Separate ac and dc power inputs accommodate redundant operating power sources
• Pulse-width modulated output power stage rated at a maximum of 15 amperes, continuous
• Five output relays for system control or annunciation
o Three programmable output relays
o Two fixed-function output relays
HMI Interface
• Front panel HMI includes pushbutton controls, LED indicators and a backlit, liquid crystal display
(LCD)
• BESTCOMS Windows® based software provides easy, fast and accurate setup and control
DECS-200 General Information 1-1

• Three communication ports
o Front RS-232 port for communication with a PC using BESTCOMS software
o Right-side panel RS-232 port for dedicated communication with a redundant DECS-200
o RS-485 communication port for communication with a remote terminal
• Modbus protocol for the RS-485 port allows communication at distances of up to 1,200 meters
(3,937 feet)
APPLICATION
Introduction
In the typical application shown in Figure 1-1, the DECS-200 controls the exciter field of a synchronous
generator. Front panel controls, indicators and serial communication ports using PC software make the
system easy to operate locally or from remote locations. DECS-200 operation, settings and safety setup
procedures in this manual should be studied before implementing your application. For detailed
application assistance, contact Basler Electric or your local sales representative.
Figure 1-1. Block Diagram of Typical DECS-200 Application
Operating Power
Operating power for the pulse-width modulated (PWM) excitation output is typically obtained from the
generator output through a power transformer. Alternately, operating power can be supplied from a
permanent magnet generator (PMG).
Control Power
If power supply option C (120/125 Vac/Vdc) is selected, a redundant power source can be used with the
DECS-200. (See Figure 1-1.) In this configuration, if one of the two sources fails, the other source will
continue to supply DECS-200 operating power. If power supply option L (24/48 Vdc) is selected, no
redundant power source is available.
1-2 General Information DECS-200

Sensing
The DECS-200 senses generator voltage and current through voltage and current transformers. Field
voltage and field current values are sensed internally.
Excitation Limiters
Integrated overexcitation and underexcitation limiters (OEL and UEL) are available for both on-line and
off-line protection.
External Tracking and Transfer Between DECS-200 Units (Optional)

For critical applications, a second DECS-200 can provide backup excitation control. The DECS-200
allows for excitation system redundancy by providing external tracking and transfer provisions between
DECS-200 units. The secondary DECS-200 operating modes can be programmed to track the primary
DECS-200 operating mode. Proper, redundant excitation system design allows for removal of the failed
system. Periodic testing of the backup system must be performed to ensure that it is operational and can
be put into service without warning.
Internal Tracking Between DECS-200 Operating Modes

In applications using a single DECS-200, the DECS-200 can be programmed so that the inactive
operating modes track the active operating mode. Operating modes include AVR, FCR, PF and var. If the
excitation system is normally operating on-line in Internal mode and a loss of sensing occurs, the DECS-
200 could be transferred to manual (FCR) mode where the loss of sensing has no impact on the exciter's
ability to maintain proper excitation levels. While performing routine testing of the DECS-200 in backup
mode, the internal tracking feature allows a transfer to an inactive mode that will result in no disturbance
to the system.
Communication With a PC
Communication between the DECS-200 (front panel RS-232 port) and a PC is possible through
BESTCOMS software. BESTCOMS enables fast and easy programming of setpoints and ranges and
allows for step changes to facilitate proper stability settings. BESTCOMS also provides easy start and
stop control and operator adjustment of the excitation system with real-time metering. The software
catalog number is BESTCOMS-DECS200. BESTCOMS is provided with the DECS-200 as part of the
software/manual package.
MODEL AND STYLE NUMBER DESCRIPTION

DECS-200 operating characteristics are defined by letters and numbers that make up the style number.
The model number and style number describe the options included in the DECS-200 and appear on a
label attached to the side of the case. Upon receipt of a DECS-200 unit, be sure to check the style
number against the requisition and packing list to ensure that they agree.
Figure 1-2. Style Number Identification Chart

Sample Style Number
The style number identification chart (Figure 1-2) defines the electrical characteristics and operational
features included in the DECS-200. For example, if the style number were DECS-200-1L, the device
would have the following characteristics and features.
DECS-200 -- Digital Excitation Control System
1 --- Internal autotracking/transfer
L --- 24/48 Vdc control power supply
SPECIFICATIONS
DECS-200 electrical and physical characteristics are listed in the following paragraphs.
Control Power
Input Voltage
DC Input: 16 to 60 Vdc (style XL) or 90 to 150 Vdc (style XC)
AC Input: 85 to 132 Vac, 50/60 Hz (style XC only)
Note: Isolation transformer for ac input is required when dual control
power sources are used.
Burden
DC Input: 30 W
AC Input: 50 VA
Terminals
DC Input: B7 (+), B8 (–)
AC Input: B9 (L), B10 (N) (style XC only)
Operating Power
To achieve the proper DECS-200 output voltage, the appropriate operating power input voltage must be
provided.
32 Vdc PWM Output
Nominal: 60 Vac
Operating Range: 56 to 70 Vac, ±10%
Frequency Range: 50 to 500 Hz
Configuration: 1-phase or 3-phase
Burden: 780 VA
63 Vdc PWM Output
Nominal: 120 Vac
Burden: 1,570 VA
125 Vdc PWM Output
Nominal: 240 Vac
Burden: 3,070 VA
Voltage Buildup
From a minimum of 3 Vac
Terminals
C2 (A-phase), C3 (B-phase), C4 (C-phase)

Generator Voltage Sensing
Type: 1-phase/3-phase, 4 ranges
Burden: <1 VA per phase
Terminals: A1, A2, A3
50 Hertz Sensing
Range 1: 100 Vac (85 to 127 Vac)
Range 2: 200 Vac (170 to 254 Vac)
Range 3: 400 Vac (340 to 508 Vac)
Range 4: 500 Vac (425 to 625 Vac)
60 Hertz Sensing
Range 1: 120 Vac (94 to 153 Vac)
Range 2: 240 Vac (187 to 305 Vac)
Range 3: 400 Vac (374 to 600 Vac)
Range 4: 600 Vac (510 to 660 Vac)
Generator Current Sensing

Type: Two ranges, two channels
Frequency: 50/60 Hz
Ranges: 1 A or 5 A nominal, continuous
Burden: <1 VA per phase
Terminals
1 A Sensing: B1, B3 (phase B, metering, var/PF, UEL)
B4, B6 (phase B, crosscurrent compensation)
5 A Sensing: B2, B3 (phase B, metering, var/PF, UEL)
B5, B6 (phase B, crosscurrent compensation)
Bus Voltage Sensing

Type: 1-phase, 4 ranges,
Burden: <1 VA
Sensing Ranges: Identical to generator voltage sensing
Terminals: A4, A5
Accessory Inputs
Current Input
Range: 4 to 20 mAdc
Terminals: A6 (+), A7 (–)
Voltage Input
Range: –10 to +10 Vdc
Terminals: A9 (+), A10 (–)
Communication Ports
Interface
RS-232: Full duplex
RS-485: Half duplex
Connections
Com 0: Front panel DB-9 connector
Com 1: Right-side panel DB-9 connector
Com 2: Left-side panel screw terminals (A40, A41, A42)
Parameters
Baud: 1200 to 19200
Data Bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop Bits: 1 (Com 0, Com 1) or 2 (Com 2)

Contact Inputs
Type: Dry contact, accept PLC open-collector outputs
Interrogation Voltage: 12 Vdc
Terminal Assignments
Start: A21, A22
Stop: A23, A24
Auto (AVR): A25, A26
Manual (FCR): A27, A28
Raise: A29, A30
Lower: A31, A32
Pre-Position: A33, A34
Unit/Parallel (52L/M): A35, A36
Var/PF (52J/K): A37, A38
Secondary Enable: A39, A40
Alarm Reset: A41, A42
Contact Outputs
Make and Break Ratings
24 Vdc: 8.0 A
48 Vdc: 0.7 A
125 Vdc: 0.2 A
120/240 Vac: 10.0 A
Carry Ratings
24/48/125 Vdc: 8.0 A
120/240 Vac: 10.0 A
Terminal Assignments
Start/Stop (ON, OF): A11, A12
Watchdog (WTCHD): A13, A14
Relay 1 (RLY1): A15, A16
Field Output
Continuous Output Rating
60 Vac Input: 32 Vdc, 15 Adc
10 Second Forcing Output Rating
Minimum Field Resistance
32 Vdc Application: 2.13 Ω
Regulation
AVR Operating Mode
Accuracy: ±0.25% over load range at rated PF and constant generator frequency
Steady State Stability: ±0.1% at constant load and generator frequency
Temperature Drift: ±0.5% for a 0 to 50°C change
V/Hz Characteristic: Slope from 0 to 3 PU is adjust-able in 0.1 PU increments. Voltage
regulation error is within ±2.0% of the nominal voltage.
Response Time: <1 cycle
Accuracy
FCR Mode: ±1.0% of the nominal value for 10% of the bridge input voltage change or
20% of the field resistance change. Otherwise, ±5.0%.
Var Mode: ±2.0% of the nominal VA rating at the rated frequency
Power Factor Mode: ±0.02 PF of the PF setpoint for the real power between 10 and 100% at
the rated frequency.
Internal Tracking: 0.5%
Parallel Compensation
Modes: Reactive Droop and Reactive Differential (cross-current) ∗
Burden: ∗ Can exceed 1 VA if external resistors are added to the CT circuit for
crosscurrent compensation.
Adjustment Range
Reactive Droop: 0 to 30%
Reactive Differential: –30 to 0%
Field Overvoltage Protection

Pickup
Range: 1.0 to 325 Vdc
Increment: 1.0 Vdc
Time Delay
Range: 0.2 to 30 s
Increment: 0.1 s
Field Overcurrent Protection

Pickup
Range: 0 to 16 Adc
Increment: 0.1 Adc
Time Delay
Characteristic: Inverse per ANSI C50.13
Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM) Protection

Pole Ratio
Range: 1 to 10 (0 if unknown)
Increment: 0.01
Ripple Threshold
Open and Shorted Diode: 0 to 100%
Time Delay
Open Diode Protection: 10 to 60 s
Shorted Diode Protection: 5 to 30 s
Open and Shorted Diode Inhibit Levels
Range: 0 to 100% or <1 Adc field current
<45 Hz and >70 Hz generator frequency
Generator Undervoltage Protection

Pickup
Range: 0 to 30 kVac
Increment: 1.0 Vac
Time Delay
Range: 0.5 to 60 s
Increment: 0.1 s
Generator Overvoltage Protection
Pickup
Range: 0 to 30 kVac
Increment: 1.0 Vac
Time Delay
Range: 0.1 to 60 s
Increment: 0.1 s
Loss of Sensing Protection

Unbalance Generator Volts: 0 to 100%
Balanced Generator Volts: 0 to 100%
Time Delay
Range: 0 to 30 s
Increment: 0.1 s
Loss of Field Protection

Pickup
Range: 0 to 3,000,000 kvar
Increment: 1 kvar
Time Delay
Range: 0.0 to 9.9 s
Increment: 0.1 s
Soft Start Function

Setting Range
Soft Start Bias Level: 0 to 90% in 1% increments
Soft Start Bias Time Delay: 1 to 7,200 seconds in 1 second increments
Voltage Matching
Accuracy: Generator rms voltage is matched with the bus rms voltage to within
±0.5% of the generator voltage
On-Line Overexcitation Limiting

Response time: <3 cycles
High Current Level
Pickup Range: 0 to 30.0 Adc
Pickup Increment: 0.1 Adc
Time Range: 0 to 10 s
Time Increment: 1s
Medium Current Level
Time Increment: 1s
Low Current Level
Pickup Range: 0 to 15 Adc
Time Range: continuous

Off-Line Overexcitation Limiting
High Current Level
Time Increment: 1s
Low Current Level
Time Increment: 1s
Underexcitation Limiting
Adjustment Range: 0 to 100% of the generator rated apparent power (kvar) at 0 kW real
power. Or customizable to generator curve capability.
Manual Excitation Control

Range: 0 to 15.0 Adc
Increment: 0.1 Adc
Metering
Generator Voltage
Range: 0 to 160% of nominal
Accuracy: <1% (50/60 Hz)
Generator Current
Generator Frequency
Range: 10 to 90 Hz
Accuracy: ±0.1 Hz
Bus Voltage
Bus Frequency
Range: 10 to 90 Hz
Accuracy: ±0.1 Hz
Phase Angle
Range: –90 to +90
Accuracy: ±1.0
Field Voltage
Range: 0 to 375 Vdc
Accuracy: ±1.25 V or ±1.0% (whichever is greater)
Field Current
Range: 0 to 31 Adc
Accuracy: ±0.15 A or ±1.0% (whichever is greater)
Power Factor
Range: –0.5 to +0.5 PF
Accuracy: <0.02 PF
Real Power and Reactive Power
Accuracy: <1.0% of nominal
Sequence of Event Recording (SER)
127 event report, stored in volatile memory (retrievable via BESTCOMS) SER triggered by: Input/Output
status changes, system operating status changes or alarm annunciations
Data Logging (Oscillograpy)

Stores 8 records in volatile memory. Up to 6 variables can be logged in a record. Sampling rate is 600
data points per log, up to 599 pre-trigger, 4 ms to 10 second intervals, (2.4 sec to 6,000 sec. total log
duration).
Temperature Range
Operating: –40 to +60°C (–40 to +140°F)
Storage: –40 to +85°C (–40 to +185°F)
CD-ROM: 0 to +50°C (32 to +122°F)
Type Tests
Shock
15 G in 3 perpendicular planes
Vibration
5 to 26 Hz: 1.2 G
27 to 52 Hz: 0.914 mm (0.036") double amplitude
53 to 500 Hz: 5G
Surge Withstand Capability and Fast Transient
Tested per IEEE C37.90.1-1989
Dielectric Strength
Tested per IEEE 421.3
Salt Fog
Tested per MIL-STD-810E, Method 509.3
Physical
Weight: 6.35 kg (14 lb)
Dimensions: Refer to Section 4, Installation
UL Recognition
UL recognized per standard 508, UL file number E90735.
CSA Certification
Certified per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-C22.2 Number 14, CSA File Number LR23131.
CE Compliance
The DECS-200 meets the criteria set forth by the following standards:
EN 50081-2
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) emissions standard: EN 55011, Level A.
EN 50082-2
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Immunity
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
EN 61000-4-2, Level B/IEC 1000-4-2
Radiated Susceptibility
EN 61000-4-3, Level A/IEC 1000-4-3
Electrical Fast Transient
EN 61000-4-4, Level B/IEC 1000-4-4

Radio Frequency Conducted
EN 61000-4-6, Level A/IEC 1000-4-6
Power Frequency Magnetics
EN 61000-4-8, Level A/IEC 1000-4-8


SECTION 2 • HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 2 • HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE........................................................................................ 2-1
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................... 2-1
FRONT PANEL controls and indicators ................................................................................................. 2-1
Menu Navigation................................................................................................................................. 2-2
Navigation Aids ................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Edit Sessions ...................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Changing Settings .............................................................................................................................. 2-3
PASSWORD PROTECTION.................................................................................................................. 2-8
METERING SCREEN ............................................................................................................................ 2-9
Metering Fields ................................................................................................................................... 2-9
Setpoint Field.................................................................................................................................... 2-10
Percent-of-Range Field..................................................................................................................... 2-10
Mode Message Field ........................................................................................................................ 2-10
Alarm Annunciation Field.................................................................................................................. 2-10
Alarm Message Screen .................................................................................................................... 2-10
Screens with Special Editing Modes ................................................................................................ 2-11
Menu Tree ........................................................................................................................................ 2-11
FRONT PANEL OPERATION .............................................................................................................. 2-22
Operating Modes .............................................................................................................................. 2-22
Setpoints ........................................................................................................................................... 2-22
Loop Gains ....................................................................................................................................... 2-23
Controller Gains ................................................................................................................................ 2-24
Metering ............................................................................................................................................ 2-24
Protection.......................................................................................................................................... 2-24
Limiters ............................................................................................................................................. 2-25
System Parameters .......................................................................................................................... 2-26
General Settings ............................................................................................................................... 2-29
Figures
Figure 2-1. Front Panel Controls and Indicators........................................................................................ 2-1
Figure 2-2.Operating Menu Branch ......................................................................................................... 2-12
Figure 2-3. Setpoint Menu Branch ........................................................................................................... 2-13
Figure 2-4. Loop Gains Menu Branch...................................................................................................... 2-14
Figure 2-5. Metering Menu Branch .......................................................................................................... 2-15
Figure 2-6. Protection Menu Branch........................................................................................................ 2-16
Figure 2-7. Limiters Menu Branch ........................................................................................................... 2-17
Figure 2-8. System Parameters Menu Branch (Part 1 of 3) .................................................................... 2-18
Figure 2-9. System Parameters Menu Branch (Part 2 of 3) .................................................................... 2-19
Figure 2-10. System Parameters Menu Branch (Part 3 of 3) .................................................................. 2-20
Figure 2-11. General Settings Menu Branch ........................................................................................... 2-21
Tables
Table 2-1. DECS-200 HMI Component Descriptions ................................................................................2-2
Table 2-2. Front Panel Setting Parameters ...............................................................................................2-4
Table 2-3. Settings Accessible with Setpoint Access Level ......................................................................2-8
Table 2-4. User-Selectable Metering Quantities........................................................................................2-9
Table 2-5. Setpoint Field as a Function of Operating Mode ....................................................................2-10
Table 2-6. Annunciation Messages .........................................................................................................2-10
Table 2-7. Automatic Stability Range Gain Settings Index......................................................................2-23
DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface i

ii Human-Machine Interface DECS-200

SECTION 2 • HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE
INTRODUCTION
This section describes the DECS-200 human-machine interface (HMI), illustrates how to navigate through
the menu screens, and explains how to use the front panel interface to view and change settings.
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

The front panel HMI consists of a backlit liquid crystal display (LCD), six pushbutton switches, six LED
indicators, and an RS-232 communication connector. The LCD displays DECS-200 settings and
excitation system information through the use of a structured menu. Menu screens are viewed and
settings are changed by operating the front panel pushbuttons. Active conditions are annunciated by the
front panel LEDs. The RS-232 connector (Com 0) enables communication between the DECS-200 and a
PC operating BESTCOMS software.
Front panel HMI components are shown in Figure 2-1 and described in Table 2-1.
Figure 2-1. Front Panel Controls and Indicators
DECS-200 Human-Machine Interface 2-1

Table 2-1. DECS-200 HMI Component Descriptions
Locator description
A LCD. Backlit liquid crystal display is 64 by 128 pixels in size and serves as the primary source
of information from the DECS-200. Displays operations, setpoints, loop gains, metering,
protection functions, system parameters, and general settings.
B Pre-Position LED. Lights at the predefined, pre-position setpoint of the active mode.
C Lower Limit LED. Lights at the minimum setpoint value of the active mode.
D Upper Limit LED. Lights at the maximum setpoint value of the active mode.
E Scrolling Pushbuttons. Pushbutton switches are used to scroll up, down, left, and right through
the menu structure. When operating in Edit mode, the Left and Right pushbuttons select the
variable to change and the Up and Down pushbuttons change the variable value.
F Reset Pushbutton. Cancels editing sessions, resets alarm annunciations and latched alarm
relays, and can be used for quick access to the metering screen.
G Serial Port (Com 0). This port is dedicated to RS-232 communication with a computer terminal
or PC running a terminal emulation program such as BESTCOMS. See Section 1 and Section
3 for more information about the DECS-200 serial ports.
H Edit Pushbutton. Enables settings changes. When the Edit pushbutton is first pushed, an LED
within the pushbutton lights to indicate that Edit mode is active. When settings changes are
complete (using the scrolling pushbuttons) and the Edit pushbutton is pressed again, the LED
turns off to indicate that the changes are saved.
I Null Balance LED. Lights when the inactive modes (AVR, FCR, var, or PF) match the active
mode.
J Internal Tracking LED. Lights when any inactive mode (AVR, FCR, var, or PF) is tracking the
active mode to accomplish a bumpless transfer when changing active modes.
Menu Navigation
The front panel scrolling pushbuttons are used to move through the menu structure displayed by the LCD.
Pressing the Reset pushbutton (when an edit session is not in progress) gives quick access to the
Metering screen. Metering values cannot be viewed during an edit session.
Navigation Aids
On-screen navigation assists the user in moving from screen to screen. These navigation aids are
contained in the top and bottom lines of the LCD.
The top line contains a menu path that is similar to the DOS prompt on a personal computer. When the
menu path exceeds the width of the LCD, the first part of the menu path is replaced with two dots (..) so
that the last part will be seen. Regardless of the menu path length, the current screen name is always
shown.
The bottom line displays the menu screens that can be accessed from the current screen with the Left,
Down and Right pushbuttons on the front panel. The Left pushbutton listing consists of a “<”, followed by
an abbreviated menu name. The Down pushbutton listing consists of the letter v, followed by an
abbreviated menu name. The right-pushbutton listing consists of a “>”, followed by an abbreviated menu
name.
If the Left and Right pushbutton listings are blank, then the current screen is the only one on this level. If
the Down pushbutton listing is blank, then there are no screens below the current screen.
Edit Sessions
Password access is required before entering an edit session. To initiate an edit session, press the Edit
pushbutton. The Edit pushbutton lights to indicate that the front panel is in edit mode. If the appropriate
access level is not active, then a prompt to enter a password appears. (Paragraphs titled Password
Defaults and Password Protection in this section have more information about using passwords.)
2-2 Human-Machine Interface DECS-200

Editing Settings
Once the password is entered and security access is obtained, the first editable field of the current screen
is underlined. The setting in this field can be modified by pressing the Up pushbutton to increase the
setting or the Down pushbutton to decrease the setting. To edit another setting on the current screen, use
the Left pushbutton to advance the underline upward or the Right pushbutton to advance the underline
downward to the other editable fields.
NOTE
On most screen, setting changes are used immediately by the DECS-200.
However, these changes are not saved in nonvolatile memory until the Edit
pushbutton is pressed to terminate the edit session.
After all desired editing on the current screen is complete, the changes can be saved or the values that
were in use prior to the edit session can be restored. Changes are saved by pressing the Edit pushbutton
which terminates the edit session and saves the changes in nonvolatile memory. Changes are aborted by
pressing the Reset pushbutton which terminates the edit session without saving the changes. The
previous values are then restored by reading them from nonvolatile memory. In both cases, the Edit
pushbutton LED turns off to indicate that the edit session is terminated.
Security (password) access is not immediately lost when an edit session is terminated. Security access
terminates after 10 minutes of pushbutton inactivity at the front panel. (Security access timeout is different
from edit session timeout;. see Edit Session Timeout.) If this period of inactivity occurs during an edit
session, any changes made are saved in nonvolatile memory and will be used or continue to be used by
the DECS-200. At this time, both edit access and security access are terminated.
CAUTION
Pressing the Reset pushbutton after changing the active mode setpoint will
cause a step change in the operating setpoint that may have the potential to
adversely affect the system.
In order to modify settings on another screen with the same access level, the user merely navigates to
that screen and presses the Edit pushbutton to start a new edit session on the new screen.
Edit Session Timeout
If the front panel is left in the Edit mode after any setting changes are made, the changes will be saved
and the edit session terminated after 10 minutes of pushbutton inactivity.
Changing Settings
All settings that are viewable at the front panel are password protected and require security access to
change.
Global access grants the right to change any viewable setting at the front panel.
Setpoint access grants the right to change only a few settings. These include basic operating settings like
Start/Stop, AVR/FCR, PF/var, control setpoints and pre-positions.
See Table 2-2 for a complete setting list that shows the range, increments and default values. In Table 2-
2, note that the Ref. column refers to numbers associated with the menu screens shown later in this
section. These numbers should help you find the specific screen that contains the setpoint or parameter
that you want to change. For a list of settings that are accessible with the Setpoint access level, see Table
2-3. All editable settings on a single menu screen are at the same access level.

Table 2-2. Front Panel Setting Parameters
Ref. Parameter Minimum Maximum Increment Default
1.1 Start/Stop Selection Stop, Start N/A Stop
AVR/FCR Selection AVR, FCR N/A AVR
PF/Var Control Enable Off, PF Control, Var Control N/A Off
Load Comp. Selection Off, Droop N/A Droop
Pre-Position Enable Off, On N/A On
1.2 Voltage Matching Off, On N/A Off
Internal Tracking Enable Off, On N/A Off
External Tracking Enable Off, On N/A Off
Underfrequency UF, V/Hz N/A UF
2.1 AVR Setpoint AVR min. setpoint AVR max. setpoint 0.1 V 120 V
FCR Setpoint FCR min. setpoint FCR max setpoint 0.01 A 0.1 A
Droop Compensation –30% nom. 30% nom. 0.1% nom. 5% nom.
Var Setpoint var min. setpoint var max. setpoint 1 var 0 var
PF Setpoint PF min. setpoint PF max. setpoint 0.005 1.00
2.1.1 Fine Voltage Band 0% (nom.) 30% (nom.) 0.01% (nom.) 20% (nom.)
AVR Min. Setpoint 70% (nom.) 100% (nom.) 0.1% (nom.) 70% (nom.)
AVR Max. Setpoint 100% (nom.) 110% (nom.) 0.1% (nom.) 110% (nom.)
FCR Min. Setpoint 0.0% (nom.) 100% (nom.) 0.1% (nom.) 0% (nom.)
FCR Max. Setpoint 0.0% (nom.) 120% (nom.) 0.1% (nom.) 120% (nom.)
2.1.2 Var Min. Setpoint –100% (of rated VA) 100% (of rated VA) 1% (of rated VA) 0%
Var Max. Setpoint –100% (of rated VA) 100% (of rated VA) 1% (of rated VA) 0%
Max Lag PF 0.5 1.0 0.005 0.8
Max Lead PF 1.0 –0.5 0.005 –0.8
Voltage Matching Band 0% (nom.) 20% (nom.) 0.01% (nom.) 10% (nom.)
Volt. Matching Ref. 90.0% 120.0% 0.1% 100%
2.2 AVR Prep. Setpoint AVR min. setpoint AVR max. setpoint 0.1 VA 120.0 V
FCR Prep. Setpoint FCR min. setpoint FCR max. setpoint 0.01 A 0.1 A
Var Prep. Setpoint var min. setpoint var max. setpoint 1 var 0 var
PF Prep. Setpoint PF min. setpoint PF max. setpoint 0.005 1.000
3.1 Gain Table Index 1 21 1 21
AVR/FCR Kp 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 30.0
AVR/FCR Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 150.0
AVR/FCR Kd 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 2.0
AVR/FCR Td 0.0 1.0 0.01 0.08
3.2 AVR Kg 0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0
FCR Kg 0 1,000.0 0.1 25.0
3.3 OEL Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 10.0
OEL Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0
UEL Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 10.0
UEL Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 2.0
SCL Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 10.0
SCL Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0
3.4 PF Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 120.0
PF Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0
Var Ki 0.0 1,000.0 0.01 120.0
Var Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.01 1.00
Voltage Matching Kg 0.0 1,000.0 0.1 1.0

st
4.1 1 Metering Field V Avg
nd Va-b, Vb-c, Vc-a, V Avg, Line I, VA, watts, var, PF Gen Hz,
2 Metering Field Bus Hz, Bus V, Fld V, Fld I, V Aux, EDM OC, EDM SC Vc-a
rd
3 Metering Field Fld I
5.1 Corner Frequency 15.0 Hz 90.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 57.0 Hz
Underfrequency Slope 0.00 x V/Hz 3.00 x V/Hz 0.01 V/Hz 1.00 x V/Hz
5.2 Field OV Enable Off, On N/A Off
Field OC Enable Of, On N/A Off
Stator OV Enable Off, On N/A Off
Stator UV Enable Off, On N/A Off
Loss of Sensing Enable Off, On N/A Off
Loss of Sensing Xfr to Off, On N/A Off
FCR Enable
5.3 Exciter Open Diode Off, On N/A Off
Enable
Exciter Shorted Diode Off, On N/A Off
Enable
Loss of Field Enable Off, On N/A Off
5.4 Field OV Threshold 1V 325 V 1V 20 V
Field OC Base Value 0.1 A 16 A 0.1 A 0.1 A
Stator OV Threshold 0V 30,000 V 1V 150 V
Stator UV Threshold 0V 30,000 V 1V 90 V
EDM OD Ripple 0% 100% 0.1% 5.0%
EDM SD Ripple 0% 100% 0.1% 5.0%
5.5 EDM Inhibit Level 0% 100% 0.1% 10%
LOS Balanced Voltage 0% 100% 0.1% 50%
LOS Unbalanced Voltage 0% 100% 0.1% 20%
Loss of Field Level 0 3,000,000 kvar 1 kvar 50.00 kvar
5.6 Field OV Delay 0.2 s 30.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s
Exc OC Time Dial Mult. 0.1 20.0 0.1 1.0
Stator OV Delay 0.1 s 60.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s
Stator UV Delay 0.5 s 60.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s
Loss of Voltage Sensing 0.0 s 30.0 s 0.1 s 2.0 s
Open Exciter Diode 10.0 s 60.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s
Delay
5.7 Shorted Exciter Diode 5.0 s 30.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s
Delay
Loss of Field TD 0.0 9.9 0.1 9.9 s
6.1 OEL Style Summing Point/Takeover N/A Summing Pnt
OEL Option Option 1/Option 2/Option 3 N/A Option 1
6.2 On-Line OEL Inst. Limit 0.0A 30.0 A 0.1 A 3.0 A
On-Line OEL Inst Time 0s 10 s 1s 10 s
On-Line OEL Med. Limit 0.0 A 20.0 A 0.1 A 2.0 A
On-Line OEL Med. Time 0s 120 s 1s 120 s
On-Line OEL Cont. Limit 0.0 A 15.0 A 0.1 A 1.0 A
6.3 Off-Line OEL Hi Limit 0.0 A 30 A 0.1 A 3.0 A
Off-Line OEL Hi Time 0s 10 s 1s 10 s
Off-Line OEL Low Limit 0.0 A 15 A 0.1 A 1.0 A
6.4 Off-Line Takeover OEL 0.0 A 15.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A
Max. Current
Off-Line Takeover OEL 0.0 A 30.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A
High Current

Off-Line Takeover OEL 0.1 s 20.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
Time Delay
6.5 On-Line Takeover OEL 0.0 A 30.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A
Max Current
On-Line Takeover OEL 0.0 A 15.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A
Min Current
On-Line Takeover TD 0.1 s 20.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
6.6 UEL Curve, Pnt 1 Watts 0 kW 49 kW 1 kW 0 kW
UEL Curve, Pnt 2 Watts 0 kW 49 kW 1 kW 0 kW
6.7 UEL Curve, Pnt 1 Vars 0 kvar 49 kvar 1 kvar 0 kvar
UEL Curve, Pnt 2 Vars 0 kvar 49 kvar 1 kvar 0 kvar
6.8 SCL High Limit 0.0 A 66,000.0 A 1.0 A 0.0 A
SCL High Limit Time 0.0 s 60.0 s 1.0 s 0s
SCL Low Limit 0.0 A 66,000.0 A 1.0 A 0A
7.1.1 Gen. Rated Output V 85 V 30,000 V 1V 120 V
Gen. Rated Output I 10.0 A 60,000 A 0.1 A 200.0 A
Gen. Rated Frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz 10 Hz 60 Hz
7.2.1 Rated Field Voltage 1.0 V 180.0 V 0.1 V 32.0 V
Rated Field Current 0.1 A 15.0 A 0.1 A 5.0 A
Pole Ratio 0 10 0.01 0
7.3.1 Gen. Sensing PT Pri. 1V 30,000 V 1V 120 V
Gen. Sensing PT Sec. 1V 600 V 1V 120 V
Bus Sensing PT Pri. 1V 500,000 V 1V 120 V
Bus Sensing PT Sec. 1V 600 V 1V 120 V
Gen. CT Pri. 1A 60,000 A 1A 200 A
Gen. CT Sec. 1A 5A 4A 5A
7.4.1 Sensing Configuration 1-phase A-C, 3-phase N/A 1-ph A-C
Auxiliary Input Type Voltage, Current N/A voltage
Cross Current Gain –30.00 30 0.01 0
7.4.2 AVR Mode Aux. Gain –99.00 99 0.01 1
FCR Mode Aux. Gain –99.00 99 0.01 1
Var Mode Aux. Gain –99.00 99 0.01 1
PF Mode Aux. Gain –99.00 99 0.01 1
Inner or Outer Loop Inner, Outer N/A Inner
7.5.1 Relay 1 Contact Sense NC, NO N/A NO
Relay 1 Annunc. Type Momentary, Maintained, Latched N/A Maintained
Relay 1 Moment Time 0.10 s 5.00 s 50 ms 0.10 s
Field Overvoltage On, Off N/A Off
Field Overcurrent On, Off N/A Off
Stator Undervoltage On, Off N/A Off
7.5.2 Stator Overvoltage On, Off N/A Off
Underfrequency On, Off N/A Off
Overexcitation Limit On, Off N/A Off
Underexcitation Limit On, Off N/A Off
FCR Mode On, Off N/A Off
No Voltage Sensing On, Off N/A Off
7.5.3 Setpoint at Low Limit On, Off N/A Off
Setpoint at High Limit On, Off N/A Off
System Below 10 Hz On, Off N/A Off
Open Exciter Diode On, Off N/A Off
Shorted Exciter Diode On, Off N/A Off
Relay 2 Annunc. Type Momentary Maintained, Latched N/A Maintained
Overexcitation On, Off N/A Off
Underexcitation On, Off N/A Off
Relay 3 Annunc. Type Momentary, Maintained, Latched N/A Maintained
Field Overcurrent On, Off N/A Off
Overexcitation Limit On, Off N/A Off
Underexcitation Limit On, Off N/A Off
7.6.1 AVR Traverse Rate 10 s 200 s 1s 20 s
FCR Traverse Rate 10 s 200 s 1s 20 s
Var Traverse Rate 10 s 200 s 1s 20 s
PF Traverse Rate 10 s 200 s 1s 20 s
7.7.1 AVR Prep Mode Maintain, Release N/A Release
FCR Prep Mode Maintain, Release N/A Release
Var Prep Mode Maintain, Release N/A Release
PF Prep Mode Maintain, Release N/A Release
7.8.1 Soft Start Level 0% 90% 1% 5%
Soft Start Time 1s 7,200 s 1s 5s
7.9.1 Internal Track rate 1.0 s 80 s 0.1 s 20.0 s

Internal Track Delay 0.0 s 8s 0.1 s 0.1 s
External Track Rate 1.0 s 80 s 0.1 s 20.0 s
External Track Delay 0.0 s 8s 01. s 0.1 s
8.1.1 Com0 RS232 Baud 1200 bps 19,200 bps ↑ by x2 ↓ by x ½ 9600 bps
Com1 RS232 Baud 1200 bps 19,200 bps ↑ by x2 ↓ by x ½ 9600 bps
Com2 RS232 Baud 1200 bps 19,200 bps ↑ by x2 ↓ by x ½ 9600 bps
8.1.2 Com2 Address 0 247 1 247
Com2 Delay 0 ms 200 ms 10 ms 10 ms
Parity None, Odd, Even N/A None
Stop Bits 1 2 1 2
8.2 LCD Contrast 40 80 1 60
8.3 Real-Time Clock Setting N/A 1 N/A
Real-Time Clock Date N/A 1 01-01-01
Setting
8.3.1 Time Format 12 hr, 24 hr N/A 12 hr
Daylight Saving Time DS ON, DS OFF N/A DS Off
Date Format d-m-y, m/d/y N/A d-m-y
PASSWORD PROTECTION
All editable settings on the front panel are password protected. Passwords can be a maximum of six
characters in length and may contain all letters, all numbers, or a mixture of both. Passwords are not case
sensitive; the DECS-200 will accept a correct password consisting of uppercase or lowercase letters.
There are two levels of access: global and setpoint. Global access grants the user the right to change any
editable setting through the front panel. Setpoint access grants the user the right to change a limited
number of settings. These settings include the basic operational settings like Start, Stop, AVR/FCR,
PF/var, control setpoints and pre-position. For a complete list, refer to Table 2-3. All editable settings on a
single menu screen are at the same access level.
Table 2-3. Settings Accessible with Setpoint Access Level
Screen Setting
OPERATE_1 (1.1) Start/Stop Control
OPERATE_1 (1.1) AVR/FCR Mode
OPERATE_1 (1.1) PF/Var Mode
OPERATE_1 (1.1) Load Compensation Type
OPERATE_1 (1.1) Pre-Position Enable
OPERATE_2 (1.2) Voltage Matching Enable
OPERATE_2 (1.2) Autotracking Enable
OPERATE_2 (1.2) Autotransfer Enable
MODE_SET (2.1) AVR Mode Setpoint
MODE_SET (2.1) FCR Mode Setpoint
MODE_SET (2.1) Var Mode Setpoint
MODE_SET (2.1) PF Mode Setpoint
MODE_SET (2.1) Droop Setting
PREP_SET (2.2) AVR Mode Setpoint Pre-Position
PREP_SET (2.2) FCR Mode Setpoint Pre-Position
MODE_SET (2.2) Var Mode Setpoint Pre-Position
ST
ADJUST (4.1) 1 Metering Field Display Quantity
nd
rd
ADJUST (4.1) Active Setpoint
CONTRAST (8.2) LCD Contrast

DECS-200 units are delivered with the global and setpoint passwords set at decs2. When a password is
entered, software first checks for a match between the entered password and the global password.
Because the two passwords are the same, global access is always granted. This means that in order to
allow setpoint access only, the global and setpoint passwords must be changed so that they are not the
same. Passwords may be changed using BESTCOMS software. It is suggested that the user change the
passwords in order to provide security against unauthorized parameter changes. Once changed, the
passwords should be stored in a secure location.
CAUTION
Pressing the Edit and Reset pushbuttons during DECS-200 power-up will cause
all user-programmed settings to be replaced with the default settings.
If the user-defined passwords are lost or forgotten, the default passwords may be restored by
simultaneously pressing the Edit and Reset pushbuttons during power-up of the DECS-200. Restoring the
passwords to the default values will also change all previously programmed settings to the default values.
Before restoring the default passwords (and settings), all DECS-200 settings should be downloaded to a
file by using BESTCOMS software. After the default settings are loaded, the user-programmed settings
can be uploaded to the DECS-200 from the saved settings file. The user may also reprogram the
passwords.
A password is required the first time any DECS-200 setting is changed or when the password access
expires (after 10 minutes with no additional entries). If a user with settings access attempts to begin an
edit session on a screen requiring global access, the settings access is revoked and the user is prompted
to enter a password to gain global access.
METERING SCREEN
Information displayed by the metering screen is grouped into five field types: metering, setpoint, percent
of range, mode message, and alarm annunciation.
Metering Fields
Three user-programmable fields display up to three different metering quantities at a given time. Table 2-
4 lists the metering quantities that may be selected.
Table 2-4. User-Selectable Metering Quantities

Metering Labels Metering Quantities
Va-b Generator A-B (L-L) rms voltage
Vb-c Generator B-C (L-L) rms voltage
Vc-a Generator C-A (L-L) rms voltage
Vavg Average of three generator L-L voltages
Line I Generator line current
VA Generator load VA
Watts Generator load watts
Var Generator load var
PF Generator load power factor
Gen Hz Generator frequency
Bus Hz Bus frequency
Bus V Bus rms L-L voltage
Fld V Field voltage
Fld I Field current
V Aux Voltage proportional to auxiliary input
EDM OD Open exciter diode ripple
EDM SD Shorted exciter diode ripple

The values in all three metering fields are automatically scaled by an autoranging function to display up to
four digits of resolution, a decimal point, and if needed, a multiplier such as k for 1,000 or M for 1,000,000.
For negative values with magnitudes greater than 999.9, only three digits of resolution are displayed.
Setpoint Field
The setpoint field displays the setpoint for the present mode of operation. Table 2-5 lists the relationship
between the operating mode and the setpoint field quantity.
Table 2-5. Setpoint Field as a Function of Operating Mode

Operating Mode Setpoint Field Quantity Mode Message
Off Setpoint from last mode UNIT IS OFF
Voltage Matching AVR setpoint VOLTAGE MATCHING
FCR (Manual) FCR setpoint FCR (MANUAL)
AVR (Auto) AVR setpoint AVR (AUTO)
Droop AVR setpoint DROOP
Var Control Var setpoint VAR CONTROL
PF Control PF setpoint POWER FACTOR
CONTROL
Percent-of-Range Field
The percent-of-range field displays the setpoint expressed as a percentage of the available adjustment
range. This relationship is linear. For example, a setpoint that is midway between minimum and maximum
would be displayed as 50.0%. A setpoint that is at the maximum limit would be displayed as 100%.
Mode Message Field

The bottom of the metering screen contains the mode message field which displays a message indicating
the DECS-200’s current mode of operation.
Alarm Annunciation Field

The alarm annunciation field, located directly below the metering fields, remains blank during normal
operating conditions. When an alarm condition occurs, the message “ALARMS (PRESS < OR >) appears
in the alarm annunciation field. The message appears as an inverse display—light colored characters
appear on a dark background. See Alarm Message Screen for information about how to identify which
alarm condition was annunciated.
Alarm Message Screen

From the metering screen, pressing either the Left or Right scrolling pushbutton will cause the alarm
message screen to appear. This screen displays up to six messages identifying the conditions that led to
the most recent annunciations. Table 2-6 lists the messages that may appear as annunciations on the
alarm message screen. When more than one message is listed, the newest annunciations are appended
to the bottom of the list. Once the list contains six messages, any further annunciations will cause the
oldest messages to be deleted from the top of the list.
Table 2-6. Annunciation Messages
Annunciation Message Duration of Message
FIELD OVERVOLTAGE Maintained until reset
FIELD OVERCURRENT Maintained until reset
GEN. UNDERVOLTAGE Maintained until reset
GEN. OVERVOLTAGE Maintained until reset
UNDERFREQUENCY Clears 2 s after end of event
OVEREXCITATION LIMIT Clears 2 s after end of event
UNDEREXCITATION LIMIT Clears 2 s after end of event

Annunciation Message Duration of Message
LOST VOLTAGE SENSING Maintained until reset
FAILED TO BUILD UP Clears 2 s after end of event
SYSTEM BELOW 10 HZ Maintained until reset
EXCITER DIODE OPEN Maintained until reset
EXCITER DIODE SHORT Maintained until reset
Once the list of annunciation messages has been viewed, it may be cleared by pressing the Reset
pushbutton. If a condition that LED to an annunciation is still present when the alarm message screen is
cleared, then a new annunciation message will be generated.
Pressing the Reset pushbutton will also send the display back to the Metering screen. Furthermore, the
alarms message on the Metering screen will also be cleared. However, if the user leaves the alarm
message screen by pressing the Left, Right or Up scrolling pushbuttons, then the annunciation
messages list remains intact. This allows the user to maintain a short history of annunciations. In addition,
the alarms message on the Metering screen will also remain. The disadvantage of this is that the
metering screen would no longer indicate that a new annunciation occurred because the alarms message
would always be present.
Screens with Special Editing Modes

There are several screens that operate differently while in the edit mode. OPERATE_1 (1.1),
BAUD_RATE (8.1.1), and MODBUS (8.1.2) are examples of such screens. In each case, any changes
made to a setting are not used by the system (nor saved in nonvolatile memory) until the Edit pushbutton
is pressed again. The programmable inputs for output relays 1 through 4 work in the same manner.
These are on screens RELAY_1 (7.5.1) through RELAY_3B (7.5.9).
The REG_GAIN (3.1) screen also operates in a different manner when in the Edit mode. The first four
parameters on this screen represent a table containing twenty sets of predefined PID values and one set
of user-definable values. The first of these, STAB SET #, which means stability settings number, is the
index to the table. The second, third, and fourth parameters (AVR/FCR Kp, Ki, and Kd), are the actual
entries in the table. Stability setting numbers 1 to 20 are the predefined values, and 21 is the set of user-
definable values.
Editing these parameters works as follows: As long as STAB SET # is set to 21, then AVR/FCR Kp, Ki,
and Kd may be individually edited and customized. The values displayed are not used by the system until
they are saved by pressing the Edit pushbutton. This means that if a change is aborted by pressing the
Reset pushbutton, the PID numbers currently being used by the system remain unchanged.
If STAB SET # is 1 to 20, then AVR/FCR Kp, Ki and Kd may not be edited from the display (although the
cursor can be moved to their display fields). If the STAB SET # is changed, the values shown in the
display fields will not change until the selected STAB SET # is saved. When the STAB SET # is saved,
the table entries are saved, used by the system and displayed on the LCD.
If the DECS-200 is using the user-defined values previously set at STAB SET # 21 and a STAB SET # of
1 to 20 is saved, the user-defined values are lost. The next time that user-defined values for STAB SET #
21 are required, they must be manually entered and then saved. It is assumed that the table entries for
STAB SET # 1 to 20 will be used as starting points from which users will arrive at their own customized
values after the selected starting point has been saved (and thus copied into STAB SET # 21).
Menu Tree
The menu tree has eight branches:
1. OPERATING. Displays mode status and on or off status (AVR, FCR, var, PF, etc.)
2. SETPOINTS. Display and setting of mode values (AVR, FCR, var, PF, etc.)
3. LOOP GAINS. Loop gains for each element are set here (Kp, Ki, Kd, Kg)
4. METERING. Real-time metering of user-selected values and alarm messages.
5. PROTECTION. Display and setting of protective function parameters such as pickups.
6. LIMITERS. Display and setting of system limiters (OEL, UEL, etc.)

7. SYSTEM PARAMETERS. Display and setting of system parameters. This menu item consists of nine
sub-branches:
• Generator Data
• Field Data
• Transformers
• Configuration
• Output Contacts
• Traverse Rates
• Pre-position Modes
• Startup
• Tracking
8. GENERAL SETTINGS. Display and setting of communication setting parameters and LCD contrast.
Figures 2-2 through 2-11 illustrate all branches in the menu tree. In Figures 2-2 through 2-11, the upper
left corner of each screen displays a one, two or three digit number with decimal points between each
digit. These numbers are reference numbers to the screens in the menu tree. A letter at the upper right
corner (G, S, and N) indicates the security access level (global, setpoint and not applicable) required to
edit that screen.
Figure 2-2.Operating Menu Branch

Figure 2-3. Setpoint Menu Branch

Figure 2-4. Loop Gains Menu Branch

Figure 2-5. Metering Menu Branch

Figure 2-6. Protection Menu Branch

Figure 2-7. Limiters Menu Branch

Figure 2-8. System Parameters Menu Branch (Part 1 of 3)



Figure 2-11. General Settings Menu Branch

FRONT PANEL OPERATION
The following paragraphs describe the settings and adjustments that are available via the DECS-200 front
panel. They are grouped into eight main categories which include: operating modes, setpoints, loop gains,
metering, protection, limiters, system parameters, and general settings.
Front panel settings and adjustments are listed and described in the following paragraphs. Settings are
organized by category and by screen.
Operating Modes
Screen: \OPER\OPERATE_1 (1.1)
START/STOP - starts and stops the regulator
AVR OR FCR - selects the regulator mode: AVR for automatic voltage regulator, FCR for field current
regulator (also known as MANUAL mode)
PF OR var - selects the controller mode: OFF for none, var for var control, PF for power factor control
LOAD COMP - selects the load compensation type: OFF for none, DROOP for voltage droop.
PRE-POSITION - enables/disables the pre-position function: OFF to disable, ON to enable
Screen: \OPER\OPERATE_2 (1.2)
VOLT MATCH - turns the voltage matching function on and off (Internal tracking between modes)
INT TRACK - turns the internal tracking function on and off
EXT TRACK - turns the external tracking function on and off
UF OR V/HZ - selects either underfrequency or volts-per-hertz limiting
Setpoints
Screen: \SETPT\MODE_SET (2.1)
AVR MODE - the automatic voltage regulation setpoint in actual generator voltage
FCR MODE - the field current regulation setpoint in Amps
DROOP - the amount of voltage droop as a % of rated generator voltage when the kvar load numerically
equals the rated kW
Var MODE - the var controller regulation setpoint in var
PF MODE - the power factor controller regulation setpoint
Screen: \SETPT\MODES\RANGE_1 (2.1.1)
FINE V BD - the adjustable voltage band (var volt band) around the generator's output voltage as a % of
rated generator voltage when var/PF mode is active
AVR MIN - the minimum automatic voltage regulator setpoint as a % of rated generator voltage
AVR MAX - the maximum automatic voltage regulator setpoint as a % of rated generator voltage
FCR MIN - the minimum field current regulator setpoint as a % of rated field current
FCR MAX - the maximum field current regulator setpoint as a % of rated field current
Screen: \SETPT\MODES\RANGE_2 (2.1.2)
MIN var OUT - the minimum generated var setpoint as a numerical % of rated generator kW (negative for
absorbing)
MAX var OUT - the maximum generated var setpoint as a numerical % of rated generator kW (negative
for absorbing)
MAX LAG PF - maximum lagging power factor setpoint
MAX LEAD PF - maximum leading power factor setpoint
V MATCH BD - the adjustable voltage band allows the voltage matching function to activate if the bus
voltage is within this band. This setting is a numerical % of rated generator voltage(Gen to Bus
V MATCH REF - (Gen to Bus PT Match Level) the bus voltage setpoint for the voltage matching function
as a numerical % of bus voltage

Screen: \SETPT\PREP_SET (2.2)
The present control mode operating setpoint is driven to the pre-position value when the unit receives a
pre-position command.
AVR MODE - the automatic voltage regulator setpoint pre-position value
FCR MODE - the field current regulator setpoint pre-position value
Var MODE - the var controller setpoint pre-position value
PF MODE - the power factor setpoint pre-position value
Loop Gains
Screen: \GAIN\REG_GAIN1 (3.1)
STAB RANGE - the index into the internally defined PID table. Table 2-7 lists the automatic pre-defined
stability gain settings for the exciter field and the 20 stability settings.
AVR/FCR Kp - proportional gain coefficient used in the AVR/FCR loop
AVR/FCR Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the AVR/FCR loop
AVR/FCR Kd - derivative gain coefficient used in the AVR/FCR loop
AVR/FCR Td - derivative time constant used in AVR/FCR loop
Table 2-7. Automatic Stability Range Gain Settings Index
Generator
Generator Open Exciter Time
Excitation Circuit Time Constant
Mode Setting Constant (T’do) (Texc) Kp Ki Kd
1 1.0 0.17 42.20 115.20 4.433
2 1.5 0.25 66.50 150.00 8.750
3 2.0 0.33 87.16 167.90 13.670
4 2.5 0.42 104.50 175.80 18.960
5 3.0 0.50 119.00 177.80 24.500
6 3.5 0.58 131.30 176.40 30.220
7 4.0 0.67 141.80 173.10 36.060
8 4.5 0.75 150.90 168.80 42.000
9 5.0 0.83 158.80 163.90 48.010
Exciter Field
10 5.5 0.92 165.70 158.70 54.080

11 6.0 1.00 171.80 153.60 60.200
12 6.5 1.08 177.20 148.50 66.350
13 7.0 1.17 182.10 143.60 72.540
14 7.5 1.25 186.50 138.90 78.750
15 8.0 1.33 190.50 134.40 84.980
16 8.5 1.42 194.10 130.10 91.230
17 9.0 1.50 197.40 125.90 97.500
18 9.5 1.58 200.40 122.10 103.800
19 10.0 1.67 203.20 118.40 110.100
20 10.5 1.75 205.70 114.80 116.400
Screen: \GAIN\REG GAIN2 (3.2)

AVR Kg - loop gain used in AVR mode
FCR Kg - loop gain used in FCR mode

Screen: \GAIN\LIM_GAINS (3.3)
OEL Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the overexcitation limiter loop
OEL Kg - loop gain used in the overexcitation limiter
UEL Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the underexcitation limiter loop
UEL Kg - loop gain used in the underexcitation limiter
SCL Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the stator current limiter
SCL Kg - loop gain used in the stator current limiter
Controller Gains
Screen: \GAIN\CTL_GAINS (3.4)
PF Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the power factor controller
PF Kg - loop gain used for the power factor controller
Var Ki - integral gain coefficient used in the var controller
Var Kg - loop gain used for the var controller
V MATCH Kg - loop gain used for the voltage matching function
Metering
Screen: \METER\ADJUST (4.1)
1st metering field - displays any one of several metering quantities
2nd metering field - displays any one of several metering quantities
3rd metering field - displays any one of several metering quantities
SETPT - the present control mode operating setpoint
Screen: \METER\ALARM_MSG (4.2)
Reset Button - clears any displayed alarm messages (and returns to the ADJUST metering screen).
Protection
Screen: \PROT\UNDERFREQ (5.1)
CORNR FREQ - the corner frequency for the underfrequency curve
UF SLOPE - the slope of the underfrequency curve
Screen: \PROT\PROT_ENABL1 (5.2)
FIELD OV - field overvoltage detection enable
FIELD OC - field overcurrent detection enable
STATOR OV - generator output overvoltage detection enable
STATOR UV - generator output undervoltage detection enable
NO SENSING –loss of voltage sensing detection enable
NO SNS→FCR – transfer to FCR mode enable (when a loss of voltage sensing is detected). Loss of
voltage sensing detection must also be enabled for this feature to work.
Screen: \PROT\PROT_ENAB2 (5.3)
EX DIOD OD - exciter open diode detection enable
EX DIOD SD - exciter shorted diode detection enable
LOSS FIELD - enables and disables loss of field protection
Screen: \PROT\PROT_LEVL (5.4)
FIELD OV - field overvoltage threshold
FIELD OC - field overcurrent base value (100%)
STATOR OV - generator output overvoltage threshold
STATOR UV - generator output undervoltage threshold
EDM OD RIPL - open exciter diode ripple threshold
EDM SD RIPL - shorted exciter diode ripple threshold
Screen: \PROT\PROT_LEVL2 (5.5)
EDM INH LVL - exciter diode detection inhibit level
LOS BAL V - loss of balanced sensing voltage threshold
LOS IMBAL V - loss of unbalanced sensing voltage threshold
LOSS FIELD - loss of field time delay
Screen: \PROT\PROT_TIMER (5.6)
FIELD OV - field overvoltage time delay
FIELD OC TD - field overcurrent time dial multiplier
STATOR OV - generator output overvoltage time delay
STATOR UV - generator output undervoltage time delay
NO SENSING - lost sensing voltage time delay
EX DIOD OD - exciter open diode time delay
Screen: \PROT\PROT_TIMR2 (5.7)
EX DIOD SD - exciter shorted diode time delay
LOSS FIELD - loss of field time delay
Limiters
Screen: LIMITERS (6.0)
ENABLED - selects which limiters are enabled: NONE, UEL, OEL, OEL/UEL, SCL, SCL/UEL, SCL/OEL,
or SCL/OEL/UEL
Screen: \LIMIT\OPTION (6.1)
On-line overexcitation limiter style and options.
OEL STYLE - selects Summing Point or Takeover style overexcitation limiter
OEL OPTION - selects on-line and off-line overexcitation limiter control options:
Option 1: On-line OEL settings are active when either the 52 J/K or 52 L/M contacts are open. Off-line
OEL settings are active when either the 52 J/K or 52 L/M contacts are closed.
Option 2: On-line OEL settings are active when the 52 J/K contact is open. Off-line OEL settings are
active when the 52 J/K contact is open.
Option 3: On-line OEL settings are active at all times.
Screen: \LIMIT\ONLINE (6.2)
On-line overexcitation limiter (summing point) settings.
INST LIMIT - on-line overexcitation limiter instantaneous limit threshold
INST TIME - on-line overexcitation limiter instantaneous limit time delay
MED LIMIT - on-line overexcitation limiter medium current threshold
MED TIME - on-line overexcitation limiter medium current time delay
CONT LIMIT - on-line overexcitation limiter continuous (low) current threshold
Screen \LIMIT\OFFLINE (6.3)
Off-line overexcitation limiter (summing point) settings.
OEL HI LIM - off-line overexcitation limiter high current threshold
HI LIM TIME - off-line overexcitation limiter high current time delay
OEL LO LIM - off-line overexcitation limiter low current threshold

Screen \LIMIT\OFFTAKOVR (6.4)
Off-line overexcitation limiter (takeover) settings.
OEL MAX CUR - off-line takeover overexcitation limiter maximum current threshold
OEL MIN CUR - off-line takeover overexcitation limiter minimum current threshold
OEL TD - off-line takeover overexcitation limiter time delay
Screen \LIMIT\ONTAKOVR (6.5)
On-line overexcitation limiter (takeover) settings.
OEL MAX CUR - on-line takeover overexcitation limiter maximum current threshold
OEL MIN CUR - on-line takeover overexcitation limiter minimum current threshold
OEL TD - on-line takeover overexcitation limiter time delay
Screen \LIMIT\UEL_CRV_X (6.6)
Underexcitation limiter real-power curve points.
PNT 1 WATTS - underexcitation limiter real-power curve point 1
Screen \LIMIT\UEL_CRV_Y (6.7)
Underexcitation limiter reactive-power curve points.
PNT 1 vars - underexcitation limiter reactive-power curve point 1
Screen \LIMIT\SCLIM (6.8)
Stator current limiter settings.
SCL HI LIM - stator current limiter high current setpoint
HI LIM TIME - stator current limiter time delay
SCL LO LIM - stator current limiter low current setpoint
System Parameters
Screen: \GEN\GEN_DATA (7.1.1)
RATED VOLT - generator rated output voltage
RATED CURR - generator rated output current
FREQUENCY - generator rated frequency
Screen: \EXCTR\EXCTR_DATA (7.2.1)
FIELD VOLT - rated field voltage
FIELD CURR - rated field current
POLE RATIO - ratio between exciter poles to the number of generator poles
Screen: \XFMRS\XFMR_DATA (7.3.1)
GEN PT PRI - generator sensing transformer primary voltage rating
GEN PT SEC - generator sensing transformer secondary voltage rating
BUS PT PRI - bus sensing transformer primary voltage rating
BUS PT SEC - bus sensing transformer secondary voltage rating

GEN CT PRI - generator sensing transformer primary current rating
GEN CT SEC - generator sensing transformer secondary current rating
Screen: \CONFG\CNFG_DATA (7.4.1)
SENSING - sensing configuration: single-phase or three-phase
AUX IN TYPE - selects the auxiliary input type as voltage or current
CRSS I GAIN - cross current compensation input gain
Screen: \CNFG AUX Gains (7.4.2)
The auxiliary input allows an analog signal to be externally applied to the DECS-200 to modify the
operating setpoint. The amount of change that may be induced is proportional to the magnitude of the
signal and the input gain.
AVR MODE –auxiliary input gain in AVR mode
FCR MODE –auxiliary input gain in FCR mode
Var MODE –auxiliary input gain in var mode
PR MODE –auxiliary input gain in PF mode
INNER/OUTER – control loop summing point location where the auxiliary input signal is to be injected.
For AVR or FCR mode, select INNER. For var or PF mode, select outer. Once selected, the injection
point remains fixed across all modes of operation.
Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_1 (7.5.1)
There are three types of relay annunciation: momentary, maintained and latched. A relay that is
programmed for momentary annunciation will do so for a (programmable) time interval and then cease.
The momentary annunciation for an existing condition will not repeat. A relay that is programmed for
maintained annunciation will do so for the duration of the condition that is being annunciated. A relay
programmed for a latched annunciation will continue to annunciate the condition until an alarm reset
command is given through the front panel, BESTCOMS software (via the front RS-232 port) or Modbus
(via the rear RS-485 port).
OUTPUT SENSE - relay 1 contact normal state: NO for normally open, NC for normally closed
OUTPUT TYPE - type of contact annunciation: MOMENT for momentary, MAINTN for maintained,
LATCHED for latched
MOMENT TIME - the duration of a momentary annunciation
FIELD O/V - assignment of field overvoltage annunciation to output relay 1
FIELD O/C - assignment of field overcurrent annunciation to output relay 1
STATOR U/V - assignment of stator undervoltage annunciation to output relay 1
Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_1A (7.5.2)
STATOR O/V - assignment of stator overvoltage annunciation to output relay 1
UNDER FREQ - assignment of underfrequency annunciation to output relay 1
IN OEL - assignment of overexcitation limit annunciation to output relay 1
IN UEL - assignment of underexcitation limit annunciation to output relay 1
IN FCR MODE - assignment of FCR mode (Manual) annunciation to output relay 1
NO V SENSE - assignment of lost voltage sensing annunciation to output relay 1
Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_1B (7.5.3)
AT LO LIMIT - assignment of setpoint at low limit annunciation to output relay 1
AT HI LIMIT - assignment of setpoint at high limit annunciation to output relay 1
BELOW 10 HZ - assignment of generator frequency below 10 hertz annunciation to output relay 1
EXC DIOD OD - assignment of open exciter diode to output relay 1
EXC DIOD SD - assignment of shorted exciter diode to output relay 1
LOSS FIELD - enables and disables annunciation of loss of field protection

Screen: \CNTCT\RELAY_1C (7.5.4)
IN SCL - enables and disables stator current limiting annunciation
OUTPUT TYPE - duration of contact annunciation: MOMENT for momentary, MAINTN for maintained,
LATCHED for latched
IN FCR MODE - assignment of FCR mode (manual) annunciation to output relay 2
BELOW 10 HZ –assignment of generator frequency below 10 hertz annunciation to output relay 2
OUTPUT TYPE - duration of contact annunciation: MOMENT for momentary, MAINTN for maintained,
LATCHED for latched
IN FCR MODE - assignment of FCR mode (Manual) annunciation to output relay 3
BELOW 10 HZ –assignment of generator frequency below 10 hertz annunciation to output relay 3

Screen: \TRVRS\TRVRS_RATE (7.6.1)
The traverse rate is the time required to adjust the present control mode setpoint from one extreme of the
programmed adjustment range to the other extreme.
AVR MODE - the automatic voltage regulator mode traverse rate
FCR MODE - the field current regulator mode traverse rate
Var MODE - the var control mode traverse rate
PF MODE - the power factor control mode traverse rate
Screen: \PMODE\PREP_MODE (7.7.1)
The pre-position mode for the present control mode determines whether or not the unit will respond to
further setpoint change commands once the operating setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If the
pre-position mode is set for MAINTAIN, then further setpoint change commands are ignored. If the pre-
position mode is set for RELEASE, then subsequent setpoint change commands are followed.
AVR MODE - automatic voltage regulator pre-position mode
FCR MODE - field current regulator pre-position mode
Var MODE - var controller pre-position mode
PF MODE - power factor controller pre-position mode
Screen: \START\START_UP (7.8.1)
SS LEVEL - soft start level
SS TIME - soft start time
Screen: \TRACK\TRACK_DATA (7.9.1)
Internal tracking (autotracking) and external tracking (auto-transfer)
INT RATE - the traverse rate of internal tracking from minimum setpoints to maximum setpoints
INT DELAY - the time delay before internal tracking begins after it is turned on
EXT RATE - the traverse rate of external tracking from minimum setpoints to maximum setpoints
EXT DELAY - the time delay before external tracking begins after it is turned on
General Settings
Screen: \COMMS\BAUD_RATE (8.1.1)
COM0 RS232 - the front panel RS232 communications port baud rate
COM1 RS232 - the rear panel RS232 autotracking communications port baud rate
COM2 RS485 - the rear panel RS485 Modbus communications port baud rate
Screen: \COMMS\MODBUS (8.1.2)
Settings for the rear panel RS485 Modbus communications port
COM2 ADDR - device address
COM2 DELAY - response delay time
PARITY - parity: NONE, ODD, or EVEN
STOP BITS - number of stop bits: 1 or 2
Screen: \SETUP\CONTRAST (8.2)
Front panel LCD contrast setting

Screen: \D200\SETUP\CLOCK (8.3)
TIME - displays and sets the current time
DATE - displays and sets the current date
Screen: \RTC\CLK_FORMAT (8.3.1)
TIME FORMAT - selects the format for displaying time on Screen 8.3
DST FORMAT - selects the DECS-200 RTC for day light savings time
DATE FORMAT - selects the format for displaying the date on Screen 8.3

SECTION 3 • FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 3 • FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION............................................................................................ 3-1
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................... 3-1
FUNCTION BLOCK DESCRIPTIONS ................................................................................................... 3-1
Contact Input Circuits ......................................................................................................................... 3-2
Start................................................................................................................................................. 3-2
Stop ................................................................................................................................................. 3-2
AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulation).............................................................................................. 3-2
FCR (Field Current Regulation) ...................................................................................................... 3-2
Raise ............................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Lower............................................................................................................................................... 3-2
PRE-P (Pre-Position) ...................................................................................................................... 3-2
52L/M (Unit/Parallel) ....................................................................................................................... 3-2
52J/K (Var/Power Factor Enable) ................................................................................................... 3-3
SECEN (Secondary Enable) ........................................................................................................... 3-3
ALRST (Alarm Reset) ..................................................................................................................... 3-3
Analog Inputs ...................................................................................................................................... 3-3
Generator Voltage Sensing Ranges ............................................................................................... 3-3
Generator Voltage (VCA) .................................................................................................................. 3-3
Generator Voltage (VAB)................................................................................................................... 3-4
Bus Voltage (BUS VCA) .................................................................................................................... 3-4
Phase B Line Current...................................................................................................................... 3-4
Cross-Current Loop Input................................................................................................................ 3-4
Accessory Input (Remote Setpoint Control).................................................................................... 3-4
Field Current and Field Voltage ...................................................................................................... 3-4
Operating Power................................................................................................................................. 3-4
Control Power ..................................................................................................................................... 3-4
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) ..................................................................................................... 3-5
Microprocessor ................................................................................................................................... 3-5
Digital Signal Processor (DSP)........................................................................................................... 3-5
Operational Settings ........................................................................................................................... 3-5
Watchdog Timer ................................................................................................................................. 3-5
Real-Time Clock ................................................................................................................................. 3-5
Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) Output .............................................................................................. 3-5
Relay Output Circuits.......................................................................................................................... 3-5
Programmable Outputs ................................................................................................................... 3-5
Watchdog Output ............................................................................................................................ 3-6
On/Off Output.................................................................................................................................. 3-6
Communication................................................................................................................................... 3-6
Memory Circuits .................................................................................................................................. 3-6
Protection Functions ........................................................................................................................... 3-7
Field Overvoltage ............................................................................................................................ 3-7
Field Overcurrent ............................................................................................................................ 3-7
Generator Overvoltage.................................................................................................................... 3-8
Loss of Sensing............................................................................................................................... 3-8
Below 10 Hertz ................................................................................................................................ 3-8
Loss of Field .................................................................................................................................... 3-8
Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM) .......................................................................................................... 3-8
Exciter Diode Monitor Settings........................................................................................................ 3-9
SOFT START ......................................................................................................................................... 3-9
LIMITER FUNCTIONS ......................................................................................................................... 3-10
Underfrequency Limiter .................................................................................................................... 3-10
Volts per Hertz Ratio Limiter............................................................................................................. 3-11
Overexcitation Limiter (OEL) ............................................................................................................ 3-11
Summing Point OEL...................................................................................................................... 3-11
Takeover OEL ............................................................................................................................... 3-12
On-Line/Off-Line OEL Options ...................................................................................................... 3-12
DECS-200 Functional Description i
Underexcitation Limiter ..................................................................................................................... 3-13
Stator Current Limiting...................................................................................................................... 3-13
DROOP AND LINE-DROP COMPENSATION..................................................................................... 3-14
DATA LOGGING AND REPORTING ................................................................................................... 3-14
Sequence of Events Reporting ......................................................................................................... 3-14
System Contact Input State Changes ........................................................................................... 3-14
System Output State Changes...................................................................................................... 3-14
System Alarm State Changes ....................................................................................................... 3-14
Changes in State of System Status .............................................................................................. 3-14
Oscillography .................................................................................................................................... 3-15
Internal Variables .......................................................................................................................... 3-15
Figures
Figure 3-1. Simplified Block Diagram......................................................................................................... 3-1
Figure 3-2. Field Overcurrent Timing Curves ............................................................................................ 3-7
Figure 3-3. Soft Start Voltage Reference................................................................................................. 3-10
Figure 3-4. Typical Underfrequency Compensation Curve ..................................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-5. Typical 1.10 PU V/Hz Limiter Curve...................................................................................... 3-11
Figure 3-6. Off-Line Overexcitation Limiting ............................................................................................ 3-11
Figure 3-7. On-Line Overexcitation Limiting ............................................................................................ 3-11
Figure 3-8. Inverse Time Characteristic for Takeover-Style OEL............................................................ 3-12
Figure 3-9. Custom Five-Point Curve ...................................................................................................... 3-13
Figure 3-10. Stator Current Limiting......................................................................................................... 3-13
Figure 3-11. Data Record Example ......................................................................................................... 3-16
Tables
Table 3-1. 52L/M and 52J/K Truth Table (Option 1, Default Settings) ......................................................3-3
ii Functional Description DECS-200

SECTION 3 • FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
INTRODUCTION
This section illustrates and describes the functional capabilities of the DECS-200.
FUNCTION BLOCK DESCRIPTIONS

The function blocks of the DECS-200 are illustrated in Figure 3-1 and described in the following
paragraphs.
FLASH
RAM EEPROM
START MEMORY
STOP
WTCHD
SECEN
52L/M
FRONT COM0 ON/OF
AUTO
CONTACT PANEL RS-232 RELAY
FCR INPUT KEYPAD PORT OUTPUT RLY3
PRE-P CIRCUITS CONTACTS
RAISE RLY2
LOWER
52J/K RLY1
ALRST
ZCD
FRONT
ZCD PANEL
LEDS
BUS VCA MICRO
PROCESSOR
GEN VCA FRONT
GEN VAB
ANALOG PANEL
INPUT LCD
LINE IB CIRCUITS
ADC
LINE IA/C
ACC V/I
COM1
RS-232
PORT
COM2
RS-485
+5
VAC WATCH-DOG PORT
+12
POWER TIMER
-12
SUPPLY
VDC
+24 F+
CHOPPER
DIGITAL
(PWM)
SIGNAL F-
P0003-19.vsd PROCESSOR
03-09-01
POWER
INPUT
Figure 3-1. Simplified Block Diagram
DECS-200 Functional Description 3-1

Contact Input Circuits
Eleven contact input circuits, powered by isolated 12 Vdc, provide operational input control for the DECS-
200. If the start and stop inputs should become active at the same time, the stop input has priority. If the
AVR and FCR inputs should become active at the same time, the FCR input has priority. Each of the
eleven inputs, their functions, and types of input required are defined in the following paragraphs.
Start
This input accepts a momentary contact closure and enables the DECS-200. Once the DECS-200 is
enabled, this input has no effect.
Stop
This input accepts a momentary contact closure and disables the DECS-200. Once the DECS-200 is
disabled, this input has no effect. The Stop input also take precedence over the Start input.
AVR (Automatic Voltage Regulation)
This input accepts a momentary contact closure that places the DECS-200 in AVR mode. Once the
DECS-200 is in AVR mode, this input has no effect.
FCR (Field Current Regulation)
This input accepts a momentary contact closure that places the DECS-200 in FCR mode. Once the unit is
in FCR mode, this input has no effect. The FCR input takes precedence over the AVR input.
Raise
This input increases the active operating setpoint. This function is active as long as the contact is closed.
The raise increment is a function of the setpoint range of adjustment and the active mode traverse rate.
The increments are directly proportional to the adjustment range and inversely proportional to the traverse
rate. This input has no effect when the active pre-position mode is Maintain.
Lower
This input decreases the active operating setpoint. This function is active as long as the contact is closed.
The lower increment is a function of the setpoint range of adjustment and the active mode traverse rate.
The increments are directly proportional to the adjustment range and inversely proportional to the traverse
rate. This input has no effect when the active pre-position mode is Maintain.
PRE-P (Pre-Position)
This input accepts a continuous contact closure that causes all setpoints to be changed to the pre-
position (predefined) value. If the active pre-position mode is Maintain, then the pre-position input will
override the raise and lower inputs to maintain the setpoint at the pre-position value while the contact is
closed. If the active pre-position mode is Release, then the pre-position input will change the setpoint to
the pre-position value and respond to raise and lower inputs.
If the non-active pre-position mode is Maintain and internal tracking is enabled, the non-active mode will
maintain the non-active setpoint at the pre-position value and override the tracking function. If the non-
active pre-position is Release and internal tracking is enabled, then the pre-position input will change the
setpoint to the pre-position value and respond to the tracking function.
Typically, this input is connected to a 52b auxiliary contact on the generator breaker. When the generator
breaker opens, all setpoints are forced to the pre-position settings. This is especially helpful if FCR mode
is active and the generator is under a load. Utilizing a 52b contact will force the FCR setpoint to its pre-
position setting which could be preset to the generator’s no-load, nominal voltage.
52L/M (Unit/Parallel)
This input informs the DECS-200 that the system is operating in single-unit operation or paralleled to
another generator or power grid in droop mode. It also switches between which overexcitation limiter (off-
line limiter or on-line limiter) is activated when excitation levels exceed the OEL settings. This input is
typically connected to a 52b auxiliary contact of the generator breaker and requires a continuous contact
closure to switch modes. Refer to the 52J/K (Var/PF Enable) paragraph for more information.
If both the 52L/M and 52J/K contact inputs are closed, AVR mode is active while the off-line
overexcitation limiter is enabled and will limit if the settings are exceeded. This mode is intended for
stand-alone (single unit) generator operation.
If the 52L/M contact input is open and 52J/K contact input is closed, droop mode is active while the on-
line overexcitation limiter is enabled and will limit if the settings are exceeded. This mode is intended for
3-2 Functional Description DECS-200
two or more generators paralleled together on an isolated bus (islanded) or paralleled directly to the utility
grid. Cross-current compensation (CCC) can also be utilized in this contact configuration. However, this
mode (CCC) is not intended for paralleling to the utility grid.
If both 52L/M is open and 52J/K are open, var/power factor mode is active while the on-line overexcitation
limiter is enabled and will limit if the settings are exceeded. This mode is intended for applications
requiring var or power factor regulation when paralleled to the utility grid.
Table 3-1 describes 52 L/M and 52 J/K contact functionality for default OEL option 1. OEL options 2 and 3
are discussed in Overexcitation Limiter, On-Line/Off-Line OEL Options.
Table 3-1. 52L/M and 52J/K Truth Table (Option 1, Default Settings)
DECS-200 Operating Mode 52L/M 52J/K Generator Operating Mode
AVR mode active, off-line OEL Closed Closed Single unit/stand-alone
enabled, no droop, no var/PF
Droop mode active, on-line OEL Open Closed Paralleled to the utility grid (droop) or
enabled, no var/PF two or more generators islanded
(droop or cross-current comp.)
Var/PF mode active, on-line OEL Open Open Paralleled to utility grid
enabled
52J/K (Var/Power Factor Enable)

This input accepts a continuous contact closure that disables var/power factor operation. An open contact
enables the DECS-200 to control the generator reactive power in either the var or power factor modes.
These functions must be enabled via HMI, BESTCOMS or Modbus¥ before use. For more information,
refer to the 52L/M (Unit/Parallel) paragraphs. If neither var nor power factor mode is desired, it is
recommended that a jumper wire be placed across the 52J/K and common terminals, and switch the
52L/M input with the generator breaker auxiliary contact (52b).
SECEN (Secondary Enable)
This input accepts a continuous contact closure and enables the DECS-200 unit as the secondary unit to
another excitation control system.
ALRST (Alarm Reset)
This input accepts a momentary contact closure to clear all latched relay annunciations and front panel
alarm messages.
Analog Inputs
The following analog inputs are used to sense the following quantities:
• Generator voltage (three-phase/single-phase)
• Bus voltage (single-phase)
• Phase B (line) current
• Cross current loop input
• Accessory input (remote setpoint control)
• Field voltage (internal)
• Field current (internal)
Generator Voltage Sensing Ranges
The ac voltage sensing range of the DECS-200 is split into four operating ranges: 120 volts nominal, 240
volts nominal, 480 volts nominal, and 600 volts nominal. The range selection is the same for generator
and bus voltages and is based on the secondary VT voltage for the generator voltage sensing. The 120
volt range is selected if the generator secondary VT voltage is between 85 and 153 Vac. The 240 volts
range is selected if the generator secondary VT voltage is between 170 and 300 Vac. The 480 volt range
is selected if the generator secondary VT voltage is between 340 and 528 Vac. The 600 volt range is
selected if the generator VT voltage is between 540 and 690 Vac.
Generator Voltage (VCA)
The GEN VCA input senses the generator voltage across phases A and C. This voltage is used to estimate
the generator rms voltage and frequency.

Generator Voltage (VAB)
The GEN VAB input senses the generator voltage across phases A and B and is used to estimate the
generator rms voltage. This voltage is used with the VCA voltage to estimate the bus rms voltage and
frequency. This input is not internally isolated.
Bus Voltage (BUS VCA)
The BUS VCA input senses the bus voltage across phases A and C. This voltage is used to estimate the
bus rms voltage and frequency. The BUS VCA input is not internally isolated.
Phase B Line Current
This internally isolated input is developed from a current transformer (CT) and used to calculate the B-
phase generator line current.
Cross-Current Loop Input
This input is developed from a current transformer (CT) connected to phase B of a generator and used
when generators are operating in cross-current compensation mode.
Accessory Input (Remote Setpoint Control)
This internally isolated input may be either an analog voltage (–10 to +10 Vdc) or current (4 to 20
milliamperes). Separate terminals provide convenient terminations but only one input may be used in any
application. This input is typically supplied by a power system stabilizer or similar device.
The accessory voltage input signal changes the setpoint of the selected operating mode. This input may
be in the range of –10 to +10 Vdc or 4 to 20 milliamperes. The input signal is named a voltage signal
even though one input mode may be 4 to 20 milliamperes. When the current input mode is selected, the
input current (4 to 20 milliamperes) is converted by the DECS-200 to –5 to +5 Vdc voltage signal. The
following equation is used when converting current signals to voltage signals.
V AUX = 0.625(I − 12)

Where: VAUX is the voltage signal
I is the current in milliamperes
The accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the accessory gain setting. The gain setting is in the
range of –99 to +99. If the gain is set to zero, the accessory voltage input signal is made inactive. The
accessory voltage input can be active in all four operating modes.
In AVR mode, the accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the voltage gain setting which defines
the setpoint change as a percentage of the rated generator voltage.
In FCR mode, the accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the current gain setting which defines the
setpoint change as a percentage of the rated field current.
In var mode, the accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the var gain setting which defines the
setpoint change as a percentage of the rated apparent power of the generator.
In power factor mode, the accessory voltage input signal is multiplied by the power factor gain setting and
divided by 100 which defines the power factor setpoint change.
Field Current and Field Voltage
These signals are sensed internally. The field voltage signal is used for field overvoltage protection. The
field current signal is used for: off-line and on-line overexcitation limiting, auto-tracking, and field over-
current protection.
Operating Power
The DECS-200 operating power input accepts three-phase or single-phase voltage over the range of 50
to 277 Vac (depending on the nominal field voltage) at 50 to 500 hertz. The input is rectified and filtered
by the input’s low-pass filter, which feeds the chopper stage. Depending on the operating power applied,
three nominal output voltages are possible: 32, 63, or 125 Vdc.
Control Power
Control power may be either of two types:. nominal 24/48 Vdc or nominal 120 Vac/125 Vdc. For the 120
Vac/125 Vdc control power type, both ac and dc input power voltage may be applied for redundant power
supply operation. Refer to Section 1, General Information, Specifications, for voltage ranges. The power

supply provides +5 Vdc, ±12 Vdc, and +24 Vdc for the DECS-200 internal circuitry. When dual power
sources are used, an isolation transformer is required for the ac input.
Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC)

All analog input signals are brought to the input of the 12-bit ADC. Each input signal is sampled at a rate
that is controlled by the digital signal processor (DSP).
Microprocessor
The microprocessor is the heart of the DECS-200 and performs control, computation, self testing, and
communication functions. The main processor (labeled microprocessor in Figure 3-1) generally performs
low speed tasks such as protective functions, frequency measurements, communication, watchdog alarm,
and other system functions. The microprocessor generates the PWM (pulse width modulated) control
signal needed for chopper control and monitors its status.
Digital Signal Processor (DSP)

The DSP supports measurement, control (output and converters), metering functions and filtering. It
controls both the ADC and the digital-to-analog converter (DAC). All eight analog input signals from the
ADC are filtered by the finite impulse response (FIR) filters. AC signals are also filtered by the infinite
impulse response (IIR) filters and dc signals (field voltage and current) are filtered by averaging filters.
The DSP provides the microprocessor with the signal defining the chopper duty cycle/PWM control.
Operational Settings
Operational settings that affect the system are stored in nonvolatile memory. These settings may be
changed through BESTCOMS or the front panel interface. Password access is required to change
settings. Settings may be viewed without obtaining password access.
Watchdog Timer
If the microprocessor fails for any reason, output pulses to the watchdog timer stop and, after a brief
interval, the watchdog timer takes the system off line and closes the watchdog output contacts.
Real-Time Clock
The real-time clock is used by the event and data logging functions to timestamp events. Time can be
displayed in either 12- or 24-hour formats and can be selected to allow for daylight saving time. Two date
formats are available: d-m-y or m/d/y. All formats may be selected either through the front panel HMI or
BESTCOMS. Any cycling of power to the DECS-200 will reset the clock.
Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) Output

The pulse-width modulated signal provided by the microprocessor controls the field voltage by modulating
the duty cycle of the chopper (power module).
Relay Output Circuits

There are five output relays. These relay outputs are controlled by the microprocessor and sustain seven
amperes at 240 Vac. Each output relay has 300 volt surge protectors across the contacts to protect
against arcing from inductive loads. Relay outputs one through three are fully programmable via all
interfaces. Two output relays (one form A and one form B) have predetermined functions. All output
relays are described in the following paragraphs.
Programmable Outputs
Output relays RLY1, RLY2, and RLY3 may be programmed using the front panel HMI, BESTCOMS
software (using the front RS-232 port (COM0)) or through the Modbus™protocol (using the left RS-485
port (COM2)).
The three output relays labeled RLY1, RLY2, and RLY3 have the following programmable features.
• Selection of contact functionality (normally open or normally closed)
• Selection of output type (momentary, maintained for as long as the condition is present, or latched
until reset)
• Program duration of momentary annunciation (from 0.1 to 5 seconds in 50 millisecond steps)
• Selection of conditions to be annunciated, including:
o Field overvoltage
o Field overcurrent
o Generator undervoltage
o Generator overvoltage
o Volts per hertz or underfrequency limit
o Overexcitation limit
o Underexcitation limit
o FCR mode
o Loss of sensing (LOS) voltage
o Active setpoint at low limit
o Active setpoint at high limit
o Generator frequency below 10 hertz
o Open exciter diode
o Shorted exciter diode
o Loss of field
o Stator current limit
NOTE
If the contacts of a programmable output relay are configured as normally closed,
the normally closed contact state is maintained only while the DECS-200 has
control power applied. When power is removed from the DECS-200, these
contacts will open.
Watchdog Output
The Watchdog (WTCHD) output indicates a software execution problem within the DECS-200. The
contact closes under the following circumstances:
• No control power is applied to the DECS-200
• After application of power for approximately eight seconds
• Software in the DECS-200 stops executing normally
On/Off Output
The On/Off (ON/OF) output indicates the enabled/disabled status of the DECS-200. the On/Off output
closes when the DECS-200 is enabled and opens when the DECS-200 is disabled.
Communication
The RS-232 port (Com 0), located on the front panel, is dedicated for communication with a PC running
BESTCOMS software.
The RS-232 port (Com 1), located on the right side of the unit, is dedicated for communication with a
second DECS-200. This port provides tracking between units in a redundant DECS-200 system.
The RS-485 Port (Com 2), located on the left side of the unit, is dedicated for communication in remote
terminal unit (RTU) mode using the Modbus¥ protocol.
NOTE
Changing the baud rate or data format while that interface is in use will result in a
loss of data and probably a complete loss of communication.
All three ports have a default baud rate of 9600. However, the baud rate for each port can be set
independently. Available baud rates are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200. Ports Com ) and Com 1 use
a data format of 8N1 which stands for 8 data bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit. Port Com 2 has a default data
format of 8N2 but the parity and number of stop bits are programmable. The choices for parity include:
None, Odd, and Even. The number of stop bits may be either 1 or 2.
Memory Circuits
There are three types of memory circuits: flash memory, random access memory (RAM) and electrically
erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM). Flash memory is nonvolatile and stores the
operating software. RAM is volatile and serves as temporary storage for data. EEPROM is nonvolatile
and stores the settings and configuration.
Protection Functions
Eight protection functions are available in the DECS-200:
• Field overvoltage • Loss of sensing
• Field overcurrent • Generator frequency below 10 hertz
• Generator undervoltage • Loss of field
• Generator overvoltage • Exciter diode monitor
Each protection function can be indicated locally on the front panel display, remotely through
communication port Com 0 or Com 2, and any of the three programmable output relays.
Field Overvoltage
When the field voltage increases above the Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting for the duration of the
Field Overvoltage Delay setting, a field overvoltage condition is annunciated. A field overvoltage condition
is annunciated on the front panel metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay
for external annunciation. The Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting is adjustable from 1 to 325 Vdc in 1
Vdc increments. The Exciter Field Overvoltage Delay setting is adjustable from 0.2 to 30.0 seconds in 0.1
second increments. If the field overvoltage timer is timing down and the field voltage drops below the
Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting, the field overvoltage timer is reset. The field overvoltage function
may be disabled without changing the level or time delay settings.
Field Overcurrent
When the field current increases above the Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting for the duration of the
Exciter Field Overcurrent Delay setting, a field overcurrent condition is annunciated. Field overcurrent is
annunciated on the front panel metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for
external annunciation. The Exciter Field Overcurrent Level and Exciter Field Overcurrent Delay settings
are related by an inverse function. This means that the higher the field current goes above the threshold,
the shorter the time to an annunciation. The Exciter Field Overcurrent Delay setting is a linear multiplier
for the time to an annunciation. The Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting is adjustable from 0.1 to 20
Adc in 0.1 Adc increments. The Exciter Field Overcurrent Delay setting is adjustable from 0.1 to 20.0 in
increments of 0.1. The field overcurrent protection function may be disabled without changing the level or
time delay settings. Figure 3-2 shows a set of typical field overcurrent timing curves. Notice that field
current levels below 103% of the field overcurrent setpoint value are unpredictable and may not cause an
annunciation. Also, field current levels greater than 250% (field current multiple of 2.5 in Figure 3-2) of the
setpoint value cause an annunciation in the same amount of time as the 250% level.
Figure 3-2. Field Overcurrent Timing Curves

Generator Overvoltage
When the generator voltage increases above the Generator Overvoltage Level setting for the duration of
the Generator Overvoltage Delay setting, a generator overvoltage condition is annunciated. A generator
overvoltage condition is annunciated on the front panel metering screen and may be assigned to a
programmable output relay for external annunciation. The Generator Overvoltage Level setting is
adjustable from 0 to 30,000 Vac in 1 Vac increments. The Generator Overvoltage Delay setting is
adjustable from 0.1 to 60.0 seconds in 0.1 second increments. If the generator voltage drops below the
Generator Overvoltage Level setting while the delay timer is timing down, the delay timer is reset.
Generator overvoltage protection may be disabled without changing the level or time delay settings.
Loss of Sensing
A loss of sensing voltage is annunciated when either of two conditions exist:
• All three phases of generator voltage decrease below the Loss of Sensing Voltage–Balanced Level
setting for the duration of the Loss of Sensing Voltage Time Delay setting.
• Any individual phase of generator sensing voltage differs by more than the Loss of Sensing Voltage–
Unbalanced Level setting for the duration of the Loss of Sensing Voltage Time Delay setting.
A loss of sensing voltage is annunciated on the front panel Metering screen and may be assigned to a
programmable output relay for external annunciation. The Balanced and Unbalanced Level settings are
adjustable from 0 to 100% in 0.1% increments. The Time Delay setting is adjustable from 0 to 30.0
seconds in 0.1 second increments.
Below 10 Hertz
When the generator frequency decreases below 10 hertz, the condition is annunciated on the front panel
display as SYSTEM BELOW 10 Hz. The programmable output relays may be configured to initiate
additional annunciations or actions. A system below 10 hertz annunciation is reset automatically when the
generator frequency increases above 10 hertz.
Loss of Field
When the reactive power absorbed by the generator exceeds the Loss of Field Level setting for the
duration of the Loss of Field Delay setting, a loss of field condition is annunciated. A loss of field is
annunciated on the front panel metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for
external annunciation. The Loss of Field Level setting is adjustable from 0 to 3,000 Mvar in 1 kvar
increments. The Loss of Field Delay setting is adjustable from 0 to 9.9 seconds in 0.1 second increments.
If the absorbed reactive power decreases below the Loss of Field Level setting while the delay timer is
timing down, the delay timer is reset. Loss of field protection can be disabled without changing the level or
time delay settings.
Exciter Diode Monitor (EDM)
The DECS-200 monitors the output of the brushless exciter power semiconductors through the exciter
field current and protects against both open and shorted diodes in the exciter bridge. When implementing
the EDM, it is imperative that the user know and specify the number of poles for the exciter armature and
the number of poles for the generator rotor.
NOTE
If the number of poles for the exciter armature and the generator rotor is
unknown, the EDM function will still operate. However, only a shorted diode can
be detected. If the number of poles is not known, it is best to select all
parameters for the exciter open diode to off. In this situation, the generator and
exciter pole parameters must be set at zero to prevent false tripping.
The EDM function estimates the fundamental harmonic of the exciter field current using discrete Fourier
transforms (DFTs). The harmonic, expressed as a percentage of the field current, is then compared to the
trip levels for open diode detection (OD ripple) and shorted diode detection (SD ripple). If the percentage
of field current exceeds the OD Level or SD Level setting, then the appropriate delay will begin. After the
programmable delay for the OD or SD event expires, and if the percentage of field current still exceeds
the OD Level or SD Level setting, the event is annunciated. An exciter diode failure is annunciated on the
front panel HMI and can be assigned to a programmable output relay for external annunciation. EDM

inhibit parameters prevent nuisance annunciations due to low excitation current or out-of-range generator
frequency. The following parameters are required for complete operation of the EDM function.
• Pole ratio • Open exciter diode delay
• Trip level of EDM OD ripple • Shorted exciter diode delay
• Trip level of EDM SD ripple • EDM inhibit level
Exciter Diode Monitor Settings
It is especially difficult to detect open diode conditions when the number of generator and exciter poles is
unknown. For this reason, the ratio of the number of poles for the brushless exciter armature to the
generator rotor be entered to ensure proper operation for both open and shorted diode protection.
Setting the Trip Level
To set the trip level of the EDM OD (open diode) ripple and EDM SD (shorted diode) ripple parameters,
the maximum ripple current on the field must be known. This can be accomplished by running the
generator unloaded and at rated speed. Vary the generator voltage from minimum to maximum voltage
while monitoring the EDM OD and EDM SD % ripple on the DECS-200 HMI metering screen. Record the
highest value for each. See Section 2, Human-Machine Interface for more details on displaying metering
quantities.
With Number of Generator Poles Known
Multiply the highest EDM OD value, obtained under Setting the Trip Level , by 3. The result is the Exciter
Open Diode % Ripple Level (EDM OD % Ripple). The multiplier can be varied between 2 and 5 to
increase or decrease the trip margin. However, reducing the multiplier could result in nuisance EDM OD
indications. A time delay is also adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds.
Multiply the highest EDM SD value, obtained under Setting the Trip Level by 50. The result is the Exciter
Shorted Diode % Ripple Level (EDM SD % Ripple). The multiplier can be varied between 40 and 70 to
increase or decrease the trip margin. However, reducing the multiplier could result in nuisance EDM SD
indications. A time delay is also adjustable from 5 to 30 seconds.
The DECS-200 has fixed EDM inhibit levels to prevent nuisance EDM indications while the generator
sensing voltage is less than 45 Hz, greater than 70 Hz, or when the field current is less than 1 Adc.
Although the user can adjust the field current inhibit level from 0 to 100%, the fixed EDM inhibit levels
take priority. Pole ratios must be in the range of 1 to 10 with 0 used if the ratio is unknown.
With Number of Generator Poles Unknown
The DECS-200 can detect shorted diode conditions when the number of generator poles are not known.
To provide this protection, disable EDM OD protection and set the pole ratio to zero. Enable EDM SD
protection. Multiply the maximum EDM SD % ripple value, obtained under Setting the Trip Level, by 30.
The multiplier can be varied between 20 and 40 to increase or decrease the trip margin. Reducing the
multiplier could result in nuisance EDM SD indication.
Test the EDM Settings
Start the generator from a dead stop condition and increase its speed and voltage to the rated value.
Load the machine to its rating and confirm no EDM alarm indications occur. All of the EDM setup
guidelines presented here assume the exciter diodes were not opened or shorted at the time of setup and
testing.
SOFT START
DECS-200 soft start capability provides for an orderly buildup of terminal voltage from residual to the
voltage setpoint in the desired time with minimal overshoot. When the system is in startup, the voltage
reference is adjusted by the amount calculated based on two parameters. These parameters are level
and time. Soft start bias level is adjustable from 0 to 90 percent of the active mode setpoint in increments
of 1 percent with a default setting of 5 percent. Soft start time is adjustable from 1 to 7,200 seconds in
increments of 1 second with a default setting of 5 seconds. Figure 3-3 illustrates a plot of the voltage
reference showing soft-start bias at 30%, soft-start time at 8 seconds and a voltage setpoint of 100%. Soft
start level is the same parameter as soft-start bias when accessed on the Startup tab of the BESTCOMS
System Settings screen.

Figure 3-3. Soft Start Voltage Reference
LIMITER FUNCTIONS
DECS-200 limiter functions include an underfrequency limiter, V/Hz ratio limiter, overexcitation limiter,
underexcitation limiter, and a stator current limiter.
Underfrequency Limiter
When the generator frequency drops below the Corner Frequency
corner frequency for the underfrequency slope
(Figure 3-4), the voltage setpoint is automatically 100 %
adjusted by the DECS-200 so that generator P0004-34.vsd
voltage will follow the underfrequency slope and 12-03-01
an underfrequency annunciation occurs. The

GENERATOR VOLTS
underfrequency slope can be tuned to have zero

to three times the volts/hertz slope in 0.01
increments. The corner frequency can be set
across a range of 45 to 65 hertz in 0.1 hertz
increments. This adjustability enables the DECS-
200 to precisely match the operating
characteristics of the prime mover and the loads
being applied to the generator. The generator
underfrequency function may be effectively
disabled by setting the slope to zero. However, if
0%
the system frequency is below the corner
10 Hz Nominal
frequency, underfrequency will be annunciated
even if the slope is set at zero. GENERATOR FREQUENCY
Figure 3-4. Typical Underfrequency
Compensation Curve
When the underfrequency function is active, an
underfrequency annunciation occurs. Underfre-
110 %
quency is annunciated on the front panel Metering
screen and may be assigned to a programmable
output relay for external annunciation. 100 %
P0004-33.vsd
12-03-01
GENERATOR VOLTS
Volts per Hertz Ratio Limiter
The volts per hertz ratio limiter prevents the
tio
regulation setpoint from exceeding the volts per
Ra
hertz ratio that is prescribed by the slope setting
tz
er
of the DECS-200 as stated in the previous
/H
lts
paragraphs. This feature is also useful for other
Vo
potentially damaging system conditions such as a
change in system voltage and reduced frequency
situations that could exceed the systems volts per
hertz ratio limit. Figure 3-5 illustrates a typical 1.10 0%
PU volts per hertz limiter curve. 0 Hz Nominal
GENERATOR FREQUENCY
Overexcitation Limiter (OEL)
Figure 3-5. Typical 1.10 PU V/Hz Limiter Curve
Overexcitation limiting operates in all modes
except FCR mode. The DECS-200 senses the
FIELD CURRENT
field current output and limits the field current to
prevent field overheating. In FCR mode, the
DECS-200 announces that all conditions for OEL High
are fulfilled. The DECS-200 provides two types of Current
High Low Level
overexcitation limiting: Summing Point and CONTINUOUS 0-30Adc
Current Current
Takeover. Time Level
0-10sec 0-15Adc
Summing Point OEL
D2851-18.vsd
Two OEL current levels are defined for off-line TIME IN SECONDS 04-03-01
operation: high and low (see Figure 3-6). The

generator can operate continuously at the low Figure 3-6. Off-Line Overexcitation Limiting
OEL current level and for a programmed time at
the high OEL current level.
Three OEL current levels are defined for on-line operation: high, medium, and low (see Figure 3-7). The
high and medium current levels can be maintained only for a user-defined amount of time. The generator
can operate continuously at the low OEL current level.
FIELD CURRENT
High
Current
Medium Level
High Current 0.0 - 30Adc
Medium Level
Current Current Low
Time CONTINUOUS 0.0 - 20 Adc
Time Current
0-10sec 0-120sec Level
0.0 - 15 Adc
D2851-17.vsd
TIME IN SECONDS 04-03-01
Figure 3-7. On-Line Overexcitation Limiting

The 52L/M (unit/parallel) contact input status determines which limiter is active (on-line or off-line). When
the 52L/M input is closed, the off-line limiter is active. When the 52L/M input is open, the on-Line limiter
setting is active.

In addition to the three current levels, the DECS-200 also uses embedded timers to prevent excessive
heating of the exciter field that may be a result of repetitive overexcitation conditions. A duration timer
monitors the accumulated time actually spent in an overexcitation condition and a reset timer is used to
count backward from either the High OEL Current Time setting or the sum of the high plus the Medium
OEL Current Time setting depending on the duration timer value. The reset timer countdown begins when
the excitation current falls below the low OEL current limit level. In the event a subsequent overexcitation
condition occurs before the reset timer reaches zero, the OEL limiter will resume from its state prior to the
excitation current falling below the low OEL current limit level. A full OEL cycle cannot occur until the reset
timer has counted down to zero after a previous OEL condition.
When the system is limiting overexcitation, an OEL condition is annunciated on the front panel Metering
screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for external annunciation.
Takeover OEL
When takeover-style overexcitation limiting is used, the level of field current at which limiting occurs is
determined by an inverse time characteristic. This inverse time characteristic is similar to that shown in
Figure 3-8. Two current levels and a time dial setting are defined for the takeover OEL. Separate curves
may be selected for on-line operation. If the system enters an overexcitation condition, the field current is
limited and forced to follow the selected curve.
Figure 3-8. Inverse Time Characteristic for Takeover-Style OEL
On-Line/Off-Line OEL Options

Selection of on-line or off-line OEL levels/curves is determined by an OEL option selection. The following
options are available.
Option 1 (default). When option 1 is selected, on-line overexcitation limiter settings are active when either
the 52J/K contact input or 52L/M contact input are open. Off-line OEL settings are active when both the
52J/K contact input and 52L/M contact input are closed. The 52J/K contact input can be used to switch
between on-line OEL and off-line OEL when the 52L/M contact input is jumpered. If var/power factor
correction is disabled, Droop mode will be active when the 52J/K contact input is opened and AVR mode
will be active when the 52J/K contact input is closed.
Option 2. Option 2 allows the 52J/K contact input to define when the off-line and on-line limiters are
active. When option 2 is selected, on-line overexcitation limiter settings are active when the 52J/K contact
input is open. Off-line OEL settings are active when the 52J/K contact input is closed. Option 2 is
intended for cross-compound generator applications where both machines are paralleled at low rpm.
Therefore, Droop mode needs to be active (52L/M contact input opened) as the speed of the machines
are increased. However, off-line OEL settings for both machines need to be active.
Option 3. When option 3 is selected, on-line overexcitation limiting settings are active at all times. Option
3 allows the DECS-200 to operate in AVR mode (stand-alone application) without restriction from the off-
line OEL settings. In this case, the on-line OEL settings are active to limit excessive excitation current.
This option also eliminates the need for the DECS-200 to operate in Droop mode when applied in a single
unit application. Therefore, voltage should not droop as reactive load increases.

Underexcitation Limiter
Underexcitation limiting (UEL) operates in all modes except FCR mode. UEL senses the leading var
output of the generator and limits any further decrease in excitation to prevent loss of synchronization and
end-iron heating during parallel operation. In FCR mode, the DECS-200 announces that all conditions for
UEL are fulfilled. The reactive power level is selected at zero active power and the UEL limiting curve is
calculated based on this value and the generator voltage and current rating. Typical leading kvar curves
and a user-selected, five-point curve are shown in 3-9.
Real Power Generate (W) x 1000

0.0 7.5k 15.0k 22.5k 30.0k 37.5k 45.0k
0.0
Reactive Power Absorb (var) x 1000
7.5k
15.0k
22.5k
30.0k
37.5k
D2851-25
06-28-05
45.0k
Figure 3-9. Custom Five-Point Curve
When the system is limiting underexcitation, a UEL annunciation occurs. Underexcitation is annunciated
on the front panel Metering screen and may be assigned to a programmable output relay for external
annunciation.
Stator Current Limiting

The stator current limiter (SCL) senses the level of stator current and limits it to prevent stator
overheating. The SCL operates in all modes except FCR. In FCR mode, the DECS-200 only announces
that a stator overcurrent condition exists; it does not provide current limiting.
Two SCL current levels are provided: high and low (see Figure 3-10). The generator can operate
continuously at the low SCL level and for a programmed time at the high SCL level.
STATOR CURRENT
High
Current
High Low Level
Continuous Current 0-66,000 Aac
Current
Time Level
0-60 s 0-66,000 Aac
P0013-19
TIME IN SECONDS 11-10-04
Figure 3-10. Stator Current Limiting

DROOP AND LINE-DROP COMPENSATION
Droop and line-drop compensation are accomplished through the load compensation equation:
VC1 = VT + (RC + jX C )I T
Where: VC1 is the compensated output voltage

VT is the measured terminal-voltage vector
(Rc + jX C ) are the compensation impedance values
I T is the measured terminal-current vector
When the droop percentage is a positive quantity, reactive droop compensation is performed. Droop is
the product of the output voltage and the kvar that the generator is exporting. This is equivalent to the
above compensation equation with RC equal to zero and neglecting the real part of the vector, I T .
When the droop percentage is a negative quantity, line-drop compensation (LDC) is preformed. LDC
takes into account the real part of the vector, I T . Since LDC is typically used to compensate for reactive
impedance losses in transformers, RC is assumed to be zero. For LDC, the above equation becomes:
VC1 = VT + ( jX C )I T
DATA LOGGING AND REPORTING

DECS-200 data logging and reporting features include a sequence of events recorder that records up to
eight oscillography records.
Sequence of Events Reporting

A sequence of events recorder monitors the internal and external status of the DECS-200. Events are
scanned at 50 millisecond intervals with 127 events stored per record. All changes of state that occur
during each scan are time tagged. Sequence of events reports are available through BESTCOMS. All
monitored events are listed below.
System Contact Input State Changes
• Alarm reset • Start
• AVR mode enable • Stop
• FCR mode enable • Unit/Parallel (52 L/M)∗
• Pre-Position • VAR/PF enable (52 J/K)∗
• Secondary enable
∗ The 52 contacts are reported as disabled when the input is jumpered to common and reported as
enabled when the input is not jumpered. All other contacts are reported as enabled when the inputs
are jumpered to common.
System Output State Changes
• On/Off relay output • Relay 3 output
• Relay 1 output • Watchdog relay output
• Relay 2 output
System Alarm State Changes
• Exciter diode open • Loss of field
• Exciter diode shorted • Lost voltage sensing
• Field overcurrent • Overexcitation limit
• Field overvoltage • Stator current limit
• Generator overvoltage • Underexcitation limit
• Generator undervoltage • Underfrequency
Changes in State of System Status
• Auto tracking mode • Soft-start mode
• Control mode • Stop/Start
• Limiter mode • Underfrequency mode
• Load compensation mode • Voltage matching mode
• Operating mode
Oscillography
The data recording function of the DECS-200 can record up to eight oscillography records. Oscillography
records recorded by the DECS-200 use the IEEE Standard Common Format for Transient Data
Exchange (COMTRADE). Each record is time and date stamped. After eight records have been recorded,
the DECS-200 begins recording the next record over the oldest record. Because all oscillography records
are stored in volatile memory, the records will be lost if power is lost.
A record consists of six user selectable variables with 600 data points recorded for each variable. The
sample rate or time between data point samples is user selectable from 4 milliseconds to 10 seconds.
Therefore, the recording duration for a variable can range from 2.4 seconds to 6,000 seconds.
Data points may be selected for pre-trigger operation in order to capture events prior to a fault. Up to 599
pre-trigger data points may be selected. Data points that are not designated for pre-trigger recording are
assigned to the post-trigger portion of the fault record. This feature combined with the adjustable sample
rate allows for flexible data sampling around the fault.
The DECS-200 monitors six user-selectable internal variables. The following internal variables may be
selected:
Internal Variables
• Auto tracking output (for future use)
• Auxiliary input voltage∗
• AVR Error Signal
• Bus frequency
• Bus voltage
• Control output
• Crosscurrent input∗
• Exciter field current Ifd
• Exciter field voltage Vfd
• Generator average L-L voltage
• Generator frequency
• Generator Ib in amps
• Generator kVA
• Generator kvar
• Generator kW
• Generator power factor
• Generator Vab
• Generator Vbc
• Generator Vca
• Generator V-I phase angle∗
• Internal PID Integrator State
∗ Typically, these are used when commissioning or troubleshooting.
Data recording may be triggered manually using BESTCOMS, logic triggers, or level triggers.
Logic triggers allow data recording to occur as a result of an internal or external status change of the
DECS-200.
Level triggering allows the user to select triggering of a data record based on the value of one of the
internal variables. The value can be a minimum or maximum value and can be specified to trigger a
record when the monitored variable crosses a minimum threshold from above or a maximum threshold
from below. A minimum and maximum threshold may also be selected for the monitored variable causing
the monitored value to trigger a record when it goes above its maximum or falls below its minimum.
Figure 3-11 shows an example of a data record as it would look when viewed with BESTwave software.
The example illustrates a voltage step change while monitoring average voltage, field voltage, and field
current over a time period of 2.75 seconds.
For more information about selecting triggering types or levels, selecting internal variables for monitoring
or viewing oscillography records, see Section 5, BESTCOMS Software.

Figure 3-11. Data Record Example

SECTION 4 • INSTALLATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 4 • INSTALLATION................................................................................................................... 4-1
GENERAL .............................................................................................................................................. 4-1
PRODUCT REGISTRATION.................................................................................................................. 4-1
MOUNTING ............................................................................................................................................ 4-1
CONNECTIONS ..................................................................................................................................... 4-6
Right-Hand Panel Connections .......................................................................................................... 4-6
Front Panel Connections .................................................................................................................... 4-7
Left-Hand Panel Connections............................................................................................................. 4-7
Control Power ................................................................................................................................. 4-7
Operating Power ............................................................................................................................. 4-7
Chassis Ground .............................................................................................................................. 4-8
Generator and Bus Voltage Sensing .............................................................................................. 4-8
Generator Current Sensing ............................................................................................................. 4-8
Accessory Input............................................................................................................................... 4-9
Contact Inputs ................................................................................................................................. 4-9
Output Contacts ............................................................................................................................ 4-10
Field Output................................................................................................................................... 4-10
Com 2 Connections....................................................................................................................... 4-10
Figures
Figure 4-1. Overall Dimensions .................................................................................................................4-2
Figure 4-2. Panel Drilling Diagram, Projection Mount ...............................................................................4-3
Figure 4-3. Escutcheon Plate Dimensions.................................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-4. Panel Cutting and Drilling Dimensions, Panel Mount..............................................................4-5
Figure 4-5. DECS-200 to DECS-200 Communication Connections..........................................................4-6
Figure 4-6. Typical Cross-Current Compensation Connections ................................................................4-9
Figure 4-7. RS-485 DECS-B-37 to DECS-200 ........................................................................................4-11
Tables
Table 4-1. Com 1 Pin Functions ................................................................................................................4-6
Table 4-2. Left-Hand Panel Terminal Specifications .................................................................................4-7
Table 4-3. Control Power Terminals ..........................................................................................................4-7
Table 4-4. Operating Power Terminals ......................................................................................................4-8
Table 4-5. Generator and Bus Voltage Sensing Terminals .......................................................................4-8
Table 4-6. Generator Current Sensing Terminals......................................................................................4-8
Table 4-7. Accessory Input Terminals .......................................................................................................4-9
Table 4-8. Contact Input Terminals ...........................................................................................................4-9
Table 4-9. Output Contact Terminals.......................................................................................................4-10
Table 4-10. Field Output Terminals .........................................................................................................4-10
Table 4-11. Com 2 Terminals ..................................................................................................................4-10
DECS-200 Installation i
ii Installation DECS-200
SECTION 4 • INSTALLATION
GENERAL
DECS-200 Digital Excitation Control Systems are delivered in sturdy cartons to prevent shipping damage.
Upon receipt of a system, check the part number against the requisition and packaging list for agreement.
Inspect for damage, and if there is evidence of such immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify the
Basler Electric Regional Sales Office, your sales representative or a sales representative at Basler
Electric, Highland, Illinois.
If the unit is not installed immediately, store it in the original shipping package in a moisture- and dust-free
environment.
PRODUCT REGISTRATION
Registering with Basler Electric enables you to receive important information updates on your product
plus new product announcements. Register your product by directing your web browser to
http://www.basler.com/Register.
MOUNTING
The orientation of the DECS-200 heat sink requires vertical mounting for maximum cooling. Any other
mounting angle will reduce the DECS-200’s heat dissipation capability and possibly lead to premature
failure of critical components. The DECS-200 may be mounted anywhere that the ambient temperature
does not exceed the environmental conditions listed in Section 1, General Information, Specifications.
Overall DECS-200 dimensions are shown in Figure 4-1.
Two DECS-200 mounting configurations are possible: projection mounting and panel mounting. The
panel drilling diagram for projection mounting of a DECS-200 is shown in Figure 4-2. Panel mounting of a
DECS-200 is possible with the optional escutcheon plate (part number 9360107100). Escutcheon plate
dimensions are shown in Figure 4-3. The panel cutting and drilling diagram for the escutcheon plate is
illustrated in Figure 4-4.
CAUTION
The hardware provided with the escutcheon plate should be used to attach the
plate to the DECS-200. If other screws are used, ensure that the screw length
does not exceed 5/16” (0.3125”).
DECS-200 Installation 4-1

Figure 4-1. Overall Dimensions
4-2 Installation DECS-200

Figure 4-2. Panel Drilling Diagram, Projection Mount

Figure 4-3. Escutcheon Plate Dimensions

Figure 4-4. Panel Cutting and Drilling Dimensions, Panel Mount
CONNECTIONS
DECS-200 connections are dependent on the application and excitation scheme used. Observe the
following guidelines when making DECS-200 connections:
• A given application may not require the use of all DECS-200 inputs and outputs.
• Incorrect wiring may result in damage to the unit.
• Applying incorrect control power, operating power, or sensing values may damage the unit. Compare
the unit style number with the style chart (Figure 1-2) before applying control power.
NOTE
The DECS-200 must be hard-wired to earth ground with no smaller than 12 AWG
copper wire attached to ground terminal C1. When the DECS-200 is configured
in a system with other devices, a separate lead should be used to connect each
device to the ground bus.
Terminations for DECS-200 connections are located on the right-hand panel, the front panel, and the left-
hand panel.
Right-Hand Panel Connections

Right-hand panel terminations consist of a nine-pin, female, D-type connector (Com 1) that is used for
communication with a second DECS-200 unit when operating in a redundant system. A communication
cable, part number 9310300032, is available for interconnecting two DECS-200 units. Table 4-1 lists the
Com 1 pin numbers and functions. Figure 4-5 illustrates the communication connections between DECS-
200 units.
Table 4-1. Com 1 Pin Functions
Pin Name Description Function
1 Not used N/A
2 XMIT Transmit Sends serial data from DECS-200
3 RCV Receive Receives serial data from DECS-200
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready Receives signal indicating that the
sending unit is operational
5 GND Ground Provides the signal ground
6 DSR Data Set Ready Sends a signal indicating that the
DECS-200N is operational
7, 8, Not used N/A
9
TO DECS-200 TO DECS-200
DB-9 FEMALE DB-9 FEMALE
DB-9 MALE DB-9 MALE
1 NO CONNECTION 1
XMIT 2 2 XMIT
RCV 3 3 RCV
DTR 4 4 DTR
GND 5 5 GND
DSR 6 6 DSR
7 NO CONNECTION 7
8 8 P0007-07
NO CONNECTION 03-13-01
9 NO CONNECTION 9
Figure 4-5. DECS-200 to DECS-200 Communication Connections

Front Panel Connections
Front panel terminations consist of a nine-pin, female, D-type connector (Com 0) that is intended for
short-term, RS-232 serial communication with a PC operating BESTCOMS software. Refer to Section 5,
BESTCOMS Software for information about using BESTCOMS to communicate with the DECS-200.
Left-Hand Panel Connections

Left-hand panel terminations consist of screw compression terminals. These terminals are illustrated in
Figure 4-6. Table 4-2 lists the wire size capacity and maximum screw torque for each terminal on the left-
hand panel.
Table 4-2. Left-Hand Panel Terminal Specifications

Terminals Wire Size Capacity Maximum Screw Torque
A1 –A45 14 AWG 0.4 N•m (3.5 in-lb)
B7 –B10
B1 –B6 10 AWG 0.5 N•m (4.4 in-lb)
C1 –C6
In the following paragraphs, DECS-200 terminal functions are described and the terminal assignments for
each function are listed.
Control Power
DECS-200 units have two sets of power terminals. One set receives dc control power and the other set
receives ac control power.
A DECS-200 with a style number of XL accepts nominal dc control power of 24 or 48 Vdc. The ac control
power input of a style XL DECS-200 is not used.
A DECS-200 with a style number of XC accepts nominal dc control power of 125 Vdc and nominal ac
control power of 120 Vac. One source (either dc or ac) is sufficient for operation, but two sources can be
used to provide redundancy. The dc input has internal protection against reversed polarity connections.
When dual control power sources are used, an isolation transformer (part number BE31449001) is
required for the ac input. Control power terminal functions are listed in Table 4-3.
Table 4-3. Control Power Terminals
Terminal Description
B7 (BAT+) Positive side of dc input
B8 (BAT–) Negative side of dc input
B9 (L) Line side of ac input
B10 (N) Return or neutral side of ac input
Operating Power
Operating power for the pulse-width modulated (PWM) excitation output is usually derived from the
generator output. This input can also be developed by any suitable source that delivers voltage within the
limits specified in Section 1, General Information, Specifications.
Operating power may be either three-phase or single-phase. For single phase connections, any terminal
combination can be used.
The operating power applied must be of sufficient magnitude to support the required level of excitation
voltage. For 32 Vdc field voltage, the operating power voltage should be in the range of 56 to 70 Vac (60
Vac nominal). For 63 Vdc field voltage, the operating power voltage should be in the range of 100 to 139
Vac (120 Vac nominal). For 125 Vdc field voltage, the operating power voltage should be in the range of
190 to 277 Vac (240 Vac nominal). The operating power frequency can be within the range of 50 to 500
hertz.

Table 4-4. Operating Power Terminals
C2 (A) A-phase operating power input
C3 (B) B-phase operating power input
C4 (C) C-phase operating power input
Chassis Ground
Terminal C1 (GND) serves as the DECS-200 chassis ground connection.
Generator and Bus Voltage Sensing
The DECS-200 accommodates either three-phase or single-phase generator sensing voltage with four
automatically selected ranges: 120, 240, 400, or 600 Vac for 60 hertz systems or 100, 200, 400, or 500
Vac for 50 hertz systems. When single-phase generator sensing voltage is used, use terminals A1 and A3
for the sensing connections.
A single bus sensing voltage input connects from phase A to phase C. The bus voltage sensing input has
four automatically selected ranges which are identical to the generator sensing voltage ranges.
Generator and bus voltage sensing terminals are listed in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5. Generator and Bus Voltage Sensing Terminals
A1 (E1) A-phase generator sensing voltage input
A2 (E2) B-phase generator sensing voltage input
A3 (E3) C-phase generator sensing voltage input
A4 (B1) A-phase bus sensing voltage input
A5 (B3) C-phase bus sensing voltage input
Generator Current Sensing

A single current sensing input connects to a CT monitoring generator current on phase B. Two terminals
are provided to accommodate 1 Aac or 5 Aac CTs.
An input is also provided for sensing the current in a cross-current (reactive differential) compensation
loop. Two or more paralleled generators can operate in cross-current compensation mode. Figure 4-6
illustrates a typical connection diagram for two paralleled generators using the 5 Aac sensing range on
the DECS-200 cross-current input. The 1 Ω resistor is a typical value that can be used to set the burden.
(Ensure that the resistor power rating is adequate for the installation.) Like the generator current sensing
input, the cross-current input has two terminals to accommodate 1 Aac or 5 Aac CTs.
Generator current sensing terminals are listed in Table 4-6.
Table 4-6. Generator Current Sensing Terminals
B1 B-phase generator current input for 1 Aac sensing
(CTB 1 AMP)
B2 B-phase generator current input for 1 Aac sensing
(CTB 5 AMP)
B3 B-phase generator sensing current common terminal
(CTB COM)
B4 Cross-current input for 1 Aac sensing
(CT CC 1A)
B5 Cross-current input for 5 Aac sensing
(CT CC 5A)
B6 Cross-current common terminal
(CT CC COM)

CT
Phase B
GEN 1
1.0
CT CC 5A
CT CC COM
DECS-200
CCC LOAD
DECS-200 ENABLE
1.0 CONTACT
CT CC 5A
CT CC COM
P0005-02
05-28-04
GEN 2 Phase B
CT
Figure 4-6. Typical Cross-Current Compensation Connections
Accessory Input
DECS-200 units accept analog accessory signals from other controllers (e.g., power system stabilizers)
for remote control of the setpoint. Two types of accessory inputs are provided: voltage and current. Only
one accessory input (voltage or current) may be used at one time. The voltage input accepts a signal over
the range of –10 Vdc to +10 Vdc. The current input accepts a signal over the range of 4 mAdc to 20
mAdc. Shielded cable is recommended for the accessory signal. Terminal A8 is provided for the shield
connection. Accessory input terminal assignments are listed in Table 4-7.
Table 4-7. Accessory Input Terminals
A6 (I+) Positive side of current accessory input
A7 (I–) Negative side of current accessory input
A8 (GND) Shield connection for accessory input
A9 (V+) Positive side of voltage accessory input
A10 (V–) Negative side of voltage accessory input
Contact Inputs
The DECS-200 has 11 fixed-function contact inputs. Each contact input supplies an interrogation voltage
of 12 Vdc and accepts dry switch/relay contacts or open-collector PLC outputs. Open-collector devices
connected to the contact inputs must be compatible with the 12 Vdc interrogation voltage, be capable of
conducting a minimum of 5 mAdc, and have off-state leakage current no greater than 100 µAdc. Table 4-
8 lists the contact input terminals.
Table 4-8. Contact Input Terminals
Function Terminal Common Terminal Input Type
Start A21 (START) A22 (COM) Momentary
Stop A23 (STOP) A24 (COM Momentary
AVR Mode Enable A25 (AUTO) A26 (COM) Momentary

Function Terminal Common Terminal Input Type
FCR Mode Enable A27 (FCR) A28 (COM) Momentary
Raise Command A29 (RAISE) A30 (COM) Momentary
Lower Command A31 (LOWER) A32 (COM) Momentary
Pre-Position A33 (PRE-P) A34 (COM) Continuous
Unit/Parallel A35 (52L/M) A36 (COM) Continuous
Var/PF Enable A37 (52J/K) A38 (COM) Continuous
Secondary Enable A39 (SECEN) A40 (COM) Continuous
Alarm Reset A41 (ALRST) A42 (COM) Momentary
Output Contacts
The DECS-200 has two fixed-function contact outputs and three user-programmable contact outputs. All
output contacts are normally open (NO) except for the Watchdog output which is normally closed (NC).
Output contact terminal assignments are listed in Table 4-9. For additional information about relay output
specifications, refer to Section 1, General Information. For information about configuring the user-
programmable outputs, refer to Section 3, Functional Description.
Table 4-9. Output Contact Terminals

A11 (ON/OF) On/Off contact terminals
A12 (ON/OF)
A13 (WTCHD) Watchdog contact terminals (normally closed)
A14 (WTCHD)
A15 (RLY1) Programmable relay #1 terminals
A16 (RLY1)
A18 (RLY2)
A20 (RLY3)
Field Output
The DECS-200 output is capable of supplying 15 Adc of continuous excitation current to a field with no
less than 2.13 ohms of resistance (at 32 Vdc), 4.2 ohms of resistance (at 63 Vdc), or 8.3 ohms of
resistance (at 125 Vdc). Field output terminals are listed in Table 4-10.
Table 4-10. Field Output Terminals
C5 (F+) Field output positive terminal
C6 (F–) Field output negative terminal
Com 2 Connections
Communication port Com 2 is intended for Table 4-11. Com 2 Terminals
polled communication over a Modbus network. Terminal Description
Twisted-pair cable is recommended for Com 2
connections. Com 2 terminals are listed in Table A43 (A) RS-485 send/receive A terminal
4-11. Figure 4-7 illustrates the Com 2 A44 (B) RS-485 send/receive B terminal
connections used for multiple DECS-200 units A45 (C) RS-485 signal ground terminal
communicating over a Modbus network.

T0 RS-422/RS-485 To DECS-200
DB-37 Female Terminal Block
4
6
22 Rt A A43
DECS-200
24 B A44
Com 2
19 C A45
A A43
DECS-200
B A44
Com 2
C A45
4000'
MAX.
P0007-08
11-21-05
Rt A A43
DECS-200
B A44
Com 2
C A45
Rt = Optional terminating resistor (120 O typical)
Figure 4-7. RS-485 DB-37 to DECS-200


SECTION 5 • BESTCOMS SOFTWARE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5 • BESTCOMS SOFTWARE................................................................................................... 5-1
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................... 5-1
INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Operating Requirements..................................................................................................................... 5-1
Installing BESTCOMS ........................................................................................................................ 5-1
Connecting the DECS-200 and PC .................................................................................................... 5-1
STARTING BESTCOMS ........................................................................................................................ 5-1
Establishing Communication .............................................................................................................. 5-1
Configuring the Communication Ports................................................................................................ 5-2
Configuring the Real-Time Clock........................................................................................................ 5-2
Assigning Identification Labels ........................................................................................................... 5-3
Creating a Password .......................................................................................................................... 5-3
CHANGING SETTINGS ......................................................................................................................... 5-3
Sending Settings to the DECS-200 .................................................................................................... 5-3
Retrieving DECS-200 Settings ........................................................................................................... 5-3
Saving Settings in DECS-200 Memory............................................................................................... 5-3
SYSTEM SETTINGS.............................................................................................................................. 5-4
System Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 5-4
Setting Adjustments............................................................................................................................ 5-8
Control Gain...................................................................................................................................... 5-15
Analysis............................................................................................................................................. 5-17
Protection/Relay ............................................................................................................................... 5-21
Data Log ........................................................................................................................................... 5-25
Metering ............................................................................................................................................ 5-30
SAVING, PRINTING, AND OPENING FILES ...................................................................................... 5-32
Saving Files ...................................................................................................................................... 5-32
Printing Files ..................................................................................................................................... 5-33
Opening/Uploading Files .................................................................................................................. 5-33
PID WINDOW....................................................................................................................................... 5-33
PID Calculations Based On Input Values ......................................................................................... 5-34
Adding To PID List............................................................................................................................ 5-35
Removing A PID List Record ............................................................................................................ 5-35
Retrieving Existing Data From PID List ............................................................................................ 5-35
TERMINATING COMMUNICATION .................................................................................................... 5-35
Figures
Figure 5-1. BESTCOMS Title and Version ................................................................................................5-1
Figure 5-2. Comm Port Selection...............................................................................................................5-2
Figure 5-2. Communication Port Settings.................................................................................................. 5-2
Figure 5-3. Password Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 5-2
Figure 5-4. Set Real Time Clock Screen ................................................................................................... 5-2
Figure 5-5. Device ID Screen..................................................................................................................... 5-3
Figure 5-6. Change DECS Password Screen............................................................................................ 5-3
Figure 5-7. System Configuration Screen, System Options Tab............................................................... 5-4
Figure 5-8. System Configuration Screen, System Data Tab.................................................................... 5-5
Figure 5-9. System Configuration Screen, Rated Data Tab ...................................................................... 5-6
Figure 5-10. Pole Ratio Calculator............................................................................................................. 5-7
Figure 5-11. System Configuration Screen, Auxiliary Input Tab................................................................ 5-7
Figure 5-12. Setting Adjustments Screen, AVR/FCR Tab......................................................................... 5-8
Figure 5-13. Setting Adjustments Screen, var/PF Tab .............................................................................. 5-9
Figure 5-14. System Settings Screen, Startup Tab ................................................................................. 5-11
Figure 5-15. System Settings Screen, OEL Type Tab ............................................................................ 5-11
Figure 5-16. System Settings Screen, OEL (Summing) Tab................................................................... 5-12
Figure 5-17. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL (Takeover) Tab ............................................................. 5-13
Figure 5-18. Setting Adjustments Screen, UEL Tab................................................................................ 5-14
Figure 5-19. Setting Adjustments Screen, SCL Tab................................................................................ 5-15
DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software i
Figure 5-20. Control Gain Screen ............................................................................................................ 5-15
Figure 5-21. Analysis Screen, AVR Tab .................................................................................................. 5-18
Figure 5-22. Analysis Screen, FCR Tab .................................................................................................. 5-18
Figure 5-23. Analysis Screen, var Tab .................................................................................................... 5-19
Figure 5-24. Analysis Screen, PF Tab ..................................................................................................... 5-20
Figure 5-25. Protection Screen, Options Tab .......................................................................................... 5-22
Figure 5-26. Protection Screen, Settings Tab.......................................................................................... 5-22
Figure 5-27. Protection Screen, Relay #1, #2 Logic Tab......................................................................... 5-24
Figure 5-28. Protection Screen, Relay Setting Tab ................................................................................. 5-25
Figure 5-29. Data Log Screen, Log Setup/Sequence of Events Tab ...................................................... 5-25
Figure 5-30. Sequence of Event Reporting ............................................................................................. 5-26
Figure 5-31. Data Logging Screen........................................................................................................... 5-27
Figure 5-32. Data Log Screen, Logic Triggers Tab ................................................................................. 5-28
Figure 5-33. Data Log Screen, Level Triggers/Logged Parameters........................................................ 5-29
Figure 5-34. Metering Screen, Operation Tab ......................................................................................... 5-31
Figure 5-35. Metering Screen, Alarm/Status Tab .................................................................................... 5-32
Figure 5-36. PID Window......................................................................................................................... 5-34
Tables
Table 5-1. Predefined Stability Setting Groups........................................................................................5-16
Table 5-2. Data Log Report Parameter Triggers .....................................................................................5-30
Table 5-3. 52J/K and 52L/M Logic ...........................................................................................................5-31
ii BESTCOMS Software DECS-200

SECTION 5 • BESTCOMS SOFTWARE
INTRODUCTION
®
BESTCOMS is a Windows -based application that provides a user-friendly environment for programming
and customizing the DECS-200. In addition to screens for configuring DECS-200 settings, BESTCOMS
has metering screens for viewing machine and system parameters and control screens for remote control
of the excitation system. An integrated PID calculator simplifies the selection of stability settings.
INSTALLATION
BESTCOMS-DECS200 software contains a setup utility that installs the program on your PC. When it
installs the program, an uninstall icon is created that you may use to uninstall (remove) the program from
your PC. The minimum recommended operating requirements are listed in the following paragraph.
Operating Requirements
• IBM compatible PC, 486 DX2 or faster (100 MHz or higher speed microprocessor recommended),
with a minimum 20 megabytes of RAM
® ®
• Microsoft, Windows 95, 98, Me, 2000, XP or NT
• CD-ROM drive
• One available serial port
Installing BESTCOMS
1. Insert the DECS-200 CD-ROM into the PC CD-ROM drive.
2. When the DECS-200 Setup and Documentation CD Menu appears, click the Install button for
BESTCOMS-DECS200. The BESTCOMS setup utility automatically installs BESTCOMS.
When BESTCOMS is installed, a Basler Electric folder is added to the Windows program menu. This
folder is accessed by clicking the Start button and pointing to Programs. The Basler Electric folder
contains an icon for BESTCOMS-DECS200.
Connecting the DECS-200 and PC

Connect a communication cable between the DECS-200 front panel RS-232 connector (Com 0) and the
appropriate communication port of the PC.
STARTING BESTCOMS
BESTCOMS is started by clicking the Windows Start button, pointing to Programs, the Basler Electric
folder, and then clicking the BESTCOMS-DECS200 icon. At startup, a dialog box with the program title
and version number is displayed briefly. After this dialog box is displayed, the System Configuration
Screen is displayed (Figure 5-7).
Establishing Communication
Communication between BESTCOMS and the DECS-200 must be established before viewing metering
values or reading or changing settings. BESTCOMS screen settings are updated only after
communication is opened or the communication settings have been changed.
Open the DECS-200 communication port by clicking Communications on the menu bar, hovering the
mouse pointer over Open Comm Port and clicking Front Port - RS-232 (Figure 5-2). When the Comm
Port dialog box appears, select the appropriate PC communication port and click the Initialize button.
BESTCOMS initiates communication by retrieving the configuration settings from the DECS-200.
NOTE
BESTCOMS may display the dialog box of Figure 5-1 when initiating
DECS-200 communication, obtaining DECS-200 configuration settings
or performing other tasks. It's important to wait until the box disappears
before trying to execute communication commands. Issuing commands Figure 5-1. Wait Dialog Box
while the Reading from DECS-200 dialog box is present may disrupt
communication between BESTCOMS and the DECS-200.
DECS-200 BESTCOMS Software 5-1

Configuring the Communication Ports
DECS-200 communication settings are changed
through the Communication Port Settings screen.
To access this screen, click Communications on
the menu bar and click Port Configuration.
Communication port settings are illustrated in
Figure 5-2 and described in the following
paragraphs.
Serial Port. To modify the settings of a
communication port, the serial port must first be
selected. Each port has a corresponding setting
selection. Front-panel communication port settings
are adjusted by selecting COM0 RS-232. Right-
hand panel communication port settings are
adjusted by selecting COM1 RS-232. Left-hand
panel communication port settings are adjusted by
selecting COM2 RS-485.
Baud Rate. A baud rate of 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
or 19200 may be selected for each serial port.
Parity. This setting can be adjusted only for port
Com 2. A setting of N (no parity) O (odd parity), or Figure 5-2. Communication Port Settings
E (even parity) may be selected.
Data Bits. The number of data bits is not adjustable
and fixed at 8.
Stop Bits. This setting can be adjusted only for port
Com 2. One (1) stop bit or two (2) stop bits may be
selected.
Modbus Settings, Address. This setting is enabled
only for port Com 2. A device address of 1 through
247 may be selected.
Modbus Settings, Response Time Delay. This Figure 5-3. Password Dialog Box
setting is enabled only for port Com 2. A response
time delay of 10 to 200 milliseconds may be
entered in 10 millisecond increments.
Once changes are made to the communication
settings and the OK button is clicked, the Password
dialog box of Figure 5-3 appears and prompts you
to enter a password. Each DECS-200 is delivered
with "decs2" as the default password. See Creating
a Password for information about changing the
password. After the correct password is entered,
the communication setting changes are made
active.
Configuring the Real-Time Clock

DECS-200 timekeeping is set and configured
through the Set Real Time Clock screen (Figure 5-
4). To access the Set Real Time Clock screen, click
Configure on the menu bar and click Real Time
Clock. The DECS-200 date and time are set by
altering the date and time fields or by retrieving the
PC date and time and then sending the values to
the DECS-200. The date format can be selected as Figure 5-4. Set Real Time Clock Screen
MM/DD/YY or DD-MM-YY. Timekeeping can use
the 12-hour or 24-hour format. Daylight saving time
compensation can be enabled or disabled.
5-2 BESTCOMS Software DECS-200

Assigning Identification Labels
Identification labels can be assigned to the DECS-
200 through the Device ID screen (Figure 5-5). The
information entered on the Device ID screen
identifies the DECS-200 unit and associates it with
a location and one or two operators. The Device ID
screen is accessed by clicking Configure on the
menu bar and clicking Device ID Information.
Information entered on the Device ID screen is
used in sequence-of-events reporting and settings
printouts. Each field of the Device ID screen
accepts a maximum of 30 alphanumeric characters.
Figure 5-5. Device ID Screen
Creating a Password
Password protection guards against unauthorized
changing or viewing of DECS-200 settings. A single
password protects all DECS-200 settings. The
DECS-200 is delivered with a default password of
decs2. The password can be changed only after
communication between BESTCOMS and the
DECS-200 is established. Once the password is
changed, it should be stored in a secure location. If
the user-defined password is lost or forgotten,
BESTCOMS must be reloaded to restore the
default password. A user password is entered on
the Change DECS Password screen. This screen,
illustrated in Figure 5-6, is accessed by clicking
Figure 5-6. Change DECS Password Screen
Communications on the menu bar and clicking
Password Change. A password containing up to
six alphanumeric characters may be entered.
CHANGING SETTINGS
A setting is changed by clicking within the setting field and typing the new setting value. When the cursor
is placed within a setting field, the range limits and increments for the setting are displayed on the status
bar. If a value outside the range limits is entered, an Input Error dialog box will appear and display the
acceptable range limits for the setting.
Sending Settings to the DECS-200

Once all desired setting changes have been made on a setting group screen, the settings must be sent to
the DECS-200 before viewing other screens. Otherwise, the setting changes will be lost. Setting changes
can be sent to the DECS-200 by clicking the SendToDECS button or by clicking Communications on
the menu bar and then clicking Send To DECS. A single setting change can be sent to the DECS-200 by
pressing the keyboard Enter key. Functions controlled by option buttons or checkboxes are immediately
sent to the DECS-200 when the option button or checkbox is selected.
Retrieving DECS-200 Settings

Settings are retrieved from the DECS-200 by clicking the GetFromDECS button. This causes the current
DECS-200 settings to be displayed on the BESTCOMS setting screens. DECS-200 settings can also be
retrieved by clicking Communications on the menu bar and clicking Get From DECS.
Saving Settings in DECS-200 Memory

DECS-200 settings are saved in nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). In the event of a control power loss,
these are the settings that are active at power-up. When setting changes are made and sent to the
DECS-200, they are automatically saved to EEPROM (if the correct password is entered). When you
close communication or exit BESTCOMS, you may be asked for a password. Enter the correct password
to ensure that all setting changes are saved.

SYSTEM SETTINGS
DECS-200 settings, metering values, and data records are arranged into seven groups within
BESTCOMS:
• System Configuration • Protection/Relay
• Setting Adjustments • Data Log
• Control Gain • Metering/Operation
• Analysis
Each group is contained on a BESTCOMS screen. A screen’s settings and parameters are further
organized by labeled tabs within the screen. In the following paragraphs, settings, metering values, and
data records are arranged and defined according to the organization of the BESTCOMS screen and tabs.
System Configuration
The System Configuration screen consists of four tabs labeled System Options, System Data, Rated
Data, and Auxiliary Input. To view the System Configuration screen, click the Configure button on the
toolbar or click Screens on the menu bar and click System Configuration.
System Options
System Options tab functions are shown in Figure 5-7 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-7. System Configuration Screen, System Options Tab

Limiter Mode. This setting disables all limiters or enables the underexcitation limiter (UEL), overexcitation
limiter (OEL), or stator current limiter (SCL). Selection of the following limiter combinations is also
possible: OEL/UEL, SCL/UEL, SCL/OEL, and SCL/OEL/UEL.
Sensing Configuration. Configures the generator sensing voltage as either single-phase or three-phase.
Underfrequency Mode. Configures underfrequency limiting for V/Hz or underfrequency operation.
Generator Frequency. Selects either 50 hertz or 60 hertz as the nominal system frequency.
Voltage Matching. Enables or disables voltage matching. For voltage matching to be enabled, the DECS-
200 must be operating in AVR mode, var/power factor correction must be disabled, and the system must
be off line.
Version Numbers. These two read-only fields display the version of BESTCOMS software and the
firmware version of the DECS-200 connected to the PC operating BESTCOMS. In order for the DECS-
200 firmware version to be displayed, communication must be established between BESTCOMS and the
DECS-200.
System Data
System Data tab functions are shown in Figure 5-8 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-8. System Configuration Screen, System Data Tab
Generator PT Ratings, Primary Voltage. Sets the rated primary voltage of the generator potential
transformer (PT). Generator and bus PT ratings must be specified in the same sensing range. A setting of
1 to 30,000 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.
Generator PT Ratings, Secondary Voltage. Sets the rated secondary voltage of the generator potential
transformer. Generator and bus PT ratings must be specified in the same sensing range. A setting of 1 to
600 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.
Generator CT Ratings, Primary Current. Sets the rated primary current of the generator current
transformer (CT). A setting of 1 to 60,000 Aac may be entered in 1 Aac increments.
Generator CT Ratings, Secondary Current. Sets the rated secondary current of the generator current
transformer (CT). A setting of 1 Aac or 5 Aac may be entered.
Bus PT Ratings, Primary Voltage. Sets the rated primary voltage of the bus potential transformer (PT).
Generator and bus PT ratings must be specified in the same sensing range. A setting of 1 to 500,000 Vac
may be entered in 1 Vac increments.
Bus PT Ratings, Secondary Voltage. Sets the rated secondary voltage of the bus potential transformer
(PT). Generator and bus PT ratings must be specified in the same sensing range. A setting of 1 to 600
Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.
Internal Tracking, Enabled/Disabled. Enables or disables tracking of the active control mode setpoint by
the inactive control modes.
Internal Tracking, Delay. Determines the time delay between a control mode change and setpoint
tracking. A setting of 0 to 8 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Internal Tracking, Traverse Rate. Determines the amount of time required for the inactive control mode to
traverse (cross) the full setting range of the active control mode setpoint. A setting of 1 to 80 seconds may
be entered in 0.1 second increments.
External Tracking, Enable/Disable. Enables or disables tracking of a second DECS-200’s setpoint.
External Tracking, Delay. Determines the time delay between a transfer to a second DECS-200 and start
of tracking of the second DECS-200 setpoint. A setting of 0 to 8 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second
increments.

External Tracking, Traverse Rate. Determines the amount of time required for the DECS-200 to traverse
(cross) the full setting range of a second, active DECS-200. A setting of 1 to 80 seconds may be entered
in 0.1 second increments.
Rated Data
Rated Data tab functions are shown in Figure 5-9 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-9. System Configuration Screen, Rated Data Tab
Generator Rated Data, Voltage. Sets the rated line-to-neutral generator voltage. A setting of 85 to 30,000
Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.
Generator Rated Data, Current. sets the rated generator line current. A setting of 10 to 60,000 Aac may
be entered in 0.1 Aac increments.
Generator Rated Data, Power Factor. Sets the rated generator power factor which is used to calculate
generator real power. A setting of 0.5 (leading) to –0.5 (lagging) may be entered in 0.01 increments.
Generator Rated Data, Real Power. This read-only field is the calculated product of the voltage field,
current field, power factor field, and the square root of 3.
Generator Rated Data, Rating. This read-only field is the calculated product of the voltage field, current
field, and the square root of 3.
Exciter Field Rated Data, Field Voltage. Sets the rated exciter field voltage. A setting of 1 to 180 Vdc may
be entered in 0.1 Vdc increments.
Exciter Field Rated Data, Field Current. Sets the rated exciter field current. A setting of 0.1 to 15 Adc may
be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.
Exciter Field Rated Data, Field Resistance. This read-only field is the calculated result of the field voltage
field being divided by the field current field.
Pole Ratio, Calculate Pole Ratio. Clicking this button displays the Pole Ratio Calculator screen (Figure 5-
10). Enter the number of exciter poles and generator poles and press the Enter key to view the calculated
result. The “Number of EXCITER Poles” field accepts even numbers between 0 and 1,000. The “Number
of GENERATOR Poles” field accepts even numbers between 0 and 100. Clicking the Accept button
closes the Pole Ratio Calculator screen and enters the ratio in the Pole Ratio field.

Figure 5-10. Pole Ratio Calculator
Pole Ratio, Pole Ratio. Sets the ratio of the number of exciter poles to the number of generator poles. A
setting of 0 to 10 may be entered in 0.01 increments. This value can be calculated automatically using the
pole ratio calculator , accessed by clicking the Calculate Pole Ratio button.
Auxiliary Input
The auxiliary voltage input signal changes the setpoint of the selected operating mode. For more
information on the auxiliary voltage input, refer to Section 3, Functional Description. Auxiliary Input tab
functions are shown in Figure 5-11 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-11. System Configuration Screen, Auxiliary Input Tab
Auxiliary Input, Input Type. Selects the accessory input type as voltage or current for remote control of the
setpoint.
Auxiliary Input, Summing Type. Selects either Inner Loop or Outer Loop as the summing type. When
Inner Loop is selected, the operating mode is either AVR of FCR. When Outer Loop is selected, the
operating mode is either var or power factor.

Auxiliary Input, Auxiliary Gain Settings. The four auxiliary gain setting fields, AVR, FCR, var, and PF,
select the gain which affects the setpoint of the selected operating mode. The signal applied to the
accessory input is multiplied by the auxiliary gain setting. Each gain setting can be adjusted from –99 to
+99 in increments of 0.01. For more information on the accessory gain settings, refer to Section 3,
Functional Description.
Droop Settings, Reactive Droop Compensation. Sets the level of droop compensation for paralleled
generators or line-drop compensations. Droop compensation is adjustable from 0 to +30% of the
generator nominal, terminal voltage in 0.1% increments. Line-drop compensation is adjustable from –30
to 0% of the generator nominal terminal voltage in 0.1% increments.
Droop Settings, Cross Current Compensation Gain. Sets the level of cross-current compensation
(reactive differential) gain for paralleled generators. Cross-current compensation gain is adjustable from –
30 to +30% of the rated CTs in 0.01% steps. Refer to Section 4, Installation, for more information on
cross-current compensation gain.
Setting Adjustments
The Setting Adjustments screen consists of eight tabs labeled AVR/FCR, var/PF, Startup, OEL Type,
OEL (Summing), OEL (Takeover), UEL, and SCL. To view the setting adjustment screen, click the
Settings button on the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Setting Adjustments.
AVR/FCR
AVR/FCR tab functions are illustrated in Figure 5-12 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-12. Setting Adjustments Screen, AVR/FCR Tab

Automatic Voltage Regulator, AVR Setpoint. Sets the desired generator output voltage when operating in
AVR mode. The range of this setting is based on the generator voltage setting entered on the Rated Data
tab of the System Configuration screen. This setting is also limited by the settings of the AVR Min and
AVR Max fields. If sensing step-down transformers are used, primary voltage should be entered.
Automatic Voltage Regulator, AVR Min. Sets the minimum generator output voltage, expressed as a
percentage of the rated generator voltage. A setting of 70 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Automatic Voltage Regulator, AVR Max. Sets the maximum generator output voltage, expressed as a
percentage of the rated generator voltage. A setting of 70 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Automatic Voltage Regulator, Traverse Rate (sec). Determines the time required to adjust the AVR
setpoint from the minimum value to the maximum value of the adjustment range. A setting of 10 to 200
seconds may be entered in 1 second increments.

Automatic Voltage Regulator, Pre-position Setpoint. Defines the pre-position setpoint for AVR mode. This
value replaces the AVR setpoint value if pre-position is selected and the AVR Pre-Position mode is
Maintain. The setting range is identical to the AVR Setpoint setting range. If sensing step-down
transformers are being used, primary voltage should be entered.
Automatic Voltage Regulator, Preposition Mode. Determines whether or not the DECS-200 will respond to
further setpoint change commands once the operating setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If
Maintain mode is selected, further setpoint changes are ignored. If Release mode is selected, subsequent
setpoint changes are possible by using Raise and Lower commands.
Field Current Regulator, FCR Setpoint. Sets the field current setpoint when operating in FCR mode. The
range of this setting is based on the field current rating entered on the Rated Data tab of the System
Configuration screen. This setting is also controlled by the settings of the FCR Min and FCR Max fields.
Field Current Regulator, FCR Min. Sets the minimum field current setpoint, expressed as a percentage of
the rated field current. A setting of 0 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Field Current Regulator, FCR Max. Sets the maximum field current setpoint, expressed as a percentage
of the rated field current. A setting of 1 to 120% may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Field Current Regulator, Traverse Rate. Determines the time required to adjust the FCR setpoint from the
minimum value to the maximum value of the adjustment range. A setting of 10 to 200 seconds may be
entered in 1 second increments.
Field Current Regulator, Preposition Setpoint. Defines the pre-position setpoint for FCR mode. This value
replaces the FCR setpoint value if pre-position is selected and the FCR Pre-Position mode is Maintain.
The setting range is identical to the FCR Setpoint setting range.
Field Current Regulator, Pre-position Mode. Determines whether or not the DECS-200 will respond to
further setpoint change commands once the operating setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If
Var/PF
Var/PF tab functions are illustrated in Figure 5-13 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-13. Setting Adjustments Screen, var/PF Tab
Reactive Power Control, var Setpoint. Sets the reactive power setpoint when operating in var mode. The
range of this setting depends on the generator ratings entered on the Rated Data tab of the System
Configuration screen. This setting is also controlled by the settings of the var Min and var Max fields.

Reactive Power Control, var Min. Sets the minimum var setpoint, expressed as a percentage of the rated
generator kVA. A setting of –100 to +100% may be entered in 1% increments.
Reactive Power Control, var Max. Sets the maximum var setpoint, expressed as a percentage of the
rated generator kVA. A setting of –100 to +100% may be entered in 1% increments.
Reactive Power Control, Traverse Rate. Determines the time required to adjust the var setpoint from the
minimum value to the maximum value of the adjustment range. A setting of 10 to 200 seconds may be
entered in 1 second increments.
Reactive Power Control, Preposition Setpoint. Defines the pre-position setpoint for var mode. This value
replaces the var setpoint value if pre-position is selected and the var Pre-Position mode is Maintain. The
setting range is identical to the var Setpoint setting range.
Reactive Power Control, Preposition Mode. Determines whether or not the DECS-200 will respond to
further setpoint change commands once the operating var setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If
Reactive Power Control, Var/PF Fine Volt Band. Sets the upper and lower boundaries of voltage
correction when operating in var or PF mode.
Power Factor Control, PF Setpoint. Sets the generator operating power factor. The range of this setting is
determined by the settings of the PF (Leading) and PF (Lagging) fields.
Power Factor Control, PF (Leading). Sets the limit for leading power factor. A setting of –1 to –0.5 may be
entered in 0.005 increments.
Power Factor Control, PF (Lagging). Sets the limit for lagging power factor. A setting of 0.5 to 1 may be
Power Factor Control, Traverse Rate (sec). Determines the time required to adjust the power factor
setpoint from the minimum value to the maximum value of the adjustment range. A setting of 10 to 200
Power Factor Control, Preposition Setpoint. Defines the pre-position setpoint for Power Factor mode. This
value replaces the PF setpoint value if pre-position is selected and the PF Pre-Position mode is Maintain.
The setting range is identical to the PF Setpoint setting range.
Power Factor Control, Preposition Mode. Determines whether or not the DECS-200 will respond to further
setpoint change commands once the operating PF setpoint is driven to the pre-position value. If Maintain
mode is selected, further setpoint changes are ignored. If Release mode is selected, subsequent setpoint
changes are possible by using Raise and Lower commands.
Startup
Startup tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-14 and described in the following paragraphs.
Startup Control, Soft Start Level. Sets the generator soft-start voltage offset used during startup. A setting
of 0 to 90% may be entered in 1% increments.
Startup Control, Soft Start Time. Sets the soft-start time limit used during startup. A setting of 1 to 7,200
Underfrequency Setting, Corner Frequency. Sets the generator corner frequency for generator under-
frequency protection. A setting of 15 to 90 Hz may be entered in 0.1 Hz increments.
Underfrequency Setting, Slope. Sets the generator frequency slope for generator underfrequency
protection. A setting of 0 to 3 V/Hz may be entered in 0.01 V/Hz increments.
Voltage Matching, Band. Configures the generator voltage matching band as a percentage of the
generator rated voltage. When the bus voltage falls outside this band, no voltage matching occurs. A
setting of 0 to 20% may be entered in 0.01% increments.
Voltage Matching, Gen to Bus PT Match Level. Ensures accurate voltage matching by compensation for
the error between the generator and bus voltage sensing transformers. The Match Level is expressed as
the relationship of the generator voltage to the bus voltage (expressed as a percentage). A setting of 90
to 120% may be entered in 0.1% increments.

Figure 5-14. System Settings Screen, Startup Tab
OEL Type
Overexcitation Limiter Type tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-15 and described in the following
paragraphs.
Figure 5-15. System Settings Screen, OEL Type Tab

OEL Limiter Style. Selects either the summing-point type of overexcitation limiter or the takeover-type of
overexcitation limiter.
OEL Setting Selection Option. Selects the on-line and off-line OEL settings for various 52J/K and 52L/M
contact statuses.

Option 1 activates the on-line OEL settings when either the 52J/K contact or 52L/M contact is opened.
The off-line OEL settings are activated when both the 52J/K and 52L/M contacts are closed. When the
52L/M contact input is jumpered, the 52J/K input can be used to switch between the on-line OEL and off-
line OEL. If var/PF modes are disabled, a closed 52J/K contact enables AVR mode and an open 52J/K
contact enables droop compensation.
Option 2 configures the 52J/K contact to define when the off-line and on-line limiters are active. When the
52J/K contact is closed, the off-line OEL settings are active. When the 52J/K contact is open, the on-line
OEL settings are active. This configuration is intended for cross-compound generator applications where
both machines are paralleled at low rotational speed. Therefore, droop compensation needs to be active
(open 52L/M contact) as the speed of the machines is increased. However, both machines need active,
off-line overexcitation limiting protection.
Option 3 activates the on-line OEL at all times. This configuration enables the DECS-200 to operate in
AVR mode (stand-alone application) without restriction from the off-line OEL settings. The active on-line
OEL is able to limit excitation current if needed. This configuration also eliminates the need for the DECS-
200 to operate in Droop mode when applied in a single-unit application. Therefore, generator voltage
should not droop as reactive load increases.
OEL (Summing)
Summing-Point Overexcitation Limiter tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-16 and described in the
following paragraphs.
Figure 5-16. System Settings Screen, OEL (Summing) Tab

Off-Line OEL Setting, High Current Level. Establishes the high-level current setpoint for the off-line,
summing-point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 30 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.
Off-Line OEL Setting, High Current Time. Sets the duration for the high current setpoint of the off-line,
summing-point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 10 seconds may be entered in 1 second
increments.
Off-Line OEL Setting, Low Current Level. Establishes the low-level current setpoint for the off-line,
On-Line OEL Setting, High Current Level. Establishes the high-level current setpoint for the on-line,
On-Line OEL Setting, Medium Current Level. Establishes the medium-level current setpoint for the on-
line, summing point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 20 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.

On-Line OEL Setting, Medium Current Time. Sets the duration for the medium current setpoint of the on-
line, summing-point, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 120 seconds may be entered in 1 second
increments.
On-Line OEL Setting, Low Current Level. Establishes the low-level current setpoint for the on-line,
OEL (Takeover)
Takeover Overexcitation Limiter tab functions are illustrated in Figure 5-17 and described in the following
paragraphs.
Off-Line Settings, Low Current Level. Establishes the low-level current setpoint for the off-line, takeover-
style, overexcitation limiter. A setting of 0 to 20 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.
Off-Line Settings, High Current Level. Establishes the high-level current setpoint for the off-line, takeover-
Off-Line Settings, Time Dial. Sets the time delay for the off-line, takeover-style, overexcitation limiter. A
setting of 0.1 to 20 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Figure 5-17. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL (Takeover) Tab
On-Line Settings, Low Current Level. Establishes the low-level current setpoint for the on-line, takeover-
On-Line Setting, High Current Level. Establishes the high-level current setpoint for the on-line, takeover-
On-Line settings, Time Dial. Sets the time delay for the on-line, takeover-style, overexcitation limiter. A
Off-Line Curve and On-Line Curve Checkboxes. Checking these boxes displays a plot of the takeover-
style off-line and on-line overexcitation limiter curves. Curve magnification is adjusted by the Zoom X,
Zoom Y, Zoom XY, and Zoom OUT buttons.
UEL
Underexcitation Limiter tab functions are illustrated in Figure 5-18 and described in the following
paragraphs.
UEL Settings, UEL Curve Type Selection. Selects either a user-configured or internally-configured
underexcitation limiting curve. Selecting “Customized” enables the user to create a custom UEL curve
that matches specific generator characteristics. When “Internal” is selected, the DECS-200 automatically

creates a UEL curve based on the first point setting of the absorbed, reactive power level. This function
operates in all modes except FCR.
UEL Settings, Real Power. Up to five setting fields may be used to establish up to five real-power (kW)
points of the underexcitation limiter curve. The UEL Curve Type Selection must be set to “Customized” in
order for these setting fields to be enabled. Not all setting fields need be used. For example, entering kW
values in three of the five setting fields produces a three-point UEL curve. The range for each setting field
is based on the generator ratings entered on the Rated Data tab of the System Configuration screen.
UEL Settings, Reactive Power. When the UEL Curve Type Selection is set to “Customized”, these five
setting fields establish the five reactive power points of the underexcitation limiter curve. Not all setting
fields need be used. For example, entering kvar values in to of the five setting fields produces a two-point
UEL curve. When the UEL curve Type Selection is set to “Internal”, only the first setting field is enabled
and a UEL curve is internally generated based on the value entered in the field. The range for each
setting field is based on the generator ratings entered on the Rated Data tab of the System Configuration
screen.
Curve points are plotted in the UEL graph as values are entered through BESTCOMS. All kW and kvar
settings can also be sent at the same time using the Send all UEL Settings to DECS button.
Internal Curve and Customized Curve Buttons. These buttons can be clicked and held to preview the
corresponding UEL curve.
Figure 5-18. Setting Adjustments Screen, UEL Tab
SCL
Stator Current Limiter tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-19 and described in the following paragraphs.
Stator Current Limiter, High SCL Current Level. Configures the high-level current setpoint for the stator
current limiter. A setting of 0 to 66,000 Aac may be entered in 1.0 Aac increments.
Stator Current Limiter, High SCL Current Time. Sets the time limit for high-level current limiting by the
stator current limiter. A setting of 0 to 60 seconds may be entered in 1 second increments.
Stator Current Limiter, Low SCL Current Level. Configures the low-level current setpoint for the stator
current limiter. A setting of 0 to 66,000 Aac may be entered in 1 Aac increments.

Figure 5-19. Setting Adjustments Screen, SCL Tab
Control Gain
The Control Gain screen consists of a single tab labeled Control Gain. To view the Control Gain screen,
click the Gain button on the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Control Gain.
Control Gain Tab
Control Gain tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-20 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-20. Control Gain Screen

Stability Range. Entering a value from 1 to 20 selects one of 20 predefined stability setting groups for
exciter field applications. Table 5-1 lists the stability settings for each of the 20 predefined groups.
Entering 21 enables the PID function and allows the user to optimize the stability settings. The PID
function provides reference gain settings for user-specified generator and/or exciter time constants. See
PID Window for information about customizing stability settings.
Table 5-1. Predefined Stability Setting Groups
Generator Open Circuit
Time
Setting Generator Exciter
Group Constant (T’do) Time Constant (Texc) Kp Ki Kd
1 1.0 0.17 42.20 115.2 4.433
2 1.5 0.25 66.50 150.0 8.750
3 2.0 0.33 87.16 167.9 13.670
4 2.5 0.42 104.50 175.8 18.960
5 3.0 0.50 119.00 177.8 24.500
6 3.5 0.58 131.30 176.4 30.220
7 4.0 0.67 141.80 173.1 36.060
8 4.5 0.75 150.90 168.8 42.000
9 5.0 0.83 158.80 163.9 48.010
10 5.5 0.92 165.70 158.7 54.080
11 6.0 1.00 171.80 153.6 60.200
12 6.5 1.08 177.20 148.5 66.350
13 7.0 1.17 182.10 143.6 72.540
14 7.5 1.25 186.50 138.9 78.750
15 8.0 1.33 190.50 134.4 84.980
16 8.5 1.42 194.10 130.1 91.230
17 9.0 1.50 197.40 125.9 97.500
18 9.5 1.58 200.40 122.1 103.800
19 10.0 1.67 203.20 118.4 110.100
20 10.5 1.75 205.70 114.8 116.400
AVR/FCR, Proportional Gain KP. Selects the proportional constant (KP) stability parameter. The DECS-
200 provides an output value that is equivalent to KP multiplied by the error between the voltage setpoint
and the actual generator output voltage. Typical values of KP range from 0 to 1,000. General guidelines
for tuning KP are as follows: If the transient response has too much overshoot, decrease KP. If the
transient response is too slow with little or no overshoot, increase KP. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be
AVR/FCR, Integral Gain KI. Selects the integral constant (KI) stability parameter. The DECS-200 provides
an output value that is equivalent to KI multi-plied by the integral of the error between the voltage setpoint
and the actual generator output voltage. Typical values of KI range fro 0 to 1,000. Generally, if the time to
reach steady state is deemed too long, then increase the value of KI. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be
AVR/FCR, Derivative Gain KD. Selects the derivative constant (KD) stability parameter. The DECS-200
provides an output value that is equivalent to KD multiplied by the derivative of the error between the
voltage setpoint and the actual generator output voltage. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1
increments. Typical values of KD range from 1 to 10. If the transient response has too much ringing, then
KD should be increased.
AVR/FCR, Derivative Gain TD. Removes the effects of noise on numerical differentiation. A setting of 0 to
1 may be entered in 0.01 increments. Typical TD values range from 0.01 to 0.03.
AVR/FCR, AVR Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for AVR mode. A
setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.
_AVR/FCR, FCR Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for FCR mode. A

VAR/PF, var Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the integral gain, which determines the characteristic of the DECS-
200 dynamic response to a changed var setting. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.01
increments.
VAR/PF, PF Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the integral gain, which determines the characteristic of the DECS-
200 dynamic response to a changed power factor setting. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1
increments.
VAR/PF, var Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for var control. A setting
of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.01 increments.
VAR/PF, PF Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for power factor control.
A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.
SCL, Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the rate at which the DECS-200 limits stator current. A setting of 0 to 1,000
may be entered in 0.1 increments.
SCL, Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for the stator current limiter. A
OEL, Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the rate at which the DECS-200 responds during an overexcitation
condition. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.
OEL, Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for the overexcitation limiter. A
UEL, Integral Gain KI. Adjusts the rate at which the DECS-200 responds during an underexcitation
condition. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.
UEL, Loop Gain Kg. Sets the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for the underexcitation limiter. A
setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments
Voltage Matching, Loop Gain Kg. Adjusts the coarse loop-gain level of the PID algorithm for matching the
generator voltage to the bus voltage. A setting of 0 to 1,000 may be entered in 0.1 increments.
Analysis
The Analysis screen consists of four tabs labeled AVR, FCR, var, and PF. To view the Analysis screen,
click the Analysis button on the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Analysis.
Trigger Data Logging on Step Change. Checking this box causes an oscillography report to be triggered
every time that a step change occurs.
AVR
AVR tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-21 and described in the following paragraphs.
Voltage Step Response, Increment of AVR Setpoint. Sets the voltage step size that the DECS-200 uses
when incrementing the generator terminal voltage setpoint. A setting of 0 to 10% may be entered in 1%
increments. A button adjacent to this setting is clicked to increment the terminal voltage setpoint. A read-
only field indicates the terminal voltage setpoint that will be achieved when the increment button is
clicked. If the specified step size is outside the setpoint limit, a warning message will appear.
Voltage Step Response, AVR Setpoint. This read-only field indicates the generator terminal voltage set-
point that was set on the AVR/FCR tab of the Setting Adjustments screen. A button adjacent to this field
is clicked to return the AVR setpoint to the displayed value.
Voltage Step Response, Decrement of AVR Setpoint. Sets the voltage step size that the DECS-200 uses
when decrementing the generator terminal voltage setpoint. A setting of 0 to 10% may be entered in 1%
increments. A button adjacent to this setting is clicked to decrement the terminal voltage setpoint. A read-
only field indicates the terminal voltage setpoint that will be achieved when the decrement button is
clicked.
Voltage Step Response, Vrms. This read-only field indicates the value of terminal voltage. The other three
fields are described in the corresponding tab setting descriptions.
Alarm Signals. During step response analysis, nine alarm indicators are available to indicate system
alarms. The indicators annunciate the following conditions:
• Field overcurrent
• Field overvoltage
• Generator overvoltage
• Generator undervoltage

• Loss of sensing
• Overexcitation limiting
• System frequency below 10 Hz
• Underexcitation limiting
• Underfrequency or volts per hertz
Figure 5-21. Analysis Screen, AVR Tab
FCR
FCR tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-22 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-22. Analysis Screen, FCR Tab

Field Current Step Response, Increment of FCR Setpoint. Sets the current step size that the DECS-200
uses when incrementing the field current setpoint. A setting of 0 to 10% may be entered in 1%
increments. A button adjacent to this setting is clicked to increment the field current setpoint. A read-only
field indicates the field current setpoint that will be achieved when the increment button is clicked. If the
specified step size is outside the setpoint limit, a warning message will appear.
Field Current Step Response, FCR Setpoint. This read-only field indicates the field current setpoint that
was set on the AVR/FCR tab of the Setting Adjustments screen. A button adjacent to this field is clicked
to return the AVR setpoint to the displayed value.
Field Current Step Response, Decrement of FCR Setpoint. Sets the field current step size that the DECS-
200 uses when decrementing the field current setpoint. A setting of 0 to 10% may be entered in 1%
increments. A button adjacent to this setting is clicked to decrement the field current setpoint. A read-only
field indicates the field current setpoint that will be achieved when the decrement button is clicked.
Field Current Step Response, Ifd. This read-only field indicates the value of field current. The other three
fields are described in the corresponding tab setting descriptions.
alarms. A list of the indicators is provided under Analysis, AVR. Alarm annunciations are updated
approximately once every second.
Var
Var tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-23 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-23. Analysis Screen, var Tab

Reactive Power Step Response, Range Control, Min. Changes the range indicated by the var Step
Settings dial and the minimum allowable var settings for the generator. To change the minimum dial
value, double-click the field value, enter a new minimum limit, and press the Enter key.
Reactive Power Step Response, Range Control, Max. Changes the range indicated by the var Step
Settings dial and the minimum allowable var settings for the generator. To change the maximum dial
value, double-click the field value, enter a new minimum limit, and press the Enter key.
Reactive Power Step Response, Setpoint Value. This read-only field indicates the reactive power setpoint
established on the var/PF tab of the Setting Adjustments screen. If a step-response setpoint change has
been made from this screen, the actual setpoint value for the regulator will differ from this read-only
indication.
Reactive Power Step Response, Step Value Change var Value. Provides one of three methods for
changing the kvar setpoint and observing the generator response. (The other two methods include
adjusting the var Step Settings dial or slide bar.) Once the desired value is entered, the value is sent to
the DECS-200 by clicking the Send var Value to DECS (OK) button. When clicked and held, the button
color changes to red and the button label changes to “Index 1”. Upon release of the button, the new var
value setting is sent to the DECS-200 as the reactive power setpoint for the var regulator. If the specified
var value is outside the range limit, a dialog box appears and shows the acceptable values for the step
response. Changing the var setpoint through the var Value field does not change the dial or slide
indicators.
The pointer of the var Step Settings dial can be clicked and dragged to the approximate, desired setting.
As the pointer is dragged, the slide bar moves to show the relative percentage of the minimum or
maximum var setting. The setpoint can then be fine tuned using the up and down scrolling buttons of the
var Value window.
Reactive Power Step Response, Step Value Change Index. Up to three var step-response setpoints
(indexes) can be activated. An index is created by using the methods described in the previous
paragraphs. Index 2 is added by clicking the Add var Step button. (It may be necessary to drag the red
index 1 pointer out of the way to access the yellow index 2 pointer.) When the Send var Value to DECS
button is clicked and held, the button color changes to yellow and the button label changes to “Index 2”. A
third index is added n the same manner as index 2, but the third index color is blue.
Reactive Power Step Response, Var Steps, Add Var Step. Adds a setpoint index. A maximum of three
setpoint indexes may be created. Refer to the previous paragraph for additional information on adding
setpoint indexes (var Steps).
Reactive Power Step Response, Var Steps, Remove Step. Removes the last setpoint index created.
Var, Var Step Response. This read-only field indicates the value of the regulated var level. The other
three fields are described in the corresponding tab setting descriptions.
PF
PF tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-24 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-24. Analysis Screen, PF Tab

Power Factor Step Response, Add PF Step. Adds a power factor setpoint index. Up to three setpoint
indexes can be created. The addition of indexes is discussed in the paragraphs describing the Step Value
Change settings.

Power Factor Step Response, Remove Steps. Removes the last setpoint index created.
Power Factor Step Response, PF Setpoint Value. This read-only field indicates the reactive power
setpoint established on the var/PF tab of the Setting Adjustments screen. If a step response setpoint
change has been made from this screen, the actual setpoint value for the regulator will differ from this
read-only indication.
Power Factor Step Response, Step Value Change PF Value. Provides one of two methods for changing
the power factor setpoint and observing the generator response. (The other method consists of adjusting
the PF Step Response Settings dial.) Once the desired value is entered, the value is sent to the DECS-
200 by clicking the Send PF Value to DECS button. When clicked and held, the button color changes to
red and the button label changes to “Index 1”. Upon release of the button, the new power factor value is
sent to the DECS-200 and the PF setpoint for the power factor regulator. If the specified PF value is
outside the range limit, a dialog box appears and shows the acceptable values for the step response.
Changing the var setpoint through the PF Value field does not change the dial indicator.
The pointer of the PF Step Response Settings dial can be clicked and dragged to the approximate,
desired setting. The setpoint can then be fine tuned using the up and down scrolling buttons of the PF
Value window.
Power Factor Step Response, Step Value Change Index. Up to three power factor step-response
setpoints (indexes) can be activated. An index is created by using the methods described in the previous
paragraphs. Index 2 is added by clicking the Add PF Step button. (It may be necessary to drag the red
Index 1 pointer out of the way to access the yellow index 2 pointer.) When the Send PF Value to DECS
button is clicked and held, the button color changes to yellow and the button label changes to “Index 2”. A
third index is added in the same manner as index 2, but the third index color is blue.
Power Factor Step Response, PF. This read-only field indicates the value of the regulated power factor
level. The other three fields are described in the corresponding tab setting descriptions.
Protection/Relay
The Protection/Relay screen consists of five tabs labeled Options, Settings, Gain, Relay #1, #2 Logic,
Relay #3 Logic, and Relay Settings. To view the Protection/Relay screen, click the Protection button on
the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Protection/Relay.
Options
Options tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-25 and described in the following paragraphs.
Protection. DECS-200 protection functions are enabled and disabled using these settings. DECS-200
protection functions include generator overvoltage, exciter field overvoltage, open exciter diode, loss of
field, generator undervoltage, exciter field overcurrent, and shorted exciter diode. When a protection
function is enabled or disabled, the change is sent immediately to the DECS-200.
Loss of Sensing Voltage, LOS. Enables and disables the loss of sensing function.
Loss of Sensing Voltage, Time Delay. Sets the time delay between when the DECS-200 detects a loss of
sensing voltage and when the alarm annunciates and the output relay actuates (if programmed). A setting
of 0 to 30 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Loss of Sensing Voltage, Balanced Level. When all phases of sensing voltage decrease below this
setting, the loss of sensing voltage time delay begins timing out. A setting of 0 to 100% (of nominal) may
be entered in 0.1% increments.
Loss of Sensing Voltage, Unbalanced Level. When any one of three phases of sensing voltage decreases
below this setting, the loss of sensing voltage time delay begins timing out. This setting applies to three-
phase sensing applications only. A setting of 0 to 100% (of nominal) may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Loss of Sensing Voltage, Transfer to FCR Mode. Enables and disables a transfer from AVR mode to FCR
mode when a loss of sensing voltage condition occurs.

Figure 5-25. Protection Screen, Options Tab
Settings
Settings tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-26 and described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-26. Protection Screen, Settings Tab

Generator Overvoltage, Level. Configures the setpoint, in primary voltage, for generator overvoltage
protection. This setting is active only when generator overvoltage protection is enabled on the Options
tab. When the generator terminal voltage reaches the level of this setting and the associated time delay
expires, the corresponding protection alarm LED lights. (See the Alarm/Status or Analysis screens for the
location of the specific alarm signal LEDs.) If programmed for the overvoltage function, one or more of the
three programmable output relays are actuated. A setting of 0 to 30,000 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac
increments.
Generator Overvoltage, Delay. Sets the time delay for the generator overvoltage protection function. This
setting is active only when generator overvoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. A setting of
0.1 to 60 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Exciter Field Overvoltage, Level. Configures the setpoint for field overvoltage protection. This setting is
active only when field overvoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. When the field voltage
reaches the level of this setting and the associated time delay expires, the corresponding protection alarm
indicator lights. (See the Alarm/Status or Analysis Screen for the detailed alarm LED signals.) If
programmed for the field overvoltage function, one or more of the three programmable output relays are
actuated. A setting of 1 to 325 Vdc may be entered in 1 Vdc increments.
Exciter Field Overvoltage, Delay. Sets the time delay for the field overvoltage protection function. This
setting is active only when field overvoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. A setting of 0.2 to
30 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Exciter Open Diode, Level. Configures the percent of rated field current that indicates an open exciter
diode. This setting is active only when open exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options tab. A
Exciter Open Diode, Inhibit Level. Configures the percent of rated field current that disables both open-
and shorted-diode protection. This setting is active only when open exciter diode protection is enabled on
the Options tab. A setting of 0 to 100% may be entered in 0.1% increments.
Exciter Open Diode, Delay. Sets the time delay between when an open exciter diode is detected and
annunciated. This setting is active only when open exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options tab.
A setting of 10 to 60 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Generator Undervoltage, Level. Configures the setpoint for generator undervoltage protection. This
setting is active only when generator undervoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. When the
generator terminal voltage reaches the level of this setting and the associated time delay expires, the
corresponding protection alarm LED lights. (See the Alarm/Status or Analysis screen for the detailed
alarm LED signals.) If programmed for the undervoltage function, one or more of the three programmable
output relays are actuated. A setting of 0 to 30,000 Vac may be entered in 1 Vac increments.
Generator Undervoltage, Delay. Sets the time delay for the generator undervoltage protection function.
This setting is active only when generator undervoltage protection is enabled on the Options tab. A
Exciter Field Overcurrent, Level. Configures the setpoint for field overcurrent protection. This setting is
active only when field overcurrent protection is enabled on the Options tab. When the field current
exceeds the level of this setting and the associated time delay expires, the corresponding protection
alarm LED lights. (See the Alarm/Status or Analysis Screen for the detailed alarm LED signals.) If
programmed for the field overcurrent function, one or more of the three programmable output relays are
actuated. A setting of 0.1 to 16.0 Adc may be entered in 0.1 Adc increments.
Exciter Field Overcurrent, Delay. Selects the time delay between when the field current reaches the
Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting and when the alarm annunciates. The time delay is initiated when
the sensed current exceeds the overcurrent setpoint and is inversely proportional to the overcurrent level.
The higher the current level, the less time delay before alarm annunciations. This setting is active only
when shorted exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options tab. A setting of 0.1 to 20 seconds may
be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Exciter Shorted Diode, Level. Configures the percent of rated field current that indicates a shorted exciter
diode. This setting is active only when shorted exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options tab. A
Exciter Shorted Diode, Delay. Sets the time delay between when a shorted exciter diode is detected and
annunciated. This setting is active only when shorted exciter diode protection is enabled on the Options
tab. A setting of 5 to 30 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.
Loss of Field, Level. Configures the setpoint for loss of field protection. This setting is active only when
loss of field protection is enabled on the Options tab. When the kvar value decreases below the negative
value of this setting for the duration of the Loss of Field Delay setting, the corresponding protection alarm
LED lights. (See the Alarm/Status tab of the Metering screen or the Analysis screen for the detailed alarm
LED signals.) Any of the three programmable DECS-200 output relays can be programmed to annunciate
a loss of field condition. A setting of 0 to 3,000,000 kvar may be entered in1 kvar increments.
Loss of Field, Delay. Sets the loss of field protection time delay. This setting is active only when loss of
field protection is enabled. A setting of 0 to 9.9 seconds may be entered in 0.1 second increments.

Relay Logic
Logic settings for the three programmable relays are divided between two tabs labeled Relay #1, #2 Logic
and Relay #3 Logic. Because the settings for each programmable relay are identical, only the Relay #1,
#2 Logic tab is illustrated here (Figure 5-27).
Figure 5-27. Protection Screen, Relay #1, #2 Logic Tab

Protection. A programmable relay can be configured to annunciate any of nine active protection functions.
These protection functions include:
• Field overcurrent • Loss of sensing voltage
• Field overvoltage • Open exciter diode
• Generator overvoltage • Shorted exciter diode
• Generator undervoltage • System frequency below 10 Hz
• Loss of field
Setpoint Limit. A programmable output can be configured to close when the active setpoint reaches the
upper limit or lower limit.
FCR Mode. Enabling this setting closes the programmable output when the DECS-200 is operating in
FCR (Manual) mode.
Limit. A programmable output can be configured to close when the following limits are reached:
overexcitation, stator current, underfrequency or volts per hertz, and underexcitation.
Relay Setting
Contact settings for each of the three programmable relays are adjusted on the Relay Setting tab. Relay
Setting tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-28 and described in the following paragraphs.
Contact Status. Configures the output contacts as normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC). Normally
closed, programmable relay outputs do not remain closed when control power is removed from the
DECS-200.
Contact Type. Selects one of three contact types: Momentary, Maintained, or Latched. Selecting
Momentary closes or opens the relay contacts for the duration determined by the Momentary Time
setting. Selecting Maintained closes or opens the relay contact for the duration of the condition triggering
the relay’s change of state. Selecting Latched latches the relay contacts closed or open until the relay is
reset by the user.
Momentary Time. When Momentary is selected as the contact type, this setting controls the duration that
the contact is open/closed when the relay output is active. A setting of 0.1 to 5 seconds may be entered in
0.05 second increments.

Figure 5-28. Protection Screen, Relay Setting Tab
Data Log
The Data Log screen consists of three tabs labeled Log Setup/Sequence of Events, Logic Triggers, and
Level Triggers/Logged Parameters. To view the Data Log screen, click the Data Log button on the tool
bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click Data Log.
Log Setup/Sequence Of Events
Log Setup/Sequence of Events tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-29 and described in the following
paragraphs.
Figure 5-29. Data Log Screen, Log Setup/Sequence of Events Tab

Data Logging Setup, Data Logging Enable. Enables and disables data logging.
Data Logging Setup, Pre-Trigger Points. Selects the number of data points that are recorded prior to a
data log being triggered. A setting of 0 to 599 may be entered in increments of 1.
Data Logging Setup, Post Trigger Points. Displays the number of data points that are recorded after a
data log is triggered. The value of this read-only field is determined by the Pre-Trigger Points and Sample
Interval settings.
Data Logging Setup, Sample Interval. Establishes the sample rate of the data points. When the Generator
Frequency setting (System Configuration screen, System Options tab) is 60 hertz, a sample interval of
0.016 to 10 seconds may be selected from the pull-down menu. When the Generator Frequency setting is
50 hertz, a sample interval of 0.004 to 10 seconds may be selected from the pull-down menu.
Data Logging Setup, Pre-Trig Duration. Displays the length of time that pre-trigger data points are
recorded. The value of this read-only field is determined by the Pre-Trigger Points and Sample Interval
settings.
Data Logging Setup, Post Trig Duration. Displays the length of time that post-trigger data points are
recorded. The value of this read-only field is determined by the Pre-Trigger Points and Sample Interval
settings.
Data Logging Setup, Total Log Duration. Displays the total recording time for a data log and equals the
sum of the values in the Pre-Trig Duration and Post Trig Duration fields. The value of this read-only field
is determined by the Pre-Trigger Points and Sample Interval settings.
View Sequence Of Events Reporting. Clicking this button displays the Sequence of Events Reporting
screen (Figure 5-30). Sequence of Events Reporting screen displays and controls are described in the
Figure 5-30. Sequence of Event Reporting

Report Summary. This area of the Sequence of Event Recording screen lists the available sequence of
events records. The records displayed are determined by the selection made in the Display the Following
Events setting area.
Event List. This area of the Sequence of Event Recording screen lists the available sequence of events
records. The records displayed are determined by the selection made in the Display the Following Events
setting area.
Reset New Event List. Clicking this button clears all new events from the Event List.
Display the Following Events. The event type displayed in the Event List is controlled by selection made
here. Available event-type selections are New, All New and Old, New Alarm, New I/O, and New Mode.
Print/Save Report. Clicking this button allows the report to be saved as a text file or printed.
View and Download Data log. Clicking this button displays the Data Logging screen of Figure 5-31. Data
Logging screen displays and controls are described in the following paragraphs.
Figure 5-31. Data Logging Screen

Report Summary. This area of the Data Logging screen displays information such as the time and date,
station, device and user identification information, and the number of new and total records.
Event List. This area of the Sequence of Event Recording screen lists the available sequence of events
records. The records displayed are determined by the selection made in the Display the Following Events
setting area.
Selected Record Information. This area of the Data Logging screen displays information relating to the
data log record selected in the Record List. Displayed information includes the number of pre-trigger
points, number of post-trigger points, total number of points, the sample interval, and the number of
parameters reported.
Data Record List Options, Reset New Record Counter. Clicking this button resets the number of new
records reported in the Report Summary to zero.
Data Record List Options, Reset Total Record Counter. Clicking this button resets the number of total
records reported in the Report Summary to zero.
Data Record List Options, Trigger a Record. Clicking this button manually triggers data record acquisition.
A data log cannot be manually triggered unless data logging is enabled on the Log Setup/Sequence of
Events tab.
Data Record List Options, Stop Record. Clicking this button ends acquisition of a manually triggered data
record.
Data Record List Options, Refresh Summary and List. Clicking this button updates the Report Summary
data and Record List with the latest available information.
Data Record List Options, Download Selected Record. Clicking this button downloads the selected record
and allows it to be saved as either a text file or a COMTRADE file viewable in BESTwave.
Print/Save Report. Clicking this button allows a report to be either saved as a text file or printed.
Print/Save Record. Clicking this button allows a record to be either saved as a text file or printed.
Logic Triggers
Logic Triggers tab settings are illustrated in Figure 5-32 and described in the following paragraphs.

Figure 5-32. Data Log Screen, Logic Triggers Tab
Contact Inputs. This area of the Logic Triggers tab lists the available DECS-200 contact inputs that can
be selected to trigger a data log report. The following contact inputs are available for triggering a data log
report:
• 52J/K • AVR • Secondary Enable
• 52L/M • FCR • Start
• Alarm Reset • Pre-Position • Stop
Any combination of contact inputs may be selected.
Relay Outputs. This area of the Logic Triggers tab lists the DECS-200 contact outputs that can be
selected to trigger a data log report. The following relay outputs are available for triggering a data log
report:
• Relay 1 • Relay 3 • Watchdog
• Relay 2 • Stop/Start
Any combination of relay outputs may be selected.
Alarm States. This area of the Logic Triggers tab lists the available alarm conditions that can be selected
to trigger a data log report. The following alarm conditions are available for triggering a data log report:
• Exciter field overcurrent • Generator sensing <10 Hz • Setpoint at upper limit
• Exciter field overvoltage • Generator undervoltage • Shorted exciter diode
• Exciter open diode • Loss of field • Stator current limit
• FCR mode • Loss of sensing • Underexcitation limit
• Generator overvoltage • Overexcitation limit • Underfrequency
• Setpoint at lower limit
Any combination of alarm states may be selected.
System Status, Start/Stop. Enables the Start or Stop mode to trigger a data log report. Selecting “No
Trigger” disables a Start or Stop mode trigger.
System Status, Soft Start. Enables a data log report to be triggered when Underfrequency protection is
active or inactive. Selecting “No Trigger” disables a Soft Start trigger.
System Status, Underfrequency. Enables a data log report to be triggered when either AVR mode or FCR
mode is active. Selecting “No Trigger” disables an Underfrequency trigger.
System Status, Control Mode. Enables a data log report to be triggered when either AVR mode or FCR
mode is active. Selecting “No Trigger” disables a control mode trigger.

System Status, Operating Mode. Enables a data log report to be triggered when power factor control is
active or var control is active. Selecting “No Trigger” disables an operating mode trigger.
System Status, Load Compensation. Enables a data log report to be triggered when droop compensation
is active or inactive. Selecting “No Trigger” disables a load compensation trigger.
System Status, Limiter Mode. Enables a data log report to be triggered when the underexcitation limiter,
overexcitation limiter, or stator current limiter are active. Additionally, a data log report can be triggered
when two of the limiters are active. The available limiter mode selections are listed below:
• No Trigger (disables a limiter mode trigger)
• OEL (overexcitation limiter active)
• Off (no limiters active)
• SCL (stator current limiter active)
• SCL, OEL (stator current limiter and overexcitation limiter active)
• SCL, UEL (stator current limiter and underexcitation limiter active)
• UEL (underexcitation limiter active)
• UEL, OEL (underexcitation limiter and overexcitation limiter active)
System Status, Voltage Matching. Enables a data log report to be triggered when voltage matching is
enabled (On) or disabled (Off). Selecting No Trigger disables a voltage matching trigger.
System Status, Auto Tracking. Enables a data log report to be triggered when the DECS-200 is
functioning as the primary controller or the secondary controller in a redundant DECS-200 system.
Selecting No Trigger disables an auto-tracking trigger.
Level Triggers/ Logged Parameters

The Level Triggers/Logged Parameters tab (Figure 5-33) consists of a list of parameters that can be
selected to trigger a data log report. Up to six parameters can be selected as triggers. Each parameter
has Level Trigger Enable buttons that are used to trigger a data log when the parameter increases above
the upper threshold setting, decreases below the lower threshold setting, or either increases above or
decreases below the upper or lower threshold setting. The available parameters that can be selected to
trigger a data log report are listed in Table 5-2.
Figure 5-33. Data Log Screen, Level Triggers/Logged Parameters

Table 5-2. Data Log Report Parameter Triggers
Unit of Threshold
Parameter Measure Lower Upper Increment
Auto Tracking Output N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1
Auxiliary Input Voltage PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Average Gen. Voltage, L-L PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
AVR Error Signal N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1
Bus Frequency Hz 0 to 90 0 to 90 0.01
Bus Voltage PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Control Output N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1
Cross-Current Input PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Field Current PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Field Voltage PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Gen. Apparent Power kVA PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Gen. Reactive Power kvar PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Gen. Real Power kW PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Generator Current Ib PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Generator Frequency Hz 0 to 90 0 to 90 0.01
Generator Power Factor PF –1 to 1 –1 to 1 0.01
Generator Voltage Vab PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Generator Voltage Vbc PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Generator Voltage Vca PU –2 to 2 –2 to 2 0.01
Phase Angle, V-I Degrees –180 to 180 –180 to 180 0.01
PID Integrator State N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1
Var/PF Controller Output N/A –65535 to 65535 –65535 to 65535 1
Metering
The Metering screen consists of two tabs labeled Operation and Alarm/Status. To view the Metering
screen, click the Metering button on the tool bar or click Screens on the menu bar and click
Metering/Operation.
Operation
Operation tab parameters and controls are illustrated in Figure 5-34 and described in the following
paragraphs.
DECS-200 BESTCOMS software provides real-time monitoring of the following data. This data is
refreshed approximately once every second. Metering is enabled or disabled through the pull-down menu
or by clicking the Metering button.
Real-time metering values on the Operation tab are refreshed approximately once per second. Metering
is enabled or disabled through the Metering menu on the menu bar or by clicking the Metering button.
Gen Voltage. Displays three values of generator voltage: Vab, Vbc, and Vca.
Gen Current. Displays phase B generator current.
Field Voltage. Displays the level of field voltage.
Field Current. Displays the level of field current.
EDM SD/OD Ripple. Displays the percentage of ripple detected across the exciter diodes by the exciter
diode monitor.
Bus Voltage. Displays the level of bus voltage.
Phase Angle. Displays the phase angle between the generator voltage and current.
Position Indication. Displays the relative position (in percent) of the current setpoint value to the
programmed minimum or maximum setpoint.
Figure 5-34. Metering Screen, Operation Tab
Frequency. Displays the frequency of the generator voltage and bus voltage.
Aux DC Input. Displays a value of voltage that is relative to the accessory input voltage or current,
depending on the mode selected.
Apparent Power. Displays the apparent power, in VA, being supplied by the generator.
Real Power. Displays the real power, in watts, being supplied by the generator.
Reactive Power. Displays the reactive power, in vars, being supplied by the generator.
Power Factor. Displays the operating power factor of the generator.
Tracking Error. Displays the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the nominal value of the tracking mode
to the mode being tracked. For example, if operating in AVR mode with 100 Vac nominal generator
voltage and a tracking error of –0.5%, a transfer to another operating mode would cause a decrease in
generator output voltage to 99.5 Vac.
Control Mode. AVR and FCR mode status is reported by two indicators. When the DECS-200 is operating
in AVR mode, the AVR indicator changes from gray to red. When operating in FCR mode, the FCR
indicator changes from gray to green. A button is provided to toggle between AVR and FCR modes.
Operating Status. Three indicators report whether Var mode is active, Power Factor mode is active, or
neither mode is active. An option button below each indicator is used to select the corresponding
operating mode. When Var mode is active, the Var indicator changes from gray to green. When Power
Factor mode is active, the PF indicator changes from gray to red. When neither mode is active, the Off
indicator changes from gray to blue. If the control mode is FCR and Var of PF mode is selected, that
selection will be ignored by the DECS-200. Even if the Var or PF indicator turns on, the system will not be
in those modes unless the DECS-200 52J/K input is open. See Table 5-3 for additional information on
52J/K and 52L/M logic.
Table 5-3. 52J/K and 52L/M Logic
DECS-200 Operating Mode 52 L/M 52 J/K Generator Operating Mode
AVR mode active, off-line OEL Closed Closed Single unit/stand-alone
enabled, no droop, no var/PF
Droop mode active, on-line OEL Open Closed Paralleled to the utility grid (droop) or
enabled, no var/PF two or more generators islanded
(droop or cross-current compensation)
Var/PF mode active, on-line OEL Open Open Paralleled to utility grid
enabled
NOTE: If neither var or power factor modes are selected via the operator interfaces, then the operating mode is
droop.
System Operating Status. Two indicators show the start/stop mode status of the DECS-200. in Start
mode, the START indicator changes from gray to red. In Stop mode, the STOP indicator changes from
gray to green. A button is provided for toggling between Start and Stop modes.
Pre-position Set. Clicking this button adjusts the excitation setpoint to the pre-position value.
Fine Adjustment. Clicking the Raise button increases the active operating setpoint. Clicking the Lower
button decreases the active operating setpoint. The raise and lower increment is a function of the setpoint
range of adjustment and the active operating setpoint. The raise and lower increment is a function of the
setpoint range of adjustment and the active mode traverse rate. The increments are directly proportional
to the adjustment range and inversely proportional to the traverse rate.
Alarm/Status
Alarm/Status tab indicators and controls are illustrated in Figure 5-35 and described in the following
paragraphs.
Figure 5-35. Metering Screen, Alarm/Status Tab

System Status. When any of the 15 conditions listed in Figure 5-35 exist, the corresponding indicator
changes from gray to red. Clicking the Reset Alarms button resets the system status annunciations. Any
condition that remains active will annunciate again after the Reset Alarms button is clicked.
Switch Status. Three indicators provide contact input status. The 52 JK indicator turns on when the 52J/K
contact input is open. The 52 LM indicator turns on when the 52L/M contact is open. The Secondary
DECS indicator turns on when the SECEN (secondary enable) contact input is closed.
Front Panel LED Signal Status. Six indicators provide remote indication of the front panel LEDs. Refer to
Section 2, Human-Machine Interface for information regarding the function of the front panel indicators.
SAVING, PRINTING, AND OPENING FILES

BESTCOMS provides the ability to save DECS-200 settings in a file for reference or future use. Using a
settings file can save setup time when configuring multiple units with the same configuration. Settings files
may be opened and edited using any text editing application. A settings file can also be printed from
BESTCOMS.
Saving Files
A DECS-200 settings file is saved through a Save As dialog box. The Save As dialog box is accessed by
using any of three methods:

• Click the Save File button on the tool bar
• Press Ctrl + A on the keyboard
• Click File, Save As on the menu bar
The Save As dialog box enables you to navigate to the desired folder and save the DECS-200 settings
file. DECS-200 setting files are saved with a .de2 extension.
Printing Files
A printed copy of DECS-200 settings can be made for record keeping or as a reference. Settings are
printed by accessing the print preview screen. The print preview screen is accessed by using any of three
methods:
• Click the Print Data button on the tool bar
• Press Ctrl + P on the keyboard
• Click File, Print on the menu bar
Executing a print command displays a user information box with fields for adding a title and comments to
the printout. Clicking OK or Cancel displays a print preview of the settings. The print preview screen
enables you to select a printer and configure the page layout (Print Setup button), print the settings list
(printer icon button), and save the list of settings in a text file (Save button). The BESTCOMS software
version, the DECS-200 firmware version, and the time and date are printed along with the settings.
Opening/Uploading Files
DECS-200 settings files can be opened by BESTCOMS and uploaded to a DECS-200 communicating
with the PC running BESTCOMS. A DECS-200 settings file is retrieved through the BESTCOMS Open
dialog box. The Open dialog box is accessed by using any of three methods:
• Click the File Open button on the tool bar
• Press Ctrl + O on the keyboard
• Click File, Open on the menu bar
The Open dialog box enables you to navigate to the desired settings file and retrieve the settings.
Settings can be retrieved into BESTCOMS and uploaded to the DECS-200 or retrieved into BESTCOMS
without uploading to the DECS-200. When you execute the Open command, a warning dialog box
appears. This dialog box warns you that equipment damage may occur as a result of the changes that
were made in the computer file. If you have confidence that no damage will occur, you may send the data
to the DECS-200.
CAUTION
A file data transfer while the DECS-200 is on-line may result in poor system
performance or equipment damage. Make sure that the new settings are safe to
upload before you transfer the data file.
If you select Yes, then 17 blocks of DECS-200 setting data are sent to the DECS-200 block by block.
Please wait until all 17 blocks of data have been transferred. When power is next applied to the DECS-
200 unit, the previously saved settings will become the current settings.
PID WINDOW
The PID window of BESTCOMS provides the ability to increase generator stability by changing the PID
(proportional + integral + derivative) parameters. PID parameters are calculated automatically after the
user selects the generator time constant (T’do) and/or exciter time constant (Texc).
The PID window is accessed by clicking the PID button on the tool bar. This button is enabled only when
the Control Gain screen is being viewed and the Stability Range setting is 21.
PID window functions are shown in Figure 5-36 and described in the following paragraphs.
Field Input Data, Generator Information. This setting field is used to enter and display a descriptive name
for the selected group of PID settings. The Generator Information field accepts up to 27 alphanumeric
characters.

Field Input Data, Generator Time Constant T’do. The time constant of the generator is entered in this
field. The generator time constant and exciter time constant are used to calculate gain parameters Kp, Ki,
and Kd. A setting of 1 to 15 may be selected from the pull-down menu.
Field Input Data, Exciter Time Constant Texc. The time constant of the exciter is entered in this field. The
exciter time constant and generator time constant are used to calculate gain parameters Kp, Ki, and Kd.
The exciter time constant setting range varies according to the generator time constant value selected.
The default value for the exciter time constant is the generator time constant divided by six.
Field Output Data, Gain Kp. This read-only field displays the calculated value of Kp based on the
generator time constant (T’do) and exciter time constant (Texc).
Field Output Data, Gain Ki. This read-only field displays the calculated value of Ki based on the generator
time constant (T’do) and exciter time constant (Te).
Field Output Data, Gain Kd. This read-only field displays the calculated value of Kd based on the
Figure 5-36. PID Window

Field Output Data – Gain Kg. This read-only field displays the calculated value of Kg based on the
Buttons below the Field Output Data fields enable existing PID records to be deleted (Remove Record),
enable calculated setting to be saved in a record (Add to PID List), enable a set of PID parameters to be
retrieved from the PID list and invoked, and update the PID settings displayed in the PID window and
used by the DECS-200N (Update Setting Screen). Clicking the Close button exits the PID window and
returns to the Control Gain screen.
PID List. This area of the PID window displays the groups of available PID settings.
PID Calculations Based On Input Values

The available exciter time constant range is determined by the generator time constant input value. (The
default value for the exciter time constant is the generator time constant divided by six (T’do ÷ 6).) The
generator time constant input value must be in the range of 1.0 to 15.0 seconds and in 0.05 second
increments. When the generator time constant value is 1.00, the available exciter time constant range is
0.03 to 0.50 in 0.01 second increments. When the generator time constant value is 15.00, the available
exciter time constant range is 0.30 to 3.00 in 0.01 second increments.
For example, when you set T’do = 2.0 seconds, Texc is 0.33. After specifying the input values, a set of
PID parameters (Output Data) is generated automatically. If you set T’do = 5.00 seconds, then Texc will
be 0.83 seconds. The calculated KP is 155.47, KI is 138.72, KD is 48, and Kg is 1.
PID parameters can be directly removed from, added to, or modified in the PID List Data. PID parameters
may also be saved into a file (pidlist.dat).

Adding To PID List
CAUTION
Improper PID numbers can result in poor system performance or equipment
damage.
PID parameters can be added to a list and recalled for operational use and comparison. To add to the list,
type the name for the generator (or other appropriate information) in the generator information box.
Choose the generator time constant and, if appropriate, the exciter time constant. Observe the PID gain
parameters in the Field Output Data boxes. If these gain parameters are appropriate, select the Add to
PID List button. To check for the new parameters, pull down the PID Parameters List (click on the down
arrow). The new gain and time constant parameters will be displayed.
Removing A PID List Record

PID parameters can also be removed from the list. To remove a list (record), pull down the PID
Parameters List and select the record or list so that the gain and time constant parameters are
displayed. Click the Remove Record button and the listed record is deleted.
Retrieving Existing Data From PID List

To retrieve existing data, pull down the PID Parameters List and select the record or list so that the gain
and time constant parameters are displayed and highlighted. Click the Get from a list button and the
listed record input and output data displays in the text boxes.
TERMINATING COMMUNICATION
Communication between BESTCOMS and the DECS-200 is terminated by clicking Communications on
the menu bar and clicking Close Comm Port.


SECTION 6 • SETUP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 6 • SETUP ................................................................................................................................ 6-1
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Equipment Required ........................................................................................................................... 6-1
System Data ....................................................................................................................................... 6-1
SETTINGS ENTRY ................................................................................................................................ 6-1
System Configuration Screen ............................................................................................................. 6-1
Setting Adjustments Screen ............................................................................................................... 6-4
Protection/Relay Screen ................................................................................................................... 6-10
OFF-LINE TESTS - TURBINE NOT SPINNING .................................................................................. 6-13
Start/Stop Tests ................................................................................................................................ 6-13
Control Gain Settings........................................................................................................................ 6-14
PID Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 6-14
OFF-LINE TESTS - TURBINE SPINNING........................................................................................... 6-14
FCR Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 6-14
EXCITATION PERFORMANCE EVALUATION................................................................................... 6-17
Off-Line Excitation Limiter Operation................................................................................................ 6-17
Limit and Protection Check............................................................................................................... 6-18
Parallel Operation, Generator On Line ............................................................................................. 6-18
Conclusion Of Testing ...................................................................................................................... 6-20
Figures
Figure 6-1. System Options Tab ................................................................................................................ 6-2
Figure 6-2. System Data Tab..................................................................................................................... 6-2
Figure 6-3. Rated Data Tab ....................................................................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6-4. Auxiliary Input Tab................................................................................................................... 6-4
Figure 6-5. AVR/FCR Tab.......................................................................................................................... 6-5
Figure 6-6. Var/PF Tab .............................................................................................................................. 6-5
Figure 6-7. Startup Tab.............................................................................................................................. 6-6
Figure 6-8. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL Type Tab .......................................................................... 6-7
Figure 6-9. OEL Summing Tab .................................................................................................................. 6-7
Figure 6-10. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL (Takeover) Tab ............................................................... 6-8
Figure 6-11. UEL Tab ................................................................................................................................ 6-9
Figure 6-12. Setting Adjustments Screen, SCL Tab.................................................................................. 6-9
Figure 6-13. Protection Options Tab........................................................................................................ 6-10
Figure 6-14. Protection Settings Tab ....................................................................................................... 6-11
Figure 6-15. Relay #1, #2 Logic Tab ....................................................................................................... 6-12
Figure 6-16. Relay Setting Tab ................................................................................................................ 6-13
Figure 6-17. Field Voltage Output Waveform .......................................................................................... 6-15
Figure 6-18. KG Gain Effect on Generator Performance .......................................................................... 6-16
Figure 6-19. Insufficient Proportional Gain .............................................................................................. 6-16
Figure 6-20. Prolonged Instability ............................................................................................................ 6-16
Figure 6-21. Insufficient Derivative Gain.................................................................................................. 6-17
Figure 6-22. Final Solution Step Response ............................................................................................. 6-17
Tables
Table 6-1. Generator and Field Ratings ....................................................................................................6-1
Table 6-2. Programmable Output Function Assignments........................................................................6-12
DECS-200 Setup i
ii Setup DECS-200
SECTION 6 • SETUP
INTRODUCTION
This section provides generic setup and operation procedures for excitation systems using the DECS-
200. These procedures are provided only as a guide and are not intended as a replacement for the setup
and operation procedures required by a specific system. In these procedures, DECS-200 settings are
entered through the BESTCOMS interface. Therefore, a PC operating with BESTCOMS software will
need to be connected to the DECS-200 being configured. For information about using BESTCOMS, refer
to Section 5, BESTCOMS Software.
Equipment Required
The following equipment is required to perform the procedures presented here:
• Two-channel chart recorder or the DECS-200’s oscillography. First channel measures the generator
voltage at DECS-200 terminals A1 (E1) and A3 (E3). Second channel measures the field voltage at
DECS-200 terminals C5 (F+) and C6 (F–).
• Oscilloscope
• Personal computer (PC) running BESTCOMS. The minimum requirements for a PC running
BESTCOMS are provided in Section 5, BESTCOMS Software.
• Nine-pin serial communication cable to connect the DECS-200 to the PC.
Basler Electric Application Note 126, while not required, provides helpful information about paralleling
circuits. This application note is available for downloading (in PDF format) from the Basler Electric website
at www.basler.com.
System Data
Record your system ratings in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1. Generator and Field Ratings
Generator Ratings Exciter Field Ratings
Voltage: Vac No-Load Voltage: Vdc
Frequency: Hz No-Load Current: Adc
Reactive Power: kvar Full-Load Voltage: Vdc
Rotational Speed: rpm Full-Load Current: Adc
SETTINGS ENTRY
The DECS-200 settings entered on each BESTCOMS screen should be evaluated to ensure that they are
appropriate for the application. When entering settings, remember to press the Enter key to save
individual settings or click the SendToDECS button to save all of the settings on a screen.
System Configuration Screen

As shown in the following paragraphs, enter the desired settings on each tab of the Configuration screen.
Review those settings and enable the functions that apply.
System Options
Select the desired system options illustrated in Figure 6-1.
Select the limiter mode ................................................................................................................. ________
Select the sensing configuration ................................................................................................... ________
Select the underfrequency mode .................................................................................................. ________
Select the nominal generator frequency ....................................................................................... ________
Enable or disable voltage matching .............................................................................................. ________
DECS-200 Setup 6-1
Figure 6-1. System Options Tab
System Data
Enter the system PT and CT ratings and configure the internal and external tracking settings illustrated in
Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2. System Data Tab
Enter the generator PT primary voltage rating.............................................................................. ________
Enter the generator PT secondary voltage rating ......................................................................... ________
Enter the generator CT primary current rating.............................................................................. ________
6-2 Setup DECS-200

Enter the generator CT secondary current rating ......................................................................... ________
Enter the bus PT primary voltage rating (if applicable)................................................................. ________
Enter the bus PT secondary voltage rating (if applicable) ............................................................ ________
Enable or disable internal tracking................................................................................................ ________
Set the internal tracking delay (1 second is suggested) ............................................................... ________
Set the internal tracking traverse rate (10 seconds is suggested)................................................ ________
Enable or disable external tracking (applies only to redundant DECS-200 systems) .................. ________
Set the external tracking delay (applies only to redundant DECS-200 systems) ......................... ________
Set the external tracking traverse rate (applies only to redundant DECS-200 systems) ............. ________
Rated Data
Enter the generator and exciter field ratings and exciter-to-generator pole ratio settings illustrated in
Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3. Rated Data Tab
Enter the rated generator terminal voltage ................................................................................... ________

Enter the rated generator current ................................................................................................. ________
Enter the rated generator power factor ......................................................................................... ________
Enter the exciter-to-generator pole ratio ....................................................................................... ________
Enter the rated exciter field voltage ............................................................................................. ________
Enter the rated exciter field current............................................................................................... ________
Auxiliary Input
Configure the accessory input selections and settings illustrated in Figure 6-4.
Select either voltage or current as the accessory input type ........................................................ ________
Select either inner loop (AVR/FCR) or outer loop (var/PF) as the summing type ........................ ________
Enter the accessory input gain (multiplier) setting for AVR mode ................................................ ________
Enter the accessory input gain (multiplier) setting for FCR mode ................................................ ________
DECS-200 Setup 6-3
Figure 6-4. Auxiliary Input Tab
Enter the accessory input gain (multiplier) setting for var mode................................................... ________
Enter the accessory input gain (multiplier) setting for Power Factor mode .................................. ________
Enter the droop compensation level for paralleled generators or line-drop compensation .......... ________
Enter the cross-current compensation (reactive differential) gain for paralleled generators ........ ________
Setting Adjustments Screen

Enter the desired settings and enable the desired functions on each tab of the BESTCOMS Setting
Adjustments screen. Figures 6-5 through 6-9 illustrate the settings of each System Configuration screen
tab.
AVR/FCR
Configure the AVR mode and FCR mode settings illustrated in Figure 6-5. During commissioning, review
setpoints unique for starting; especially review those for the FCR (manual) mode where the system would
be started at the no-load excitation value or less. If pre-position is used, set the pre-position values as
required.
Enter the AVR setpoint based on the generator terminal voltage ................................................ ________
Enter the minimum desired AVR mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal ................. ________
Enter the maximum desired AVR mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal ................ ________
Enter the AVR mode traverse rate................................................................................................ ________
Enter the AVR mode pre-position setpoint ................................................................................... ________
Select either maintain or release as the AVR pre-position mode ................................................. ________
Enter the field current setpoint for FCR mode .............................................................................. ________
Enter the minimum desired FCR mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal ................. ________
Enter the maximum desired FCR mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal ................ ________
Enter the FCR mode traverse rate................................................................................................ ________
6-4 Setup DECS-200

Figure 6-5. AVR/FCR Tab
Enter the FCR mode pre-position setpoint ................................................................................... ________

Select either maintain or release as the FCR pre-position mode ................................................. ________
Var/PF
Configure the var mode and power factor mode settings illustrated in Figure 6-7. If var or PF mode is
enabled, the setpoint will be active only after transfer occurs into the specific mode because autotracking
always forces a null condition to any operating mode.
Figure 6-6. Var/PF Tab
DECS-200 Setup 6-5

Enter the var mode setpoint.......................................................................................................... ________
Enter the minimum desired var mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal.................... ________
Enter the maximum desired var mode setpoint, expressed as a percent of nominal................... ________
Enter the var mode traverse rate .................................................................................................. ________
Enter the var mode pre-position setpoint ...................................................................................... ________
Select either maintain or release as the var pre-position mode ................................................... ________
Set the voltage correction band for var and PF modes ................................................................ ________
Enter the PF mode setpoint .......................................................................................................... ________
Enter the limit for leading power factor ......................................................................................... ________
Enter the limit for lagging power factor ......................................................................................... ________
Enter the PF mode traverse rate................................................................................................... ________
Enter the PF mode pre-position setpoint ...................................................................................... ________
Select either maintain or release as the PF pre-position mode.................................................... ________
Startup
Configure the startup control, underfrequency, and voltage matching settings illustrated in Figure 6-7.
Figure 6-7. Startup Tab

Enter the soft-start voltage offset used during startup .................................................................. ________
Enter the soft-start time limit used during startup ......................................................................... ________
Enter the corner frequency for generator underfrequency protection........................................... ________
Enter the generator frequency slope for underfrequency protection ............................................ ________
Enter the voltage matching band, expressed as a percent of the rated generator voltage .......... ________
Enter the ratio (percentage) of the generator PT output to the bus PT output ............................. ________
6-6 Setup DECS-200

OEL Type
Select either Summing Point or Takeover as the overexcitation limiter style. Select the desired OEL
setting selection option. OEL Type tab selections are illustrated in Figure 6-8.
Figure 6-8. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL Type Tab
Summing-Point OEL
If summing-point overexcitation limiting is enabled, configure the off- and on-line OEL settings illustrated
in Figure 6-10.
Figure 6-9. OEL Summing Tab
DECS-200 Setup 6-7

Enter the high-level current setpoint for off-line overexcitation limiting ........................................ ________
Enter the duration for high-level, off-line overexcitation limiting ................................................... ________
Enter the low-level current setpoint for off-line overexcitation limiting.......................................... ________
Enter the high-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting ........................................ ________
Enter the duration for high-level, on-line overexcitation limiting ................................................... ________
Enter the medium-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting .................................. ________
Enter the duration for medium-level, on-line overexcitation limiting ............................................. ________
Enter the low-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting.......................................... ________
Takeover OEL
If takeover style overexcitation limiting is enabled, configure the off- and on-line OEL settings illustrated in
Figure 6-10.
Figure 6-10. Setting Adjustments Screen, OEL (Takeover) Tab
Enter the low-level current setpoint for off-line overexcitation limiting.......................................... ________
Enter the high-level current setpoint for off-line overexcitation limiting ........................................ ________
Enter the time delay for off-line overexcitation limiting ................................................................. ________
Enter the low-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting.......................................... ________
Enter the high-level current setpoint for on-line overexcitation limiting ........................................ ________
Enter the time delay for on-line overexcitation limiting ................................................................. ________
UEL
Set the underexcitation limiter values based on the generator capability curve. Either internal or
customized UEL settings can be applied. When internal UEL settings are used, only one data point is
required. When customized UEL settings are used, up to five data coordinates may be entered to match a
specific generator curve. Figure 6-11 illustrates the settings of the UEL tab.
6-8 Setup DECS-200

Figure 6-11. UEL Tab
SCL
Configure the stator current limiter settings illustrated in Figure 6-12.
Figure 6-12. Setting Adjustments Screen, SCL Tab

Enter the high-level current setpoint for stator current limiting ..................................................... ________
Enter the duration for high-level stator current limiting ................................................................. ________
Enter the low-level current setpoint for stator current limiting....................................................... ________
DECS-200 Setup 6-9

Protection/Relay Screen
Enter the desired settings and enable the desired functions on each tab of the BESTCOMS
Protection/Relay screen. Figures 6-13 through 6-16 illustrate the settings of each Protection/Relay screen
tab.
Options
Enable/disable the protection functions and configure the loss of sensing voltage settings illustrated in
Figure 6-13.
Figure 6-13. Protection Options Tab

Enable or disable generator overvoltage protection ..................................................................... ________
Enable or disable field overvoltage protection .............................................................................. ________
Enable or disable open exciter diode protection........................................................................... ________
Enable or disable generator undervoltage protection ................................................................... ________
Enable or disable field overcurrent protection .............................................................................. ________
Enable or disable shorted exciter diode protection....................................................................... ________
Enable or disable loss of field protection ...................................................................................... ________
Enable or disable loss of sensing voltage protection.................................................................... ________
Enter the time delay for loss of sensing annunciation .................................................................. ________
Enter the balanced loss of sensing threshold ............................................................................... ________
Enter the unbalanced loss of sensing threshold ........................................................................... ________
Enable or disable a transfer to FCR mode when loss of sensing is detected .............................. ________
Settings
Enter the protection settings illustrated in Figure 6-14. Only protection functions enabled on the Options
tab need to be configured here.
Enter the threshold for generator overvoltage protection ............................................................. ________
Enter the time delay for generator overvoltage protection............................................................ ________
6-10 Setup DECS-200

Figure 6-14. Protection Settings Tab
Enter the threshold for field overvoltage protection ...................................................................... ________

Enter the time delay for field overvoltage protection..................................................................... ________
Enter the percent of rated field current that indicates an open exciter diode ............................... ________
Enter the percent of rated field current that disables open- and shorted-diode protection .......... ________
Enter the annunciation time delay for open exciter diode protection............................................ ________
Enter the threshold for generator undervoltage protection ........................................................... ________
Enter the time delay for generator undervoltage protection ......................................................... ________
Enter the threshold for field overcurrent protection ...................................................................... ________
Enter the time delay for field overcurrent protection ..................................................................... ________
Enter the percent of rated field current that indicates a shorted exciter diode ............................. ________
Enter the annunciation time delay for shorted exciter diode protection........................................ ________
Enter the threshold for loss of field protection .............................................................................. ________
Enter the time delay for loss of field protection............................................................................. ________
Relay Logic
Review the excitation system interconnection drawings and verify the relay configurations. Relay logic
settings for each of the three DECS-200 programmable outputs are contained on two tabs with identical
configuration options. Only the tab for Relays 1 and 2 is illustrated here (Figure 6-15). Table 6-2 lists all of
the available functions that can be assigned to the programmable outputs. Checkmarks may be placed in
Table 6-2 to identify the functions assigned to each relay output.
DECS-200 Setup 6-11

Figure 6-15. Relay #1, #2 Logic Tab
Table 6-2. Programmable Output Function Assignments

Relay
Function 1 2 3
Generator overvoltage
Generator undervoltage
Loss of sensing voltage
Open exciter diode
Loss of field
Field overvoltage
Field overcurrent
Sensing input below 10 Hz
Shorted exciter diode
FCR mode
Upper setpoint limit
Lower setpoint limit
Overexcitation limit
Underexcitation limit
Underfrequency or V/Hz limit
Stator current limit
6-12 Setup DECS-200

Relay Setting
Configure the contact status and type settings illustrated in Figure 6-16.
Select the Relay #1 contact status as normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) ................... ________
Configure the Relay #1 contact type as momentary, maintained, or latched ............................... ________
If the Relay #2 contact type is momentary, enter the open/closed contact duration .................... ________
Figure 6-16. Relay Setting Tab
OFF-LINE TESTS - TURBINE NOT SPINNING

In the following tests, control of the machine is demonstrated via BESTCOMS, front panel HMI, and user-
supplied, remote switches. These tests ensure that the machine is not stressed because of incorrect
wiring or faulty components. The parameters listed here are only temporary, initial settings.
Start/Stop Tests
Check the operation of the following start and stop controls.
BESTCOMS Metering Screen, Operation tab .............................................................................. ________
DECS-200 front panel................................................................................................................... ________

Remote switches........................................................................................................................... ________
With excitation off, check AVR/FCR transfer from the BESTCOMS, the front panel, and
remote switches ............................................................................................................................ ________
DECS-200 Setup 6-13

Verify transfer indications from the remote status indicators, front panel HMI, or
BESTCOMS interface ................................................................................................................... ________
Check the raise and lower limits ................................................................................................... ________
Verify raise/lower limit indications from the remote status indicators, front panel HMI,
or BESTCOMS interface............................................................................................................... ________
Control Gain Settings

Configure the initial gain settings.
Set the generator no-load setpoint in FCR mode (20% of exciter rated current recommended). ________
On the Control Gain screen, enter 200 in the FCR loop gain settings field.................................. ________
Enter the following recommended gain settings for OEL, UEL, and Var/PF.
Set OEL KI at 3 ............................................................................................................................. ________
Set OEL Kg at 5 ............................................................................................................................ ________
Set UEL KI at 3 ............................................................................................................................. ________
Set UEL Kg at 5 ............................................................................................................................ ________
Set var/PF KI at 3.......................................................................................................................... ________
Set var/PF Kg at 5......................................................................................................................... ________
PID Settings
On the Control Gain screen, click the tool bar PID button to open the PID window. (The Control Gain
screen Stability Range setting must be 21.) Use the PID window to select the correct PID values based
on generator time constant T’do and exciter time constant Te. For more information about PID settings,
refer to Section 5, BESTCOMS Software, PID Window.
NOTE
If proper startup is not achieved, increase the value of loop gain (Kg) for AVR
and FCR modes.
The following suggested settings may be used for AVR and FCR modes when the generator and exciter
time constants are unknown.
Set KP at 80 .................................................................................................................................. ________
Set KI at 20 ................................................................................................................................... ________
Set KD at 15.................................................................................................................................. ________
Set AVR Kg at 7 ............................................................................................................................ ________
Set TD at 0.01 ............................................................................................................................... ________
Set FCR Kg at 400 ........................................................................................................................ ________
Verify transfer indications from the remote status indicators, front panel HMI or BESTCOMS
OFF-LINE TESTS - TURBINE SPINNING

For off-line tests with the turbine spinning, the generator circuit breaker is open.
FCR Mode
Initial testing should be conducted in FCR (manual) mode and minimum generated voltage.
Place the DECS-200 in FCR mode............................................................................................... ________
Place the Start/Stop switch in the Start position ........................................................................... ________
6-14 Setup DECS-200

Generator output voltage should build to a percentage of the rated voltage. (The FCR setpoint was set at
20% of the no-load excitation current in a previous step.)............................................................ ________
Increase the exciter field rated current to 75% of current............................................................. ________
The generator output voltage should build to a percentage of the rated voltage ......................... ________
Use an oscilloscope to check the field voltage for proper output (see Figure 6-17)..................... ________
Figure 6-17. Field Voltage Output Waveform

Use a voltmeter to check for correct voltage at generator sensing voltage terminals A1 (E1),
A2 (E2), and A3 (E3)..................................................................................................................... ________
Measure the PT secondary voltages ............................................................................................ ________
Use the Raise/Lower control to raise the terminal voltage to the rated generator level ............... ________
Place the Start/Stop switch in the Stop position and let the generator voltage decrease to
the residual level ........................................................................................................................... ________
Place the Start/Stop switch in the Start position to initiate buildup again in FCR mode .............. ________
Record the voltage buildup characteristic as it reaches full, rated output .................................... ________
Using the BESTCOMS Analysis Screen, perform 5% step change in FCR mode....................... ________
Decrease value, then increase the value. Observe stable performance with chart recorder. ...... ________
Note the Overshoot and settling time. (The FCR output should be very stable.) ......................... ________
Verify that the AVR setpoint tracks the FCR setpoint, then transfer. During this test, use the
NOTE
In the following steps, verify that, if the pre-position setpoint is enabled, the
setpoint changes to the assigned value.
Verify that FCR autotracking follows, and is nulled to AVR, then transfer ................................... ________
Use a chart recorder or BESTCOMS oscillography to perform a step response in AVR mode ... ________
Review the PID numbers .............................................................................................................. ________
On the System Options tab of the BESTCOMS System Configuration screen, turn all
limiters off...................................................................................................................................... ________
Perform a 2% voltage step response and record performance to verify stability ......................... ________
Adjust the PID values until desired performance is achieved. If performance appears stable,
repeat step change at 5%.. ........................................................................................................... ________
NOTE
Assuming Te (exciter field) is known (as applicable for exciter field voltage
regulator applications), increasing Kg will decrease the response time of the
generator. See Figure 6-21.
DECS-200 Setup 6-15

Figure 6-18. KG Gain Effect on Generator Performance
When individual adjustment is needed to further refine performance, Figures 6-22 through 6-25
demonstrate the effect that PID changes have for additional control. These figures have a one second
major division.
In Figure 6-22, the generator voltage exhibits one under-damp (overshoot) and one over-damp
(undershoot) before settling. The total time (five seconds) is too long. Here KP (proportional gain) needs
to be increased.
Figure 6-19. Insufficient Proportional Gain
Figure 6-23 demonstrates that the terminal voltage has prolonged instability after a voltage step change
because there is too much integral gain (I). Integral gain value needs to be decreased.
Figure 6-20. Prolonged Instability
6-16 Setup DECS-200

In Figure 6-24, less overshoot is desired, KD (derivative gain) is increased.
Figure 6-21. Insufficient Derivative Gain
Figure 6-25 illustrates the final solution. Increased KD (derivative gain) decreases voltage overshoot.
Figure 6-22. Final Solution Step Response
Place the Start/Stop Switch in the Stop position........................................................................... ________

Place the system in AVR mode .................................................................................................... ________
Monitor the generator voltage soft start time ................................................................................ ________
Place the Start/Stop Switch in the Start position .......................................................................... ________
Use the Raise/Lower control to increase the terminal voltage to the setpoint.............................. ________
EXCITATION PERFORMANCE EVALUATION

In this performance evaluation, temporarily settings will be used to enable the testing of excitation
performance without stressing the machine or exceeding ancillary protection device settings. Procedures
are provided that will allow you to set your final operating values. This evaluation is a continuation of the
previous tests.
Off-Line Excitation Limiter Operation

In this test, with the generator set below the rated voltage output, the AVR setpoint will be set above the
maximum setting and the system should annunciate an alarm. If an alarm is not annuciated, the OEL gain
(KI and Kg) may be set too low. If an alarm is annunciated and the system oscillates, the OEL gain, (KI
and Kg) may be set too high.
Enable the Off-Line Overexcitation Limiter (OEL) ........................................................................ ________
Determine the field current required to reach 105% of the rated generator voltage. ................... ________
Set the off-line OEL for a value equal to the no load field current ................................................ ________
Lower the terminal voltage to 10% below rated............................................................................ ________
To speed performance in the following test, you may increase the OEL gain (KI and Kg terms).
On the AVR/FCR tab of the BESTCOMS Setting Adjustments screen, adjust the AVR setpoint
to 110% of the rated output. (the AVR Max setting should remain at 105%.) .............................. ________
DECS-200 Setup 6-17

If an output relay is programmed to alarm, the output, BESTCOMS, front panel HMI, and
any remote indicator should annunciate the alarm. ...................................................................... ________
Reset the AVR setpoint to the rated output .................................................................................. ________
Limit and Protection Check

In this test, operation of generator overvoltage protection, generator undervoltage protection, field
overvoltage protection, and field overcurrent protection will be verified.
Review the overvoltage protection settings in BESTCOMS ......................................................... ________
Reduce the Generator Overvoltage Level setting to the alarm threshold..................................... ________
Verify that all alarms and annunciation function as programmed................................................. ________
Reset the generator Overvoltage Level setting to the desired value............................................ ________
Raise the Generator Undervoltage Level setting to the alarm threshold...................................... ________
Verify that all alarms and annunciations function as programmed ............................................... ________
Reset the Generator Undervoltage Level setting to the desired value ......................................... ________
Reduce the Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting to the alarm threshold ................................. ________
Verify that all alarms and annunciations function as programmed ............................................... ________
Reduce the Exciter Field Overvoltage Level setting to the desired value .................................... ________
Reduce the Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting to the alarm threshold ................................. ________
Verify all alarms and annunciations function as programmed ...................................................... ________
Reset the Exciter Field Overcurrent Level setting to the desired value........................................ ________
Parallel Operation, Generator On Line

In this test, the generator is connected to the bus and the phase relationship between the current and
sensed voltage is checked. If the polarity of the CT is incorrect, a shorting terminal block can be used to
reverse the CT polarity. If sensed voltage has the wrong phasing, the generator breaker must be opened,
and the wiring corrected. In the following procedures, overexcitation and underexcitation protection is
exercised, and var and power factor performance evaluations are conducted at levels that will not stress
the machine. For more information about paralleling circuits, download Application Note 126 from the
Basler Electric website at www.basler.com.
Phase Relationship Test
Transfer to FCR mode .................................................................................................................. ________
Parallel the generator with the bus ............................................................................................... ________
Set the machine kilowatt level at approximately 25% of the machine rating at 0 vars ................. ________
Check for phase shift at the voltage and current sensing inputs of the DECS-200.
The B-phase current should lag the sensed voltage (between E1 and E3) by 90°. If the
phase relationship is correct, proceed with testing. If the phase relationship is incorrect,
troubleshoot the system, resolve the problem, and retest as appropriate before transferring
to AVR mode................................................................................................................................. ________
Verify that the AVR setpoint is nulled to the FCR setpoint ........................................................... ________
Verify that all null status indicators provide the null indication...................................................... ________
Verify that AVR Pre-position mode is disabled or that the external pre-position contacts
are open. ....................................................................................................................................... ________
In the following step, be prepared to transfer back to Manual mode if the excitation voltage increases
suddenly.
Transfer to AVR ............................................................................................................................ ________
6-18 Setup DECS-200

OEL Test
Disable overexcitation limiting on the System Options tab of the BESTCOMS System
Configuration screen..................................................................................................................... ________
Set the three on-line, OEL current limits at 15% above the no-load field current, with
a 5 second time delay ................................................................................................................... ________
Using a chart recorder, prepare to check the OEL response time. If the response time is too slow,
increase the OEL gain (KI and Kg terms) and repeat the test.
Increase field excitation until the field current reaches 125% of the no load field current setting ________
Enable OEL................................................................................................................................... ________
Verify that the response time is within specified limits.................................................................. ________
Enter final OEL values .................................................................................................................. ________
UEL Test
Disable underexcitation limiting on the System Options tab of the BESTCOMS System
Configuration screen..................................................................................................................... ________
Set the UEL var limit for 5% vars into the generator..................................................................... ________
Adjust the var level into the generator for 15% at 25% load......................................................... ________
Perform a step response into the UEL limit by enabling underexcitation limiting on the System
Options tab of the BESTCOMS System Configuration screen..................................................... ________
Verify stable performance and speed of response ....................................................................... ________
If the response time is too slow, increase the UEL gain (KI and Kg terms) and repeat the test .. ________
Verify stable performance of the UEL by testing the machine from 25 through 100%
real-power loading, underexcited.................................................................................................. ________
Increase the excitation above the UEL limit.................................................................................. ________
Enter the final UEL values ............................................................................................................ ________
Var Test (If Applicable)
Verify that the var setpoint is nulled to the AVR setpoint.............................................................. ________
Verify that all null status indicators provide a null indication......................................................... ________
Verify that the var Pre-Position mode is disabled or the external pre-position contacts are open ________
In the following step, be prepared to transfer back to AVR if the excitation voltage increases suddenly.
Transfer to var mode..................................................................................................................... ________
Set the kilowatt level for 25% output............................................................................................. ________
Adjust the var level to 30% of rated .............................................................................................. ________
Monitor the exciter field voltage to determine performance while performing the following step.
Using BESTCOMS, perform 5% step response stability test ....................................................... ________
If necessary, increase the var gain, (KI and Kg terms) to decrease the response time.
Repeat the test..............................................................................................................................
Power Factor Test (If Applicable)
Verify that the PF mode setpoint is nulled to the var mode setpoint ............................................ ________
Verify that all null status indicators provide a null indication......................................................... ________
Verify that PF Pre-Position mode is disabled or external pre-position contacts are open............ ________
In the following step, be prepared to transfer back to AVR mode if the excitation voltage increases
suddenly.
Transfer to PF ............................................................................................................................... ________
DECS-200 Setup 6-19

Adjust PF for 0.9, lagging.............................................................................................................. ________
Perform a step response by changing PF setpoint to 0.85, lagging to determine stability........... ________
If necessary, increase the PF gain (KI and Kg terms) to decrease the response time.
Repeat the test.............................................................................................................................. ________
Conclusion Of Testing
Configure the excitation system with the required parameters. Once satisfactory performance is achieved,
save all information to EEPROM.
6-20 Setup DECS-200

SECTION 7 • MODBUS™ COMMUNICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 7 • MODBUS¥ COMMUNICATION .........................................................................................7-1

INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................... 7-1
DECS-200 MODBUS PROTOCOL ........................................................................................................ 7-1
MESSAGE STRUCTURE....................................................................................................................... 7-1
Device Address Field.......................................................................................................................... 7-1
Function Code Field............................................................................................................................ 7-2
Data Block Field.................................................................................................................................. 7-2
Error Check Field................................................................................................................................ 7-2
SERIAL TRANSMISSION DETAILS ...................................................................................................... 7-2
Message Framing and Timing Considerations ................................................................................... 7-3
Error Handling and Exception Responses.......................................................................................... 7-3
COMMUNICATIONS HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... 7-3
DETAILED MESSAGE QUERY AND RESPONSE ................................................................................ 7-4
Read Holding Registers...................................................................................................................... 7-4
Preset Multiple Registers.................................................................................................................... 7-4
Preset Single Register (Write Single Holding Register) ..................................................................... 7-5
Error Response................................................................................................................................... 7-5
Loop Back Diagnostic Test (FC= 8) with Diagnostic Sub-function, Return Query Data .................... 7-6
Loop Back Diagnostic Test with Diagnostic Sub-function, Restart Communications Option............. 7-6
Loop Back Diagnostic Test with Diagnostic Sub-function, Force Slave to Listen Only Mode............ 7-6
DATA FORMATS ................................................................................................................................... 7-6
Generic Types UI8 and I8................................................................................................................... 7-7
Generic Types UI16 and I16............................................................................................................... 7-7
Generic Types UI32 and I32............................................................................................................... 7-7
Floating Point (R23_32) Data Format................................................................................................. 7-8
CRC ERROR CHECK ............................................................................................................................ 7-9
DECS-200 MODBUS REGISTER SPACE ............................................................................................. 7-9
DECS-200 REGISTER TABLE............................................................................................................. 7-10
Holding Registers for Information Category C1................................................................................ 7-10
Holding Registers for Information Category C10.............................................................................. 7-22
Tables
Table 7-1. DECS-200 Communication Settings ........................................................................................ 7-2
Table 7-2. Timing Considerations For 10 Character Bits (8 Data Bits + 1 Start Bit + 1 Stop Bit) ............. 7-3
Table 7-3. Supported Exception Response Codes.................................................................................... 7-3
Table 7-4. Generic Data Types and Description........................................................................................ 7-7
Table 7-5. HR 44005 Contents .................................................................................................................. 7-7
Table 7-6. HR 47003 Mapping................................................................................................................... 7-7
TM
DECS-200 Modbus Communication i
Table 7-7. Typical Mapping........................................................................................................................ 7-8
Table 7-8. Floating Point Format ............................................................................................................... 7-8
Table 7-9. Number 123 In Floating Point Format ...................................................................................... 7-8
Table 7-10. Information Category Summary.............................................................................................. 7-9
Table 7-11. Information Category C1 (Product Information) ................................................................... 7-10
Table 7-12. Information Category C2 (Metering) ..................................................................................... 7-12
Table 7-13. Information Category C3 (Reporting) ................................................................................... 7-14
Table 7-14. Information Category C4 (Control System Configuration Parameters) ................................ 7-14
Table 7-15. Information Category C5 (Operating Mode Parameters) ..................................................... 7-15
Table 7-16. Information Category C6 (Setpoint Parameters) .................................................................. 7-17
Table 7-17. Information Category C7 (Start-up Parameters) .................................................................. 7-19
Table 7-18. Information Category C8 (Limiter Parameters) .................................................................... 7-20
Table 7-19. Information Category C9 (Control Loop Gain Parameters) .................................................. 7-21
Table 7-20. Information Category C10 (Protective Functions Parameters)............................................. 7-22
Table 7-21. Information Category C11 (Calibration related Parameters) ................................................ 7-23
Table 7-22. Information Category C12 (Relay Parameters) .................................................................... 7-23
Table 7-23. Information Category C13 (Communications Parameters) .................................................. 7-26
Table 7-24. Information Category C14 (Front Panel Metering Configuration Parameters) ..................... 7-27
Table 7-25. Information Category C15 (Control System Configuration Parameters Group II) ................ 7-27
TM
ii Modbus Communication DECS-200
SECTION 7 • MODBUS™ COMMUNICATION
INTRODUCTION
This section describes the Modbus™communication protocol employed by the DECS-200 and how to
exchange information with the DECS-200 over a Modbus™network. The DECS-200 communicates by
TM
emulating a subset of the Modicon 984 Programmable Controller.
DECS-200 MODBUS PROTOCOL

Modbus communications use a master-slave technique in which only the master can initiate a transaction
called a query. When appropriate, a slave (DECS-200 ) responds to the query. When a Modbus master
communicates with a slave, information is provided or requested by the master.
Information residing in the DECS-200 is grouped characteristically in categories. The following information
categories are maintained by the DECS-200:
C1 - Product Information Registers
C2 - Metering Registers
C3 - Reporting Registers
C4 - Control System Configuration Parameters Registers Group 1
C5 - Operating Mode Parameter Registers
C6 - Setpoints Parameter Registers
C7 - Startup Parameter Registers
C8 - Limiter Parameter Registers
C9 - Gains Registers
C10 - Protective Functions Parameter Registers
C11 - Calibration Parameter Registers
C12 - Relay Parameter Registers
C13 - Communications Parameter Registers
C14 - Front Panel Metering Configuration Registers
C15 - Control System Configuration Parameters Registers Group 2
All supported data can be read or written as specified in the register table. Abbreviations are used in the
register table to indicate the register access type. Register access types are read/write (RW) and read
only (R -).
All categories except Product Information (C1), Metering (C2), Reporting (C3) and Calibration (C11) can
generally be written via a Modbus message as well as read. Categories C1 and C2 are strictly read-only.
(Categories C3 and C11 are currently not supported and therefore cannot be read or written.)
When a slave receives a query, the slave responds by either supplying the requested data to the master
or performing the requested action. A slave device never initiates communications on the Modbus
network and will always generate a response to the query unless certain error conditions occur. The
DECS-200 is designed to communicate on the Modbus network only as a slave device.
A master can only query slaves individually. If a query requests actions unable to be performed by the
slave, the slave response message contains an exception response code defining the error detected.
MESSAGE STRUCTURE
Master initiated queries and DECS-200 (slave) responses share the same message structure. Each
message is comprised of four message fields. They are:
• Device Address (1 byte)
• Function Code (1 byte)
• Data Block (n bytes)
• Error Check field (2 bytes)
Device Address Field
The device address field contains the unique Modbus address of the slave being queried. The addressed
slave repeats the address in the device address field of the response message. This field is one byte.
DECS-200 Modbus™ Communication 7-1

Modbus protocol limits a device address from 1 to 247. The address is user-selectable at installation, and
can be altered during real-time operation.
Function Code Field

The function code field in the query message defines the action to be taken by the addressed slave. This
field is echoed in the response message and is altered by setting the most significant bit (MSB) of the
field to 1 if the response is an error response. This field is 1 byte.
TM
The DECS-200 maps all registers into the Modicon 984 holding register address space (4XXXX) and
supports the following function codes:
- READ OUTPUT REGISTERS (function code 3),
- PRESET SINGLE REGISTER WRITE (function code 6)
- PRESET MULTIPLE REGISTERS (function code 16), and
- LOOPBACK DIAGNOSTIC TEST (function code 8) with diagnostic sub-functions:
- Return Query Data (diagnostic code 0),
- Restart Comm. option (diagnostic code 1), and
- Force Slave To Listen Only Mode (LOM, diagnostic code 4).
DECS-200 Modbus performs all of the above functions when a Modbus message has its unique address
which is numbered from 1 to 247. DECS-200 also recognizes a broadcast (group) address of 0. Only
functions 16 and 8 are recognized as valid for broadcast. The DECS-200 does not send a response
message for a broadcast query.
In listen-only mode (LOM), received data is monitored (but no responses are transmitted). The only query
that will be recognized and processed while in LOM is a maintenance restart command (function code 8,
diagnostic code 1).
Data Block Field

The query data block contains additional information needed by the slave to perform the requested
function. The response data block contains data collected by the slave for the queried function. An error
response will substitute an exception response code for the data block. The length of this field varies with
each query. See the paragraphs on Register Definitions in this manual for interpretation of register data.
Error Check Field

The error check field provides a method for the slave to validate the integrity of the query message
contents and allows the master to confirm there validity. This field is 2 bytes.
SERIAL TRANSMISSION DETAILS

A standard Modbus network offers two transmission modes for communication: ASCII or Remote
Terminal Unit (RTU). The DECS-200 supports only the RTU mode via rear RS-485 serial interface.
Communication settings for the DECS-200 Rear RS-485 port are listed in Table 7-1.
Table 7-1. DECS-200 Communication Settings
Default
Setting Programmable Y(Yes) / N(No) Value Value Range
Baud Rate Y 9600 1200/2400/4800/9600/19200
Data Size in Bits N 8 N/A
Parity Y None ‘N’=None, ‘O’=Odd, ‘E’=Even
Stop Bits Y 2 1 or 2
Modbus Slave Y 247 0 for broadcast, 1 to 247 for slave
Address
Modbus Y 10 ms From 0 to 200 ms in increments of
Response Delay 10 ms
Time in ms
Communication settings are user-selectable and can be set at installation and altered during real-time
operation.
7-2 Modbus™ Communication DECS-200

Message Framing and Timing Considerations
When receiving a message, the DECS-200 requires an inter-byte latency of 3.5 character times before
considering the message complete.
Once a valid query is received, the DECS-200 waits a specified amount of time as specified in the
Modbus Response Delay Time Register (48108) before responding. This Register contains a value from
0 to 200 milliseconds. The default value is 10 milliseconds. The user may set the remote delay time
parameter to 0 to minimize response latency.
Table 7-2 provides the response message transmission time (in milliseconds) and 3.5 character times (in
milliseconds) for the maximum response message length (225 characters), response to a read query for
125 points and various baud rates.
Table 7-2. Timing Considerations For 10 Character Bits (8 Data Bits + 1 Start Bit + 1 Stop Bit)
1 Character 3.5 Characters Max. Read Register Response Message
Baud Rate Time (ms) Time (ms) (255 characters) Transmission Time (ms)
1,200 8.33 29.17 2,124.15
2,400 4.17 14.58 1,063.35
4,800 2.083 7.292 531.165
9,600 1.0417 3.645 265.6335
19,200 0.52083 1.823 132.812
Error Handling and Exception Responses

Any query received that contains a nonexistent device address, a framing error, or CRC error is ignored.
No response is transmitted. Queries addressed to a DECS-200 with an unsupported function code,
unsupported register references or illegal values in the data block result in an error response message
with an exception response code.
Each error response message consists of a slave (DECS-200) address, function code with the high order
bit set, error code and error check (CRC) field.
The exception response error codes supported by the DECS-200 are provided in Table 7-3.
Table 7-3. Supported Exception Response Codes
Code Name Meaning
01 Illegal Function The query Function/Sub-function Code is unsupported; query read of more
than 125 registers; query “preset multiple registers” of more than 100
registers
02 Illegal Data A register referenced in the data block does not support queried read/write;
Address For Function Codes 3 and 16 additionally:
1. Starting Register address is mapped to DECS-200 Modbus address
space but is not referenced to the highest order 16 bits of the assigned
application data (see explanation in 2.7 Data Formats), and
2. The number of registers is too small to hold entire value of all data
(variables) assigned to those registers (see explanation in 2.7 Data
Formats).
03 Illegal Data A preset register data block contains an incorrect number of bytes or one or
Value more data values out of range.
COMMUNICATIONS HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

The DECS-200 RS-485 physical interface consists of three positions of a terminal strip with locations for
Send/Receive A (A), Send/Receive B (B) and Signal Ground (C).

DETAILED MESSAGE QUERY AND RESPONSE
A detailed description of DECS-200 supported message queries and responses are provided in the
Read Holding Registers

Query
This query message requests a register or block of registers to be read. The data block contains the
starting register address and the quantity of registers to be read. A register address of N will read holding
register N+1.
Function Starting Starting No. of No. of CRC CRC
Device
Code = Address Address Registers Registers Low High
Address
03 High Low High Low
The number of registers cannot exceed 125 without causing an error response with the exception code
for an illegal function.
Response
The response message contains the data queried. The data block contains the block length in bytes
followed by the data for each requested register. For each requested register, there is one Data Hi and
one Data Lo. Attempting to read an unused register or a register that does not support a read results in
an error response with the exception code for an illegal data address. If the query is a broadcast (device
address = 0), no response message is returned.
Maximum response message length obtained for query of 125 registers is 5 + (125 x 2) = 255 bytes.
Device Function Byte Data Data For each Data Data CRC CRC
Address Code = 03 Count High Low requested High Low Low High
register
250 First First Data High Last Last
max. queried queried and data queried queried
register register Low register register
High Low High Low
Preset Multiple Registers

A preset multiple registers query could address multiple registers in one slave or multiple slaves. If the
query is broadcast (device address = 0), no response is required.
Query
A Preset Multiple Registers query message requests a register or block of registers to be written. The
data block contains the starting address and the quantity of registers to be written, followed by the Data
Block byte count and data. The DECS-200 will perform the write when the device address is the same as
the DECS-200 remote address or when the device address is 0. A device address is 0 for a broadcast
query.
A register address of N will write Holding Register N+1.
All Modbus Generic Data Formats can be loaded by this function (see Data Formats).
No data will be written if any of the following exceptions occur:
• Queries to write to Read Only or unsupported registers result in an error response with an exception
code of Illegal Data Address.
• Queries attempting to write more than 100 registers cause an error response with an exception code
of Illegal Function.
• An incorrect Byte Count will result in an error response with an exception code of “Illegal Function.”
• A query to write an illegal value (out of range) to a register results in an error response with an
exception code of Illegal Data Value.
• Query Starting Register address is mapped to DECS-200 Modbus address space but is not
referenced to the lower order 16 bits of the assigned application data. (See explanation in Data
Formats.)
• The number of query registers is too small to hold entire value of all data (variables) assigned to
those registers. (See explanation in Data Formats.)
Query message format is:
Device Address
Function Code = 10 (hex)
Starting Address High
Starting Address Low
Number of Registers High (total number of registers to be loaded)
Number of Registers Low
Byte Count (total number of registers to be loaded times 2)
Data High
Data Low
...
Data High
Data Low
CRC Error Check (Lo, Hi)
Note: The maximum length of a Preset Multiple Registers Query is 9 + (100 x 2) = 209 bytes.
Response
The response message echoes the starting address and the number of registers. There is no response
message when the query is a broadcast (device address of 0).
Device Function Starting Starting Number of Number of CRC CRC
Address Code = Address Address Registers Registers Low High
10 (hex) High Low High
Low
Preset Single Register (Write Single Holding Register)

A Preset Single Register query message requests a single register to be written. The DECS-200 will
perform the write when the device address is the same as the DECS-200’s remote address.
Query
Device Address
Function Code = 06 (hex)
Address Hi
Address Lo
Data Hi
Data Lo
CRC Hi error check
CRC Lo error check
The response message echoes the Query message after the register has been altered.
Error Response
Data will cease to be written if any of the following exceptions occur.
• Queries to write to Read Only registers result in an error response with Exception Code of “Illegal Data
Address.”
• A query to write an out of range value to a register results in an error response with Exception Code of
“Illegal Data Value.”
There are several instances of registers that are grouped together to collectively represent a single
numerical DECS-200 data value (i.e., floating point data and 32-bit integer data). A query to write a
subset of such a register group will result in an error response with Exception Code “Illegal Data
Address”.

NOTE
Variables changed by this function will not be directly saved to nonvolatile memory (EEPROM). If
specific categories (one or more) of data have to be saved to EEPROM, then Holding Register 48161
(Data Id=13001, variable “SaveCommand”) has to be preset after a category has been changed. The
exceptions to this rule are only those Holding Registers dealing with communication port RS-485.
They will be changed and immediately saved to EEPROM with the function FC16.
Loop Back Diagnostic Test (FC= 8) with Diagnostic Sub-function, Return Query Data
This query contains data to be returned (looped back) in the response. The response and query
messages should be identical. If the query is a broadcast (device address = 0), no response message is
returned.
Function Sub-function Sub-function Data High Data Low CRC CRC
Device Code = High Low
Address XX XX Low High
08 (hex) 00 00 (don’t care) (don’t care)
Loop Back Diagnostic Test with Diagnostic Sub-function, Restart Communications Option
This query causes the remote communications function of the DECS-200 to restart, terminating an active
listen only mode of operation. No effect is made upon primary relay operations. Only the remote
communications function is affected. If the query is a broadcast (device address of 0), no response
message is returned.
If the DECS-200 receives this query while in the listen only mode (LOM), no response message is
generated. Otherwise, a response message identical to the query message is transmitted prior to the
communications restart.
Function Sub-function Sub-function Data High Data Low CRC CRC

Device Code = High Low
Address XX XX Low High
Loop Back Diagnostic Test with Diagnostic Sub-function, Force Slave to Listen Only Mode
This query forces the addressed DECS-200 to the listen only mode for Modbus communications, isolating
it from other devices on the network.
While in Listen Only Mode (LOM), received data is monitored (but no responses are transmitted). The
only query that will be recognized and processed while in LOM is a maintenance restart command
(function Code 8, diagnostic code 1).
When the DECS-200 receives the restart communications query, the Listen Only mode is terminated.
Device Function Sub-function Sub-function Data High Data Low CRC CRC
Address Code = High Low XX XX Low High
DATA FORMATS
DECS-200 data does not need to be converted into any special format for transmission over a Modbus
network.
Modbus Registers hold original DECS-200 data of the generic (built-in) data types listed in Table 7-4.

Table 7-4. Generic Data Types and Description
Data Total number
Generi Size of Modbus
c Data Corresponding built-in data in Registers to
Types type (Storage Format) Data Range bytes hold data
UI8 UCHAR: unsigned character 0 to 255 1 1
UI6 UINT16: unsigned short integer 0 to 65,535 2 1
UI32 UINT32: unsigned long integer 0 to 4,294,967,295 4 2
I8 CHAR: signed character -128 to 127 1 1
I16 INT16: signed short integer -32,768 to 32,767 2 1
I32 INT32: signed long integer -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 4 2
-37
R32_23 FLOAT: floating point number From approximately 8.43 x 10 4 2
38
to 3.38 x 10
It should be noted that an ASCII string is not a DECS-200 generic data type. An ASCII string will be
considered as a sequence of “(string length + 1)” data of I8 type, and for its transmission via a Modbus
network “(string length + 1)” holding registers are needed.
DECS-200 data is copied to assigned Holding Register(s) [HR] by the rules presented in the following
paragraphs.
Generic Types UI8 and I8

Data of type UI8 or I8 is copied to one holding register (HR). The high (first) HR byte always contains 0,
and second (low) HR byte contains the data.
Example:
Assume that the value of UI8 type data is 0x56, and that the data is mapped to HR 44005.
The content of HR 44005 will be as listed in Table 7-5.
Table 7-5. HR 44005 Contents
HR 44004 HR 44005 HR 44005 HR 44006
Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte
... 0x00 0x56 ...

Data of type UINT16 or INT16 is saved in 1 one holding register. The high data byte is copied to the high
HR byte and the low data byte to the low HR byte.
Example:
Assume that the DECS-200 UINT16 or INT16 type data value of 0xF067 is mapped to HR 47003.
Data is copied to HR 47003 as shown in Table 7-6.
Table 7-6. HR 47003 Mapping
HR 47002 HR 47003 HR 47003 HR 47004
Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte
... 0xF0 0x67 ...

Data of type UI32 or I32 is 4 bytes long. The Modbus 4-byte long data generic types use two consecutive
registers to represent a data value. The lower numbered holding register contains the low order 16 bits,
Low Order word [LO w] and the higher numbered holding register contains the higher order 16 bits,
Higher Order word [HO w].

Example:
The UI32 data type, value is 0xE0234567 and is mapped to two Holding registers (such as 45003 and
45004) as shown in Table 7-7.
Table 7-7. Typical Mapping
Register 45003 45004
Hexadecimal 4567 E023
Binary 0100 0101 0110 0111 1110 0000 0010 0011
HR 45002 HR 45003 HR 45003 HR 45004 HR 45004 HR 45005

LO byte HO byte LO byte HO byte LO byte HO byte
... 45 67 E0 23 ...
Floating Point (R23_32) Data Format

The specific floating-point format matches the floating-point format used for Modicon 984-8 family of
programmable controllers.
Its representation in bit format is:

S EEE EEEE E MMM MMMM MMMM MMMM MMMM
MMMM
byte 3 byte 2 byte 1 Byte 0
where the “S” is the sign bit for the floating point value: 1 if negative and 0 if positive; The “E” field is the
two’s complement exponent biased by 127 decimal; The “M” field is the 23-bit normalized mantissa. The
most-significant bit of the mantissa is always assumed to be 1 and is not explicitly stored yielding an
effective precision of 24 bits.
The value of the floating-point number is obtained by multiplying the binary mantissa times two raised to the
power of the unbiased exponent. The assumed bit of the binary mantissa has the value of 1.0 with the
remaining 23 bits providing a fractional value.
Table 7-8 shows the floating-point format.
Table 7-8. Floating Point Format
Sign 2's Complement Of (Exponent + 127) Mantissa
1 bit 8 bits 23 bits
38
The floating point format allows a maximum value of 3.38 x 10 .
Note that bytes 0 and 1 of the floating-point value are stored in the lower numbered register and bytes 2
and 3 are contained in the higher numbered register.
For example: Number 123 in floating point format is mapped to two Holding registers (such as 45005 and
45006) as shown in Table 7-9.
Table 7-9. Number 123 in Floating Point Format
Register 45005 45006
Hexadecimal 0000 42F6
Binary 0000 0000 0000 0000 0100 0010 1111 0110
CAUTION
For DECS-200 Modbus, two consecutive holding registers which are mapped to any of
the 4-byte generic data types, are considered to be linked together as one atomic,
indivisible unit of information which can be read or written by Modbus message only as
one entity (that is, one cannot be read or written without the other).

CRC ERROR CHECK
This field contains a two-byte CRC value for transmission error detection. The master first calculates the
CRC and appends it to the query message. The DECS-200 recalculates the CRC value for the received
query and performs a comparison to the query CRC value to determine if a transmission error has
occurred. If so, no response message is generated. If no transmission error has occurred, the slave
calculates a new CRC value for the response message and appends it to the message for transmission.
The CRC calculation is performed using all bytes of the device address, function code and data block
fields. A 16-bit CRC register is initialized to all 1's. Then, each eight-bit byte of the message is used in the
following algorithm.
First, exclusive-OR the message byte with the low-order byte of the CRC-register. The result, stored in
the CRC-register, will then be right-shifted eight times. The CRC-register MSB is zero-filled with each
shift. After each shift, the CRC-register LSB is examined. If the LSB a 1, the CRC-register is then
exclusive-ORed with the fixed polynomial value A001 (hex) prior to the next shift. Once all bytes of the
message have undergone the above algorithm, the CRC-register will contain the message CRC value to
be placed in the error check field.
DECS-200 MODBUS REGISTER SPACE

Modbus Address space from 40000 to 49999 refers to Functions Code 3, 6 and 16. The DECS-200 uses
address space from 47001 to 48250 (1250 registers). This address space is divided into 14 areas referred
to as information categories. Table 7-10 provides a statistical summary for each information category.
Table 7-10. Information Category Summary
Total # of Holding Data Types
Reserved Register Number Mapped To
Information Information Holding Address Of Used Access Registers (Total #
Category ID Category Registers Space Registers Right Of Variables)
C1 Product 250 47001 to 63 R UCHAR: 63
Information 47250
C2 Metering 125 47251 to 55 R FLOAT: 24
47375 UINT16: 7
C3 Reporting 125 47376 to None R None
(Status) 47500 (for future use)
Control System 47501 to 58 RW FLOAT: 26
C4 Configuration 60 47560 59 1R UINT16: 7
Group 1
C5 Operating 60 47561 to 23 16 RW UINT16: 23
Modes 47620 7R
C6 Setpoints 120 47621 to 94 48 R FLOAT: 45
47740 46 RW UINT16: 4
C7 Start-up 60 47741 to 16 RW FLOAT: 8
47800
C8 Limiters 60 47801 to 38 RW FLOAT: 19
47860
C9 Control Loop 60 47861 to 30 RW FLOAT: 15
Gains 47920
C10 Protective 60 47921 to 37 RW FLOAT: 15
Functions 47980 UINT16: 7
47981 to None None
C11 Calibration 60 48040 (for future RW (for future use)
use)

Total # of Holding Data Types
Reserved Register Number Mapped To
Information Information Holding Address Of Used Access Registers (Total #
Category ID Category Registers Space Registers Right Of Variables)
C12 Relays 120 48041 to 83 RW UINT16: 83
48160
C13 General 60 48161 to 8 2R UINT16: 6
System 48220 6 RW UCHAR: 2
C14 FP Metering 30 48221 to 3 3 RW UINT16: 3
Configuration 48250
Control System 50 48501 to 10 RW FLOAT: 4
C15 Configuration
48550
Group II
DECS-200 REGISTER TABLE

Each data to be transmitted via Modbus network is identified by its holding register(s). The following
tables provide the complete list of holding register assignments and descriptions for the DECS-200. There
is a separate table for each information category.
Holding Registers for Information Category C1

Table 7-11. Information Category C1 (Product Information)
Data
Registers Data Description Access Format
47001 1st character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8
47002 2nd character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8
47003 3rd character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8
47004 4th character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8


47009 Last character of the ASCII string of model information R- UI8
47010 1st character of the ASCII string of application program version R- UI8
number
47011 2nd character of the ASCII string of application program version R- UI8
number
47012 3rd character of the ASCII string of application program version R- UI8
number
47013 4th character of the ASCII string of application program version R- UI8
number
number
number

Data
number
47017 Last character of the ASCII string of application program version R- UI8
number
47018 1st character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47019 2nd character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47020 3rd character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47021 4th character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47026 Last character of the ASCII string of date of the application program R- UI8
47027 1st character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8
47028 2nd character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8
47029 3rd character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8
47030 4th character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8
47034 Last character of the ASCII string of DSP program version number R- UI8
47035 1st character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47036 2nd character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47037 3rd character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47038 4th character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47043 Last character of the ASCII string of date of the DSP program R- UI8
47044 1st character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8
47045 2nd character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8
47046 3rd character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8
47047 4th character of the ASCII string of Boot Program version number R- UI8

Data
47048 5th character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8
47051 Last character of the ASCII string of Boot program version number R- UI8
47052 1st character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47053 2nd character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47054 3rd character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47055 4th character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47060 Last character of the ASCII string of date of the Boot program R- UI8
47061 1st character of the ASCII string of style number information R- UI8
47062 2nd character of the ASCII string of style number information R- UI8
47063 Last character of the ASCII string of style number information R- UI8
47064 to Reserved for future C1 data Not Not
47250 supported defined

Table 7-12. Information Category C2 (Metering)
Data
47251-52 Phase A to B rms generator voltage R- R32_23
47253-54 Phase B to C rms generator voltage R- R32_23

47255-56 Phase C to A rms generator voltage R- R32_23
47257-58 Average of the 3 rms line-to-line voltages R- R32_23
47259-60 Phase B generator current in amps R- R32_23
47261-62 Generator apparent power in kVA R- R32_23

47263-64 Generator real power in kW R- R32_23
47265-66 Generator reactive power in kvar R- R32_23
47267-68 Power factor R- R32_23
47269-70 Generator frequency in hertz R- R32_23

47271-72 Bus frequency in Hz R- R32_23

Data
47273-74 RMS bus voltage in volts R- R32_23
47275-76 Field voltage in volts R- R32_23
47277-78 Field current in amps R- R32_23
47279-80 Var/PF controller output in volts R- R32_23

47281-82 Phase angle between phase B voltage and current in degrees R- R32_23
47283-84 Auxiliary input in volts (PSS input) R- R32_23
47285-86 Current input for load compensation R- R32_23
47287-88 Null balance (tracking error) in percent R- R32_23

47289-90 Error signal to autotracking loop R- R32_23
47291-92 Active controller output R- R32_23
47293 PF state: 0 = leading / 1 = lagging R- UI16
47294 Generator state: 0 = generating / 1 = motoring R- UI16

47295 Status of the Front panel LEDs (bit flags, where 0=off, 1=on for all R- UI16
LEDs except Null Balance and Internal Tracking which are reversed):
b0=Null Balance, b1=Tracking, b2=Pre-position, b3=Upper Limit,
b4=Lower Limit, b5=Edit, b6-b15=unassigned
47296 Voltage matching status: 0=off / 1=on R- UI16
47297 Protection status bit flags (0=clear, 1=condition present): R- UI16

b0=field overvoltage, b1=field overcurrent, b2=gen. Undervoltage,
b3=gen. overvoltage, b4=underfrequency, b5=in OEL, b6=in UEL,
b7=in FCR mode, b8=loss of sensing voltage, b9=setpoint at lower
limit, b10=setpoint at upper limit, b11=gen. failed to build up, b12=
gen. below 10Hz, b13=unassigned, b14=exciter diode open,
b15=exciter diode shorted.
47298-99 Reserved for future C2 data R- R32_23
47300-01 The active operating setpoint expressed as a percent of its present R- R32_23
adjustment range.
47302 The state of some contact inputs: b0 = 52JK, b1 = 52LM, b2 = R- UI16
Automatic transfer, b3 = External Tracking Enable
47303 Annunciation status bit flags (0=clear, 1=annunciation present): R- UI16
b0=field overvoltage, b1=field overcurrent, b2=gen. undervoltage,
b3=gen. overvoltage, b4=underfrequency, b5=in OEL, b6=in UEL,
b7=in FCR mode, b8=loss of sensing voltage, b9=setpoint at lower
limit, b10=setpoint at upper limit, b11=gen. failed to build up, b12=
gen. below 10Hz, b13=unassigned, b14=exciter diode open,
b15=exciter diode shorted..
47304-05 Reserved R- R32_23
47306 Protection status bit flags (0 = clear, 1 = condition present) R- UI16
b0 = loss of field, b1 = in SCL, b2 –b15 are unassigned
47307 Annunciation status bit flags (0 = clear, 1 = condition present) R- UI16

Data
b0 = loss of field, b1 = in SCL, b2 –b15 are unassigned
47308 to Reserved for C2 data
47375

Table 7-13. Information Category C3 (Reporting)
Data

Table 7-14. Information Category C4 (Control System Configuration Parameters)
Data
47501-02 Generator rated frequency, selectable to be 50 or 60 Hz RW R32_23
47503-04 Generator PT primary voltage rating, adjustable from 1 to 30,000 RW R32_23
Vac in 1 volt increments
47505-06 Generator PT secondary voltage rating, adjustable from 1 to 240 RW R32_23
Vac in 1 volt increments
47507-08 Generator CT primary current rating, adjustable from 1 to 60,000 RW R32_23
Aac in 1 amp increments
47509-10 Generator CT secondary current rating, selectable to be 1 or 5 Aac RW R32_23
47511-12 Field current rating, adjustable from 1 to 18 Adc, in 0.1 amp RW R32_23
increments
47513-14 Field voltage connections to isolation box, selectable to be 32V, RW R32_23
63V, 125V, 250V or 375V
47515-16 Bus sensing PT primary rating, adjustable from 1 to 500,000 Vac in RW R32_23
1 volt increments
47517-18 Bus sensing PT secondary rating, adjustable from 1 to 240 Vac in 1 RW R32_23
volt increments
47519-20 Reserved RW R32_23

47523-24 Generator rated voltage, adjustable from 85 to 30,000 Vac in 1 volt RW R32_23
increments
47525-26 Generator rated output current, adjustable from 10 to 60,000 Aac in RW R32_23
0.1 amp increments
47527-28 Generator rated field voltage, adjustable from 1 to 400 Vdc in 1 volt RW R32_23
increments
47529-30 Generator rated field current, adjustable from 0.1 to 9999.0 Adc in RW R32_23
0.1 amp increments
47531-32 Nominal bus voltage, adjustable from 85 to 500,000 Vac in 1 volt RW R32_23

Table 7-14. Information Category C4 (Control System Configuration Parameters)
Data
increments
47533-34 Auxiliary input gain for AVR mode, adjustable from 0 to 99 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47535-36 Internal tracking time delay, adjustable from 0 to 8 seconds in 0.1- RW R32_23
second increments
47537-38 Internal tracking traverse rate, adjustable from 1 to 80 seconds in RW R32_23
0.1 second increments
47539-40 Null balance level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 in 0.01 increments RW R32_23
47541-42 Gain for cross current compensation, adjustable from 0 to 30 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47543 Voltage sensing configuration: 0 = 1 phase (A-C) / 1 = 3 phase RW UI16
47544 Auxiliary input summing mode: 0 = Inner Loop for AVR and FCR RW UI16
modes / 1 = Outer Loop for var and PF modes
47545 Control signal output range: 0 or 1 = 0+10V / 2 = -10+10V / 3 = 4-20 RW UI16
mA
47546 Reserved RW UI16
47547 Auxiliary input selection: 0 = voltage input / 1 = current input RW UI16

47548 PSS input mode –reserved for future C4 data RW UI16
47549-50 External tracking time delay, adjustable from 0 to 8 seconds in 0.1 RW R32_23
second increments
47551-52 External tracking traverse rate, adjustable from 1 to 80 seconds in RW R32_23
0.1-second increments
47553 Voltage sensing hardware gain control signal: 0 = gen. PT R- UI16
secondary <= 160 Vac / 1 = gen. PT secondary > 160 Vac
47554-55 Auxiliary input gain for FCR mode, adjustable from -99 to 99 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47556-57 Auxiliary input gain for var mode, adjustable from -99 to 99 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47558-59 Auxiliary input gain for PF mode, adjustable from -99 to 99 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments

Table 7-15. Information Category C5 (Operating Mode Parameters)
Data
47561 Virtual toggle switch for Start or Stop: 0 = no change / 1 = change RW UI16
state. Holding register 47572 contains unit mode status.
Note: Read value of register 47561 is always 0.
47562 Virtual toggle switch for changing control mode from comm. port RW UI16
between AVR and FCR: 0 = no change / 1 = change state. Holding
register 47573 contains Control mode status.

Table 7-15. Information Category C5 (Operating Mode Parameters)
Data
Note: Read value of register 47562 is always 0.
47563 Switch for changing operating mode via comm. port, to one of three RW UI16
modes, 0=OFF / 1=PF / 2=var. Holding register 47571 contains
Operating mode status. Note: Read value of register 47563 is
always 4.
47564 Internal tracking status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16
47565 Preposition enable status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16
47566 Raise input enable status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16
47567 Lower input enable status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16
47568 External tracking enable status from comm. port: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16
47569 Limiter Mode options: 0 = both off / 1 = UEL on / 2 = OEL on / 3 = RW UI16

both on / 4 = SCL / 5 = SCL/UEL / 6 = SCL/OEL / 7 = OEL/UEL/SCL
47570 Voltage matching mode: 0 = Off / 1 = On RW UI16
47571 Operating mode: 0 = Off / 1 = PF Control / 2 = var Control R- UI16
47572 Unit mode status: 0 = Stop / 1 = Start R- UI16

47573 Control mode status: 1 = FCR / 2 = AVR R- UI16
47574 Internal (mode-to-mode) tracking status: 0 = Off / 1 = On R- UI16
47575 Reserved for future C5 data R- UI16
47576 Secondary unit enable status: 0 = primary unit / 1 = secondary unit R- UI16
47577 Load compensation mode status: 0 = Off / 1 = Droop / 2 = Line Drop R- UI16
47578 Load compensation mode selection via comm. ports: 0 = Off/1 = RW UI16
Droop / 2 = Line Drop. Holding register 47577 contains Load
compensation mode status. Note: Read value of register 47578 is
always 0.
47579 Input for resetting front panel annunciations and latched relay RW UI16
annunciations: 0 = no change / 1 = reset. Note: Read value of
register 47579 is always 0.
47580 Loss-of-sensing detection enable: 0 = disable / 1 = enable RW UI16
47581 Loss of sensing triggered transfer-to-FCR-mode enable. RW UI16
47582 Under frequency or volts per hertz mode enable. RW UI16
47583 External Tracking enabled: 0 = disabled /1 = enabled RW UI16
47584 Virtual toggle switch for OEL style: 0 = no change, 1 = change RW UI16
Read back: 0 = summing point, 1 = takeover
47585 OEL option: 0 = Option 1, 1 = Option 2, 3 = Option 3 RW UI16
47586 PF/var option status: 0 = Off, 1 = PF, 2 = var R- UI16


Table 7-16. Information Category C6 (Setpoint Parameters)
Data
47621-22 FCR (field current regulator) mode setpoint; adjustment range is RW R32_23
determined by registers (47699-700) and (47707-08)
47623-24 AVR (automatic voltage regulator) mode setpoint; adjustment range RW R32_23
is determined by registers (47701-02) and (47709-10)
47625-26 Var mode setpoint (in kvar); adjustment range is determined by RW R32_23
registers (47703-04) and (47711-12)
47627-28 PF mode setpoint; adjustment range is determined by registers RW R32_23
(47705-06) and (47713-14)
47629-30 Droop setting in percent (of rated generator voltage), adjustable from RW R32_23
-30 to 30% in 0.1% increments
47631-32 FCR mode traverse rate, adjustable from 10 to 200 seconds in 1- RW R32_23
second increments
47633-34 AVR mode traverse rate, adjustable from 10 to 200 seconds in 1- RW R32_23
second increments
47635-36 Var mode traverse rate, adjustable from 10 to 200 seconds in 1- RW R32_23
second increments
47637-38 PF mode traverse rate, adjustable from 10 to 200 seconds in 1- RW R32_23
second increments
47639-40 FCR mode setpoint preposition; adjustment range is determined by RW R32_23
registers (47699-700) and (47707-08)
47641-42 AVR mode setpoint preposition; adjustment range is determined by RW R32_23
registers (47701-02) and (47709-10)
47643-44 Var mode setpoint preposition (in kvar); adjustment range is RW R32_23
determined by registers (47703-04) and (47711-12)
47645-46 PF mode setpoint preposition; adjustment range is determined by RW R32_23
registers (47705-06) and (47713-14)
47647-48 FCR mode setpoint step size = setpoint range / (traverse rate x 10): R R32_23
[ (regs. 47707-08) - (regs. 47699-700) ] / [ (regs. 47631-32) x 10 ]
47649-50 AVR mode setpoint step size = setpoint range / (traverse rate x 10): R R32_23
[ (regs. 47709-10) - (regs. 47701-02) ] / [ (regs. 47633-34) x 10 ]
47651-52 Var mode setpoint step size (in kvar) = setpoint range / (traverse R R32_23
rate x 10): [ (regs. 47711-12) - (regs. 47703-04) ] / [ (regs. 47635-
36) x 10 ]
47653-54 PF mode setpoint step size = setpoint range / (traverse rate x 10):[ 2 R R32_23
+ (regs.47713-14) - (regs.47705-06) ] / [ (regs.47635-36) x 10 ]
47655-56 FCR mode setpoint minimum (in % of rated field current), adjustable RW R32_23
from 0 to 100% in 0.1% increments
47657-58 AVR mode setpoint minimum (in % of rated generator output RW R32_23
voltage), adjustable from 70 to 100% in 0.1% increments
47659-60 Var mode setpoint minimum (in % of rated generator VA), adjustable RW R32_23
from -100 to 100% in 0.1% increments

Data
47661-62 PF mode setpoint adjustable minimum, adjustable from 0.5 to 1.0 in RW R32_23
0.005 increments
47663-64 FCR mode setpoint maximum (in % of rated field current), adjustable RW R32_23
from 100 to 120% in 0.1% increments
47665-66 AVR mode setpoint maximum (in % of rated generator output RW R32_23
voltage), adjustable from 100 to 110% in 0.1% increments
47667-68 Var mode setpoint maximum (in % of rated generator VA), RW R32_23
adjustable from -100 to 100% in 0.1% increments
47669-70 PF mode setpoint adjustable maximum, adjustable from -1.0 to -0.5 RW R32_23
in 0.005 increments
47671-72 Minimum value for FCR mode setpoint adjustable minimum (in % of R R32_23
rated field current) = 0%
47673-74 Minimum value for AVR mode setpoint adjustable minimum (in % of R R32_23
rated generator output voltage) = 80%
47675-76 Minimum value for var mode setpoint adjustable minimum (in % of R R32_23
rated generator VA) = -100%
47677-78 Minimum value for PF mode setpoint adjustable minimum R R32_23
47679-80 Maximum value for FCR mode setpoint adjustable maximum (in % R R32_23
of rated field current) = 120%
47681-82 Maximum value for AVR mode setpoint adjustable maximum in (in % R R32_23
of rated generator output voltage) = 110%
47683-84 Maximum value for var mode setpoint adjustable maximum (in % of R R32_23
rated generator VA) = 100%
47685-86 Maximum value for PF mode setpoint adjustable maximum R R32_23
47687-88 Step size for FCR mode setpoint adjustable maximum (in % of rated R R32_23
field current) = 0.1%
47689-90 Step size for AVR mode setpoint adjustable maximum (in % of rated R R32_23
generator output voltage) = 0.1%
47691-92 Step size for var mode setpoint adjustable maximum in % of rated R R32_23
generator VA) = 0.1%
47693-94 Step size for PF mode setpoint adjustable maximum = 0.005 R R32_23
47695 FCR preposition mode: 0 = maintained / 1 = release RW UI16
47696 AVR preposition mode: 0 = maintained / 1 = release RW UI16
47697 Var preposition mode: 0 = maintained / 1 = release RW UI16

47698 PF preposition mode: 0 = maintained / 1 = release RW UI16
47699-700 FCR minimum setpoint (in amps) = % of nominal x rated field R- R32_23
current:(regs. 47655-56) x (regs. 47529-30) / 100
47701-02 AVR minimum setpoint (in volts) = % of nominal x rated gen. R- R32_23
voltage:(regs. 47657-58) x (regs. 47525-26) / 100
47703-04 Var minimum setpoint (in kvar) = % of nominal x rated generator R- R32_23

Data
VA:(regs. 47659-60) x rated VA / 100
47705-06 PF minimum setpoint = registers 47661-62 R- R32_23
47707-08 FCR maximum setpoint (in amps) = % of nominal x rated field R- R32_23
current:(regs. 47663-64) x (regs. 47529-30) / 100
47709-10 AVR maximum setpoint (in volts) = % of nominal x rated gen. R- R32_23
Voltage:(regs. 47665-66) x (regs. 47525-26) / 100
47711-12 Var maximum setpoint (in kvar) = % of nominal x rated gen. R- R32_23
VA:(regs. 47667-68) x rated VA / 100
47713-14 PF maximum setpoint = registers 47669-70 R- R32_23


Table 7-17. Information Category C7 (Startup Parameters)
Data
47741-42 Soft start level, adjustable from 0 to 90 % (of rated generator RW R32_23
voltage) in 1% increments
47743-44 Soft start duration, adjustable from 1 to 7,200 seconds in 1 second RW R32_23
increments
47745-46 Underfrequency corner frequency, adjustable from 15 to 90 Hz in 0.1 RW R32_23
Hz increments
47747-48 Slope of underfrequency curve, adjustable from 0.00 to 3.00 V/Hz in RW R32_23
0.01 V/Hz increments
47749-50 Width of voltage matching window, adjustable from 0 to 20 % (of RW R32_23
rated generator voltage) in 0.01 % increments
47751-52 Voltage matching reference, adjustable from 90 to 120 % (of rated RW R32_23
generator voltage) in 0.01 % increments
47753-54 Fine voltage adjust band, adjustable from 0 to 30 % (of rated RW R32_23
generator voltage) in 0.1 % increments
47755-56 Time delay for loss of sensing, adjustable from 0 to 3 seconds in RW R32_23
47757-58 Loss of sensing level under balanced conditions, adjustable from 0% RW R32_23
to 100% of rated generator voltage in 0.1% increments
47759-60 Loss of sensing level under unbalanced conditions, adjustable from RW R32_23
0% to 100% of rated generator voltage in 0.1% increments

Table 7-18. Information Category C8 (Limiter Parameters)
Data
47801-02 On-line OEL high limit level, adjustable from 0.1 to 30 Adc in 0.1- RW R32_23
amp increments
47803-04 Time allowed at on-line OEL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 10 RW R32_23
seconds in 1-second increments
47805-06 On-line OEL medium limit level, adjustable from 0.1 to 20 Adc in RW R32_23
0.1-amp increments
47807-08 Time allowed at on-line OEL medium limit level, adjustable from 0 to RW R32_23
120 seconds in 1-second increments
47809-10 On-line low OEL low limit level, adjustable from 0.1 to 15 Adc in 0.1- RW R32_23
amp increments
47811-12 Internal UEL curve’s starting point (reactive power level at 0 kW). RW R32_23
This should be 0 to allow the programmable UEL curve to be used.
47813-14 Time allowed at off-line OEL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 10 RW R32_23
seconds in 1-second increments
47815-16 Off-line OEL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 30 Adc in 0.1-amp RW R32_23
increments
47817-18 Off-line OEL low limit level, adjustable from 0 to 15 Adc in 0.1-amp RW R32_23
increments
47819-20 1st UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full RW R32_23
rating (in kW)
47821-22 2nd UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full RW R32_23
rating (in kW)
47823-24 3rd UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full RW R32_23
rating (in kW)
47825-26 4th UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full RW R32_23
rating (in kW)
47827-28 5th UEL point real power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s full RW R32_23
rating (in kW)
47829-30 1st UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s RW R32_23
full rating (in kvar)
47831-32 2nd UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to RW R32_23
generator’s full rating (in kvar)
47833-34 3rd UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s RW R32_23
47835-36 4th UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s RW R32_23
47837-38 5th UEL point reactive power value, adjustable from 0 to generator’s RW R32_23
47839-40 SCL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 66,000 A in 0.1 A RW R32_23
increments

Table 7-18. Information Category C8 (Limiter Parameters)
Data
47841-42 Time allowed at SCL high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 60 RW R32_23
seconds in 0.1 second increments.
47843-44 SCL low limit level, adjustable from 0 to 66,000 A, in 0.1 A RW R32_23
increments
47845-46 Takeover OEL offline high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 A in RW R32_23
0.1 A increments
47847-48 Takeover OEL offline low limit level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 A in RW R32_23
0.1 A increments.
47849-50 Takeover OEL offline time dial, adjustable from 0.1 to 20, in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47851-52 Takeover OEL online high limit level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 A in RW R32_23
0.1 A increments.
47853-54 Takeover OEL online low limit level, adjustable from 0 to 9,999 A in RW R32_23
0.1 a increments.
47855-56 Takeover OEL online time dial, adjustable from 0.1 to 20 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments

Table 7-19. Information Category C9 (Control Loop Gain Parameters)
Data
47861-62 Stability setting group number: 1 to 21, where groups 1 to 20 are RW R32_23
preprogrammed values and group 21 is user programmable
47863-64 AVR/FCR mode proportional gain (Kp), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in RW R32_23
0.1 increments
47865-66 AVR/FCR mode integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47867-68 AVR/FCR mode derivative gain (Kd), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in RW R32_23
0.1 increments
47869-70 OEL integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47871-72 PF mode integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47873-74 Var mode integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47875-76 FCR mode loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47877-78 AVR mode loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47879-80 Var mode loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47881-82 PF mode loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23

47883-84 OEL loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47885-86 UEL loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47887-88 UEL integral gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47889-90 Voltage matching loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47891-92 AVR mode derivative time constant, adjustable from 0 to 1 in 0.01 RW R32_23
increments
47906-07 SCL loop gain (Kg), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47908-09 SCL loop gain (Ki), adjustable from 0 to 1,000 in 0.1 increments RW R32_23
47910-20 Reserved for future C9 data Not Not

supported defined

Table 7-20. Information Category C10 (Protective Functions Parameters)
Data
47921-22 Field overvoltage level, adjustable from 1 to 325 Vdc in 1-volt RW R32_23
increments
47923-24 Field overcurrent base level, adjustable from 0.1 to 16 Adc in 0.1- RW R32_23
amp increments
47925-26 Stator undervoltage level, adjustable from 0 to 30,000 Vac in 1-volt RW R32_23
increments
47927-28 Stator overvoltage level, adjustable from 0 to 30,000 Vac in 1-volt RW R32_23
increments
47929-30 Field overvoltage time delay, adjustable from 0.2 to 30 seconds in RW R32_23
47931-32 Field overcurrent time dial multiplier, adjustable from 0.1 to 20 in 0.1 RW R32_23
increments
47933-34 Stator undervoltage time delay, adjustable from 0.5 to 60 seconds in RW R32_23
47935-36 Stator overvoltage time delay, adjustable from 0.1 to 60 seconds in RW R32_23
47937 Field overvoltage alarm enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16
47938 Field overcurrent alarm enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16
47939 Stator undervoltage alarm enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16

47940 Stator overvoltage alarm enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16

Data
47946-47 Exciter open diode ripple pickup level, adjustable from 0% to 100% RW R32-23
in 0.1% increments.
47948-49 Exciter open diode time delay, adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds in RW R32-23
47950 Exciter open diode protection enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16
47951-52 Exciter shorted diode ripple pickup level, adjustable from 0% to RW R32-23
100% in 0.1% increments.
47953-54 Exciter shorted diode time delay, adjustable from 5 to 30 seconds in RW R32-23
47955 Exciter shorted diode protection enable: 0 = disabled / 1 = enabled RW UI16
47956-57 Exciter diode protection disable level, adjustable from 0% to 100% of RW R32_23
rated exciter field current in 0.1% increments.
47958 Loss of field alarm enable: 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled RW UI16
47959-60 Loss of field level, adjustable from 0 to 3,000 Mvar in 1 kvar RW R32_23
increments
47961-62 Loss of field delay (in seconds): adjustable from 0.1 to 9.9 seconds RW R32_23


Table 7-21. Information Category C11 (Calibration related Parameters)
Data

Table 7-22. Information Category C12 (Relay Parameters)
Data
48041 Annunciation enable for Relay 1: 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled RW UI16
b0 = field overvoltage, b1 = field overcurrent, b2 = gen. Undervoltage,
b3 = gen. Overvoltage, b4 = underfrequency, b5 = in OEL, b6 = in
UEL, b7 = in FCR mode, b8 = loss of sensing voltage, b9 = setpoint
at lower limit, b10 = setpoint at upper limit, b11 = unassigned, b12 =
gen. Below 10 Hz, b13 = field overtemperature, b14, b15 are
unassigned.
48042 Annunciation enable for Relay 1: 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled b0 = loss RW UI16
of field, b1 = in SCL, b2-b15 are unassigned


Data


48056 16th annunciation enable for Relay 1 - Reserved for future C12 data RW UI16
48057 Output for Relay 1: 0 = contact open / 1 = contact closed R UI16

48058 Relay 1 annunciation: 0 = momentary / 1 = maintained / 2 = latched RW UI16
48059 Relay 1 contact sense: 0 = closed for normal operation, open for RW UI16
annunciation; 1 = open for normal operation, closed for annunciation
48060 Relay 1 output duration for momentary type, adjustable 2 to 100 in RW UI16
unity increments (which is 0.1 to 5 seconds in 0.05-second
increments)
48061 b0 = field overvoltage, b1 = field overcurrent, b2 = gen. Undervoltage, RW UI16
b3 = gen overvoltage, b4 = underfrequency, b5 = in OEL, b6 = in
gen. Below 10 Hz, b13 = field overtemperature, b14-b15 are
unassigned.
48062 b0 = loss of field, b1 = in SCL, b2-b15 are unassigned RW UI16



Data
48076 16th annunciation enable for Relay 2 –Reserved for future C12 data RW UI16
48078 Relay 2 annunciation type: 0 = momentary / 1 = maintained / 2 = RW UI16

latched
48080 Relay 2 output duration for momentary type, adjustable from 2 to 100 RW UI16
in unity increments (which is 0.1 to 5 seconds in 0.05 second
increments)
48081 b0 = field overvoltage, b1 = field overcurrent, b2 = gen. Undervoltage, RW UI16
b3 = gen overvoltage, b4 = underfrequency, b5 = in OEL, b6 = in
gen. Below 10 Hz, b13 = field overtemperature, b14-b15 are
unassigned.
48082 b0 = loss of field, b1 = in SCL, b2-b15 are unassigned RW UI16



48096 16th annunciation enable for Relay 3 - Reserved for future C12 data RW UI16
48098 Relay 3 annunciation type: 0 = momentary / 1 = maintained / 2 = RW UI16

latched
48100 Relay 3 output duration for momentary type, adjustable from 2 to 100 RW UI16
in unity increments (which is 0.1 to 5 s in 0.05 s increments)

Data







Table 7-23. Information Category C13 (Communications Parameters)
Data
48161 Save data to EEPROM flags: RW UI16
0x0001 saves C4 and C6; 0x0002 saves C5 and C7; 0x0004 saves
C6; 0x0008 saves C5 and C7; 0x0010 saves C8; 0x0020 saves C9;
0x0040 saves C10; 0x0080 saves C11; 0x0100 saves C12; 0x0800
saves C14. (Changes in C13 are automatically saved.)
48162 Comm. Port 0, front RS-232, baud rate, selectable to be 1200, 2400, R UI16
4800, 9600, or 19200

Data
48163 Comm. port 1, rear RS-232, baud rate, selectable to be 1200, 2400, R UI16
4800, 9600 or 19200
48164 Comm. port 2, rear RS-485, baud rate, selectable to be 1200, 2400, RW UI16
4800, 9600 or 19200
48165 Comm. port 2, Rear RS-485, Parity: ‘O’ = 79 = 0x4F for Odd RW UI8
Parity,‘E’ = 69 = 0x45 for Even Parity, and ‘N’ = 78 = 0x4E for No
Parity
48166 Comm. port 2, Rear RS-485, stop bits, selectable to be 1 or 2 RW UI8
48167 DECS-200 polling address (Modbus slave address), selectable from RW UI16
1 to 247 (slave address)
48168 Modbus Response Time Delay, adjustable from 10 to 200 ms in 10 RW UI16
ms increments
48169 to Reserved for future C13 Not Not

Table 7-24. Information Category C14 (Front Panel Metering Configuration Parameters)
Data
st
48221 1 metering display field on the front panel metering screen: 0 to 14 RW UI16
nd
rd


Table 7-25. Information Category C15 (Control System Configuration Parameters Group II)
Data

48505-07 Reserved RW UI16
48505-08 Reserved RW UI16
48505-09, EDM Pole Ratio (1 to 10 in steps of 0.01, Enter 0 if unknown) RW R32_23

10


SECTION 8 • MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
The only preventive maintenance required for the DECS-200 is the periodic checking of DECS-200
connections to ensure that they are clean and tight.
WARRANTY AND REPAIR SERVICE

DECS-200 units are manufactured using state-of-the-art, surface-mount technology. As such, Basler
Electric recommends that no repair procedures be attempted by anyone other than Basler Electric.
The DECS-200 is warranted against defective material and workmanship for 18 months from the date of
shipment from Basler Electric. Units submitted for warranty repair should be returned to Basler Electric’s
Highland, Illinois facility, freight prepaid, with a complete description of the application and the reported
problem. Prearrangement with either the nearest Basler Electric sales office or with the Technical Sales
Support department at Basler Electric will assure the fastest possible turnaround time.
TROUBLESHOOTING
The following troubleshooting procedures assume the excitation system components are properly
matched, fully operational, and correctly connected. If you do not obtain the results that you expect from
the DECS-200, first check the programmable settings for the appropriate function.
DECS-200 Appears Inoperative

If the DECS-200 does not power up (no backlighting on front panel display), ensure that the control power
applied to the unit is at the correct level. If dc control power is being used, verify that the polarity is
correct. Units with style number XL have an input voltage range of 16 to 60 Vdc. Units with style number
XC have an input voltage range of 90 to 150 Vdc or 82 to 132 Vac (50/60 Hz). If the correct control power
is being applied, return the unit to Basler Electric as described under Warranty and Repair Service.
NOTE
When both ac and dc control power is used, an isolation transformer must be
connected between the ac voltage source and the ac control power terminals of
the DECS-200.
Display Blank or Frozen

If the front panel display (LCD) is blank or frozen (does not scroll), remove control power for about 60
seconds and then reapply control power. If the problem occurred during software uploading, repeat the
upload procedures as described in the associated instructions. If the problem persists, return the unit to
Basler Electric as described under Warranty and Repair Service.
Generator Voltage Does Not Build

Check the DECS-200 settings and system voltages for the following:
a. Generator potential transformer (PT) primary voltage
b. Generator PT secondary voltage
c. AC voltage on the DECS-200 operating (bridge) power terminals (C5 (A), C6 (B), and C7 (C))
Check the DECS-200 soft start bias and soft start time settings. If necessary, increase the generator soft
start bias and decrease the generator soft start time.
If the generator voltage still does not build, increase the value of Kg.
Temporarily disable the overexcitation limiter.
Low Generator Voltage in AVR Mode

Check the following DECS-200 settings and system parameters:
a. AVR voltage setpoint
b. Generator potential transformer (PT) primary voltage
DECS-200 Maintenance 8-1
c. Generator PT secondary voltage
d. Overexcitation limiter (not activated)
e. Accessory inputs (should be zero)
f. Var/PF and droop (should be disabled)
g. Cut-in underfrequency setting (should be below the generator operating frequency)
If the problem persists, contact the Basler Electric Technical Sales Support department for advice.
High Generator Voltage in AVR Mode

Check the following DECS-200 settings and system parameters:
a. AVR voltage setpoint
b. Generator potential transformer (PT) primary voltage
c. Generator PT secondary voltage
d. Accessory inputs (should be zero)
e. Var/PF and droop (should be disabled)
Generator Voltage Unstable (Hunting)

Verify that the exciter power converter is working correctly by substituting the appropriate battery voltage
in place of the DECS-200 drive voltage. If the problem is caused by the DECS-200, check the gain
settings for the specific mode of operation selected.
Protection or Limit Annunciation

If a protection function or limiting function is annunciated, check the associated setting values.
HMI Meter Readings Incorrect

If your PF, var, or watt readings are significantly different from the expected readings for a known load,
verify that the B-phase current sensing input of the DECS-200 is connected to a CT on phase B and not
phases A or C.
No Communication
If communication with the DECS-200 cannot be initiated, check the connections at the communication
ports, the baud rate, and supporting software.
DECS-200 Reboots Frequently

If a single DECS-200 control power source is used and the power source is supplying less than the
minimum required voltage or is fluctuating below the minimum required voltage, the DECS-200 will
reboot. Increase the control power source voltage so that it is within the specified operating range. Units
with style number XL have an input voltage range of 16 to 60 Vdc. Units with style number XC have an
input voltage range of 90 to 150 Vdc or 82 to 132 Vac (50/60 Hz).
8-2 Maintenance DECS-200

P.A.E. LES PINS
67319 WASSELONNE Cedex – France
Tel.: +33 3 88 87 10 10
Fax: +33 3 88 87 08 08
Email: [email protected]
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
FOR
GENERATOR EXCITATION SYSTEM

Equipment specification for:
Standard dual DECS 200 Mounting plate
BASLER ELECTRIC PART NUMBER:
6-1103-00-297
VISA
Written by: Mathieu Pierson 6-1103-91-297
Checked by: Mathias Remy Page 1 sur 18
Revision: C DATE: 31/08/2005
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 PICTURE ...................................................................................................................................................3
2 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................3
3 OTHER COMPONENTS AND THEIR MAIN FUNCTIONS.......................................................................5
4 DESCRIPTION OF THE SYSTEM: ...........................................................................................................6
4.1 Flow chart: .............................................................................................................................................7
4.2 How to start the system: ........................................................................................................................8
4.3 Other functions: .....................................................................................................................................9
4.4 Voltage Sensing circuit ........................................................................................................................11
4.5 Short-circuit support ............................................................................................................................11
4.6 Parallel operation and cross current compensation circuit:.................................................................12

4.6.1 Voltage droop control ......................................................................................................................13
4.6.2 Cross current compensation ...........................................................................................................13
4.6.3 VAR/PF Regulation Mode ...............................................................................................................14
4.7 Voltage matching circuit ......................................................................................................................14
5 OUTPUT CONTACTS .............................................................................................................................14
5.1 Output relays #2 and #3 ......................................................................................................................14
6 COMMISSIONING ...................................................................................................................................16
7 TROUBLESHOOTING.............................................................................................................................16
8 OPTION: PMG .........................................................................................................................................18
8.1 Example of a three phase PMG connection:.......................................................................................18
8.2 Modifications that have to be made.....................................................................................................18
9 SUMMARY OF MODIFICATIONS...........................................................................................................18
VISA
1 Picture
2 Introduction
This specification describes a complete regulation system delivered on a mounting plate, which includes:
i 2 A.V.R. (Automatic Voltage Regulator) DECS 200
i 1 over voltage relay type BE3-59T
i 1 contactor K1 (for the control of the excitation)
i 1 contactor K2 (for the control of the boost system)
i 2 relays K3 and K4 (for the operating modes of the DECS 200)
i 1 set of relays for the logic control
VISA
i 2 contactors with mechanical latching coils (KM = Master AVR and KB = Back-up AVR)
i 1 discharge resistor R1
i 1 excitation circuit-breaker QF1 and its associated emission trigger
i 2 Inrush current reduction modules RE3 & RE4
All the necessary documents (electrical and mechanical drawings and the equipment list) are listed hereunder
(drawing number 6-1103-91-297):
I - Cover sheet
II - Summary
11 - Definition of symbols
12 - Customer sensing connections
13 - Customer power connections & cross current compensation
20 - DECS 200 custom mounting plate
40 - Equipment list
45- Name plates and name tags
50 - Power circuit
51 - Control circuit
52 - Control circuit
53 - Information report
54 - Master AVR control circuit
55 - Back-up AVR control circuit
56 - Auxiliary terminals
57 - Auxiliary terminals
For this system, the mounting plate has to be powered with an external 24Vdc source for the relays,
contactors and A.V.R. DECS 200.
The main component used on this application is the Automatic Voltage Regulator (A.V.R.) DECS 200
(Digital Excitation Control System). Major features of this controller are listed below:
- Micro-processor based design
- PWM power stage with an output current of up to 15 A, forcing of 20 A for 1 min. and 30A 10s
- Output voltage of up to 180 Vdc nominal and 300 Vdc forcing for 10 sec. (max .values based on 277Vac
power input).
- Power input voltage range of up to 277 Vac, single or 3 phase
- Voltage sensing inputs (60 to 660) Vac with 0.5 V resolution:
- 1 single or 3 phase voltage input for Generator voltage
- 1 single phase voltage input for Bus voltage
- Current sensing inputs single phase for metering and reactive load sharing:
- 1 CT input (1A or 5A) for metering & Reactive Droop Compensation
- 1 CT input (1A or 5A) for Cross Current Compensation
- ± 0.25 % steady voltage regulation. True RMS sensing
(100 or 200 V -15/+20% @ 50 Hz & 120 or 240 V ± 20 % @ 60 Hz)
10V and 10Hz minimum sensing voltage and frequency.
- Soft start, Voltage build up with an adjustable ramp
- Voltage matching (Single phase bus voltage sensing)
- There are four modes of regulation:
- AVR mode
- VAR regulation mode
- Power Factor regulation mode
- Field Current Regulation mode
- Generator paralleling with reactive droop compensation ± 10 % and reactive differential compensation
(cross-current function).
- 4 control modes (Automatic voltage regulation (AVR), manual or field current regulation (FCR), power
factor (PF) regulation, and reactive power (VAR) regulation.
VISA
- OEL (Over-Excitation Limiter) and UEL (Under-Excitation Limiter) and V/Hz limitations with UF
(Under-Frequency) alarm
- Set-point control:
x Raise / Lower controls with adjustable set-point range of 85 – 110% for automatic
channels and 0 – 110% for the manual channel.
x 4 – 20mA, 0 – 10V, or ±10V control with programmable range of adjustment and better
than 0.1% resolution
x Pre-position setpoint for each regulation mode.
- Internal Auto-tracking of manual mode to automatic mode and dual unit auto-tracking
- External Auto-tracking, in back-up mode, of a redundant DECS200.
- Protection functions (Field Over-voltage, field over-current, Generator over-voltage, Generator under-
voltage, and loss of sensing).
- Metering from front panel or PC for 3 x V, Ib, kVA, kVAR, kW, PF, DC volt and amps, Frequency (Gen
& Bus), A-B bus voltage
- Front panel or PC programming/set-up and system control. PC programming is made via a front panel
RS232 port. Software is Windows 95 compatible.
- 3 programmable output contacts and serial communications via rear mounted RS232 and RS 485 ports.
Modbus protocole, and 3 contacts dedicated.
- Operates from a 24Vdc power source.
3 Other components and their main functions
In addition, there are also other main components that are listed hereunder:
x K1 (on page 52, column 5): This contactor controls the excitation On and Off on this system. K1 is a
4x28A contactor, with a 24Vdc coil. Three poles are used to control the power of the voltage regulators
DECS 200 (contacts 1 to 6, on page 50, column 19). The fourth pole (contact 7-8, on the same page,
column 13), is used to bypass the discharge resistor R1. If this contactor is energized (please go to the
section 4 for further information), the voltage regulator will be powered, the discharge resistor R1 is
bypassed and the boost circuit is enabled (on page 50, column 05).
x R1 (on page 50, column 15): This resistor is used for the fast de-excitation of the system. When the
excitation is ON, this resistor is not included in the field circuit (no effect). When the AVR is off, R1 is
inserted in the DC output circuit of AVR DECS 200: the excitation is totally disconnected and the
excitation current of the exciter is dissipated in the discharge resistor via the free wheel diode, which is
inside the DECS 200. This will cause a faster de-excitation.
x QF1 (on page 50, column 19): This circuit-breaker (C-Curve) is used to protect the system against over
current. The output contact, which gives the status of this MCB, is connected to terminals XC/09_XC/10
and XC/13_XC/14 (please refer to the page 53, columns 20 and 25). There is also one emission trigger
connected on this MCB (see below for the explanations).
x QF1 (on page 50, column 19): This emission trigger (labeled QF1) is connected on the circuit-breaker
QF1 (on the side). When there is an over voltage detected by the relay RP3 (BE3-59T), the above
mentioned circuit-breaker QF1 will open -> The excitation will be OFF. If QF1 opens during operation
(either by an over voltage or by an over current), the Generator Circuit Breaker has to open thus
preventing the generator from pole slipping (under reactance).
x RP1 / RP2 (on page 50, columns 9-11-12): This over excitation relay (BE3-74SH-7G5E1), which is
connected to the shunt 15A/100mV, senses the excitation current on the field exciter. On this application,
the 100mV signal is fed to the BE3-74SH. If the current goes above the preset point (between 40 and
120% of 15Adc), the millivolt sensing alarm relay will be energized. A red LED indicates the state of the
relay and a green LED indicates the condition of the power supply. The two output contacts are
connected respectively to the logic circuit and to the terminals XC/19_XC20 and XC/21_XC22.
VISA
x RS1 (on page 50, column 15): This shunt gives an indication of the excitation current to the over
excitation relays RP1 and RP2. The output (voltage in mVdc) is directly proportional to the current,
which flows through it. For 15Adc, the output will be 100mV. For 7.5Adc, the output will be 50mVdc.
x RP3 (on page 50, column 28): This over voltage relay is connected to the sensing circuit (same circuit as
for the A.V.R. DECS 200). This BE3 ac relay operates when the externally adjustable trip point is
reached. There is also a time delay control with an adjustment from 200ms to 10 seconds. When the
input signal exceeds the trip point (adjusted from 120 to 150Vac), the relays energized. A red LED
indicates the state of the relay and a green LED indicates the condition of the power supply. The two
output contacts are connected respectively in series with the emission trigger QF1, and to the terminals
XC/1_XC/2 (on page 53, column 3). When there is an over voltage detected by this BE3 relay, the
emission trigger will be energized and the circuit-breaker QF1 will be OFF.
During commissioning, the time delay on this relay could be set near 0 second, especially when
starting up for the first time. When the generator has been successfully commissioned, the time delay can
be adjusted for from 2 or 5 seconds. The other external protection will take over and the BE3-59T relay
will still remain as a back-up device.
x G1 / G2 (on page 50, columns 03 and 14): The three rectifier bridge G1 is used to convert the amount of
the AC current into a DC current, in order to be used on the exciter field (DC current and voltage). The
single phase rectifier bridge G2 is used as an OR gate between DECS and compound outputs.
x K2 (on page 52, column 12): This contactor controls the short circuit excitation conditions. K2 is rated at
4x28A, with a 24Vdc coil. It is controlled by the DECS 200 voltage regulators (first output relay 1).
Please see the section 4.5 to see how to calibrate the output relay#1 on the DECS 200 voltage regulators.
x K3 / K4 (on page 51, columns 35 and 37): Those relays control the regulation mode of the voltage
regulator DECS 200. K3 is monitoring by the Generator Circuit-Breaker (DJA) (one auxiliary contact
has to be connected on terminal XB/07_XB/08, on page 51, column 35). When this contact is closed, K3
will be energized. K4 is monitoring by the Utility Circuit-Breaker (one auxiliary contact has to be
connected on terminal XB/09_XB/10, on page 51, column 37). When this contact is closed, K4 will be
energized.
x KM / KB (on page 51, columns 11 and 19): Those two contactors are controlling the use of either the
Master or the Back-up AVR DECS 200.
o By closing the external contact (connected to terminals XB/01_XB/02), the contactor KM is
energized and contactor KB is de-energized -> Master DECS 200 is ON and Back-up DECS 200
is OFF. If this mounting plate is energized for the very first time and before closing the
excitation contactor K1, the external push button “Master” has to be active -> the contactor KM
is now selected and the Master AVR is ready to operate. The information status of this contactor
is reported on terminals XC/23_XC/24.
o By closing the external contact (connected to terminals XB/03_XB/04), the contactor KB is
energized and contactor KM is de-energized -> Back-up DECS 200 is ON and Master DECS
200 is OFF. The information status of this contactor is reported on terminals XC/17_XC/18.
x RE3 & RE4 (on page 50, column 19 to 23): This device is an inrush current reduction module (ICRM).
It avoids all undesired trip of the circuit breaker when the excitation contactor is closed. When the
excitation is engaged, there will be an inrush current, with an overcurrent that may cause a circuit
breaker trip.
4 Description of the system:
VISA
4.1 Flow chart:
NORMAL CONDITION
SYSTEM START
ALARM CONDITION
FAULT CONDITION
APPLY 24Vdc
ON THE PLATE
T=10s
RESET
SELECT THE
MASTER AVR
NO
EXCITATION ON
MANUAL CHANGE YES

OVER TO
BACK-UP AVR?
NO
DOES
THE SYSTEM
YES
W ORK PROPERLY?
NO
OVEREXCITATION W ATCHDOG ON
1st LEVEL DETECTED MASTER AVR
BY RP1
YES
BACK-UP AVR DECS-200 SELECTED
MASTER AVR
NO SELECTED?
ALARM
A' B C'
VISA
A B' C
MANUAL CHANGE YES

OVER TO
BACK-UP AVR?
NO
WATCHDOG
THE GENERATOR IS RUNNING ON MASTER AVR NO
1) REPLACE THE MASTER AVR OR OVEREXCITATION
2) BACK-UP AVR=ABNORMAL CONDITION 1st LEVEL?
YES
WATCHDOG
NO ON BACK-UP AVR
OR OVEREXCITATION
2nd LEVEL?
YES
OPEN DJA
"EXCITATION OFF"
SOLVE THE PROBLEM
RESET
SELECT MASTER AVR
4.2 How to start the system:
When the first start-up is made, the generator protection relays must be already connected and tested
with the secondary injection test. If there is a problem in the excitation circuitry, these relays will protect the
generator and the AVR from faults.
VISA
At first, some details have to be checked. You will find hereunder some details:
- Check if the external control voltage is applied on terminals XD08_XD09 (the DC voltage has to be
24Vdc). The both DECS 200 will be energized and the green LEDS on the BE3-59T has to be
illuminated.
- Check all the connections (please refer to the electrical drawings 6-1103-91-297 sent with the
equipment).
- Check if there is a voltage present between the terminals XD/03 and XD/04 (or between XD/04 and
XD/05). This can be done by adding a voltmeter and connect it on the above mentioned terminals. The
power supply of the mounting plate comes from the power transformer labeled T1 (or from the PMG or
the auxiliary windings).
- The excitation of the generator has to be OFF (either by opening the circuit-breaker QF1 or by closing
the external contact (momentary) connected on terminal XB/25 (on page 55, column 31). The excitation
ON push button, connected on terminal XB/26 (same page, column 32) must not be activated. For safety
reason, when the excitation circuit-breaker is open (QF1), there is no possibility to start the system
(excitation ON). When the circuit-breaker (QF1) is closed, the operator can excite the generator
(excitation ON).
- Start the engine and make sure the speed control is working properly.
- Measure the voltage from the voltage sensing circuit, between terminals XA/06 and XA/07, and between
XA/07 and XA/08, as well as the DECS 200 A.V.R. power supply circuit on terminal XD/03-04 and
XD/04-05. The residual voltage developed by the generator should be approximately 5-10% of the
nominal voltage in each circuit. If this is not the case, the DG must be shut down and all the sensing and
power circuits must be checked.
- Close the excitation circuit-breaker (QF1), close the external contact (Master AVR) connected on
terminal XB/1_XB2 and the external contact (Excitation ON) connected on terminal XB/26. The voltage
will start to build-up. If the voltage does not stabilize at nominal level or if it overshoots excessively, the
protection relays should shut the excitation down. If this does not happen within seconds, use the
excitation circuit-breaker (QF1) to shut down the excitation.
4.3 Other functions:
If the operator wants to:

- Change the setpoint of the Master voltage regulator DECS 200 (RE1):
o Either close the contact on terminal XB/16 (raise regulator setpoint), or on XB/17 (lower
regulation setpoint) can change the setpoint.
o An analog input signal can be applied on terminals XF/9 and XF/10. Please note that this
setpoint can be adjusted either with a +/-10Vdc or a 4-20mA signal (be careful: only one of
those 2 types of signals has to be used at the same time). More, the +/- 10Vdc can be connected
to some other protective devices, like the PSS-100 (Power System Stabilizer). If this is the case,
there is no possibility to change the setpoints of the AVR’s via another external +/-10 Vdc
control voltage or 4-20mA circuit. By default, this mounting plate is connected in order to work
with a 4-20mA signal.
- Transfer from the automatic to the manual channel (FCR mode) or vice versa, the contact on terminals
XB/14 (transfer to the FCR mode – Field Current Regulation or Manual mode), or on XB/15 (transfer to
the automatic channel) has to be closed. In this mode, the generator field excitation current will be
maintained constant at the set-point in the DECS-200.
Please note that the voltage regulators DECS 200 has an internal auto-tracking between all modes
(the non active mode are tracking the active mode) and between each other.
- Change the regulation mode (voltage, droop, power factor or var control), the status of the contacts
connected between terminals XB/07_XB/08 and XB/09_XB/10 have to be changed. As explained
before, there are different modes of regulation. Four of them (voltage, droop, power factor or VAR
control) can act on the above mentioned contacts. This changeover between all modes can be
automatically chosen by connecting the auxiliary contact from the Generator (DJA) and Utility circuit-
breakers (DJU).
o If DJU is open and DJA is closed, the A.V.R.’s DECS 200 will work in droop mode (droop
mode active while the On-Line over excitation limiter is enabled and will limit if the settings are
VISA
exceeded. There is no VAR/PF regulation). This mounting plate is designed so that if for any
reason, the auxiliary relays K3 and K4 are out of order, the system will work in droop mode,
which is the safe method in all operations.
o If both DJA and DJU are open, the generator can work in voltage mode in the case if the droop
is set at zero (AV.R. mode active while the Off-Line over excitation limiter is enabled and will
limit if the settings are exceeded. There is No Droop and No VAR/PF regulation).
o If both DJA and DJU are closed, both of the A.V.R. DECS 200 will work either in VAR or
Power Factor mode (VAR/PF mode active while the On-Line over excitation limiter is enabled
and will limit if the settings are exceeded).
52J / 52K 52L / 52M
VOLTAGE MODE Droop set at zero

(No droop, no CLOSED CLOSED
VAR/PF)
DROOP MODE CLOSED OPEN
POWER FACTOR /
OPEN OPEN
VAR MODE
- To excite the generator, the contact connected to terminal XB/25 has to be closed. There is an external
contact (wired on terminals XC/11_XC/12), which indicates the status of the excitation control (the
contact is closed when the excitation is ON and is open when the excitation is OFF). If the excitation
circuit-breaker (QF1) is open, there is no possibility to excite the generator (QF1 has to be closed).
- To de-excite the generator, the contact connected to terminal XB/25 has to be closed (please refer to the
page 53, column 23). There is an external contact (wired on terminals XC/11_X1/12), which indicates
the status of the excitation control (the contact is closed when the excitation is ON and is open when the
excitation is OFF). Please note that if there is an over current detected by the excitation circuit-breaker
(QF1), the system will stop automatically. For this reason, 2 auxiliary contacts from QF1 are connected
to terminals XC/09_XC/10 and XC/13_XC/14, in order to indicate the status of this excitation circuit-
breaker. If QF1 opens, the Generator Circuit-Breaker (DJA) has to open immediately.
- Active the pre-position of the AVR : By closing the both contacts on terminal XB/12 and XB/19, all the
setpoints will be changed to the predefined value. Typically, this input is connected to one auxiliary
contact on the Generator Circuit-Breaker (DJA). When the generator Circuit-Breaker (DJA) opens, all
setpoints are forced to the pre-position settings. This is especially helpful if FCR mode is active and the
generator is under a load. Utilizing a auxiliary contact from DJA will force the FCR setpoint to its Pre-
position setting, which could be preset to the generators nominal voltage.
- Reset the alarm indications annunciated on both A.V.R. DECS 200 screens, the contacts connected to the
both terminals XB/11 and XB/18 have to be closed. By using the pushbuttons (left-arrow or right-arrow)
on the front panel of the DECS 200, some annunciations will appear. The following messages may
appear as annunciations on the alarm message screen :
o Field Overvoltage (maintained until Reset)
o Field Overcurrent (maintained until Reset)
o Generator Undervoltage (maintained until Reset)
o Generator Overvoltage (maintained until Reset)
o Lost voltage sensing (maintained until Reset)
o System below 10Hz (maintained until Reset)
o Underfrequency (clears 2 seconds after end of event)
o Overexcitation limit (clears 2 seconds after end of event)
o Underexcitation limit (clears 2 seconds after end of event)
Once the list of annunciation messages has been viewed, it may be cleared by pressing the Reset pushbutton
(or by closing the external contacts on terminal XC/11 and XC/18).
- Use the Modbus communication employed by both DECS-200, connections on terminals XF/1 to XF/4
have to be made. The Modbus communication uses a master-slave technique in which only the master can
VISA
initiate a transaction. This translation is called a query. When appropriate, a slave (DECS 200) responds to
the query. When a Modbus master communicates with a slave, information is provided or requested by the
master. Information residing in the DECS 200 is grouped characteristically in categories. Those categories
are mentioned inside the DECS 200 instruction manual (at the section Modbus Communication).
- To switch from the Master to the Back-up DECS 200, close the contact between terminals XB/.. and XB/...
.
- To switch from the Back-up to the Master DECS 200, close the contact between terminals XB/.. and
XB/... . Please note that the system will allow the operator to do this operation as long as there is no fault
on the Master DECS 200. The system will not allow to switch back to the Master DECS 200 in the case
if :
o There is a watchdog on the Master AVR DECS 200
o There is an overexcitation first level detected by the BE3-74SHn labeled RP1.
4.4 Voltage Sensing circuit
The sensing voltage is provided by the transformer T1 (secondary 2). This three phase transformer
supplies the voltage to both A.V.R. DECS 200 through the terminals XA/06 to XA/08. The phase order is
very important in this circuit and if the connections are incorrect, both A.V.R. DECS 200 will sense a wrong
phase rotation. If the generator direction of rotation is in reverse, phases A and C must be flipped in the
sensing circuit to obtain the correct phase rotation (please refer to the main electrical drawing 6-1103-91-
297, on page 50).
As explained before, there is an over voltage relay connected on the same circuit (RP3, relay BE3-
59T, on page 50, column 29). This relay senses the generator voltage. If the voltage goes above the settings
(from 120 to 150V) after a predetermined period of time (from 0 to 10 seconds), the relay will close its
contact -> the excitation will shut down -> the Generator Circuit-Breaker (DJA) has to open immediately.
4.5 Short-circuit support
The booster circuit is not needed during normal operation. It is only needed during a network short-
circuit situation, when the line collapse and the normal A.V.R. DECS 200 power circuit cannot supply
sufficient excitation. Booster power is supplied by the current transformers that give all the necessary current
on the exciter field, through the terminals XA/03 to XA/05.
When the excitation contactor K1 is not energized (excitation OFF), the current transformers T3 are
short-circuited. If K1 is energized (excitation ON), the auxiliary contacts from K1 (contacts 21-22 and 31-
32) are open, which will allow to the boost circuit to operate properly. Even if the contactor K1 is active, the
boost circuit will be activated only if the contactor K2 is de-energized. K2 is controlled by one of the three
output relay from the DECS 200 (Output Relay 1). By using the Bestcoms of the A.V.R. DECS 200 on a
computer, the output relay #1 can be set.
In order to valid this output relay #1, please install the Bestcoms software on your computer (please
refer to the section 6 inside the DECS 200 instruction manual).
After the installation, select the group

“Protection”, then the screen “Protection
options”. To enable the protection options,
select (click) on the ENABLE button (for
the protection function desired, which is
“Generator Undervoltage”).
VISA
Select the second screen labeled
“Protection Settings” and enter the
settings on the Generator Undervoltage.
Select the third screen labeled “Relay #1

logic” and select (click) the Protection
“Generator undervoltage”.
Fourth and last screen: “Relay Settings”.

On this screen, select the tape of the
“Contact Status” : Normally Closed, and
the “Contact Type” : Maintained.
4.6 Parallel operation and cross current compensation circuit:
VISA
Generator sets are operated in parallel to improve fuel economy and reliability of the power supply.
Economy is improved with multiple paralleled generators by selecting only sufficient generators to carry the
load demand at any given time. By operating each generator near its full capacity, fuel is utilized efficiently.
In order to be able to run in parallel with other units (generators), the voltage regulator DECS 200
needs to sense the reactive load of the generator. The A.V.R. DECS 200 calculates this information by using
the current transformer and the voltage sensing circuit (connected to terminals XA/06 to XA/08). This
current transformer is connected to terminals XA/1_XA/2. Please refer to the electrical drawing for the
proper connections. If the current transformer is not correctly wired, the voltage regulators DECS 200 will
sense reactive power flowing in the reverse direction: it will sense negative reactive power when in reality
the reactive power flow is in positive direction. An attempt to parallel two generators when one has correct
polarity and the other has reverse polarity results in a situation where the correctly connected generator will
go to a very low excitation and will probably trip due to under reactance, the other will pick-up a heavy
reactive over current in the lagging power factor.
4.6.1 Voltage droop control
When reactive droop compensation is used to parallel two or more generators, each parallel droop
circuit is independent of the other. A typical parallel droop circuit is made up of a current transformer and a
paralleling circuit (already inside the DECS 200).
Voltage droop control mode can be used either in single unit operation, in parallel operation with
other units in an island system, or in parallel operation with the utility. If, for any reason, the relay K4
becomes out of order, the system will work into the droop mode, which is the safe method in all operations.
The function is the same manner as the AVR mode but adds a "droop" function to the regulation loop
in order to reduce the regulated voltage by a programmable percentage based on the reactive current
demanded by the generator's load. This aids in reactive load sharing between parallel connected generators.
If this mode is not desired, the droop percentage set-point in the DECS-200 can be set to zero percent (0%.)
4.6.2 Cross current compensation

By only using the current transformer, which is
connected on the b-phase on the primary side and to
terminals XA/01_XA/02 for the secondary side, some
values which available via the voltage regulator, will not
be correct (current, power factor, active and reactive
powers). However, voltage, frequency and field amps
displays will remain in tact. In order to read correct
values,
another
current input
has been
added on
both DECS
200 voltage
regulators:
another current transformer (exactly the same as for the current
transformer) will be connected either on the a-phase or on the c-
phase. This feature is very useful. The current transformer has to
be connected on terminals XA/11_XA/12.
The cross current mode (called sometimes reactive
differential compensation) can be used in an island system when
there are several generators running in parallel and they all have
DECS 200 type AVR (also single unit operation in island is
applicable). Interconnection of the current transformers can be
seen. On generator one, the current transformer (CT1) terminal
with the polarity mark is connected to the current transformer
(CT2) on generator number two at the terminal with no polarity
VISA
mark. On generator number two, the current transformer (CT2) terminal with polarity mark is connected to
the current transformer (CT1) on generator number one at the terminal with no mark.
For the reactive differential compensation (cross current compensation) to perform properly, all of
the paralleling current transformers on all of the generators delivering power to the bus must be connected
into the cross current loop. The current transformer connected in the loop must have the same ratios so that
each current transformer supplies the same amount of current to properly cancel the voltage across the
burden resistor (rated at 1 ohm / 50 or 100 watts). In the case where different size generators are paralleled,
current transformer ratios must be changed to give approximately the same secondary current as the other
current transformer(s). Otherwise, cancellation of the currents in the cross current loop will not occur, and
the imbalance of current will force the generators to have circulating currents between them. If several
generators are connected in parallel, the following system can be used (see drawing on the page before).
4.6.3 VAR/PF Regulation Mode
This mode works to maintain

constant either the reactive power or the
ratio of the reactive power to the active
power exported by the generator,
compared to the regulation set-point in
the DECS-200. This mode is activated
when both generator (DJA) and utility
(DJU) breakers are closed.
Changing between VAR and Power

Factor Regulation:
The DECS-200 can regulate a
constant VAR production or a constant
Power Factor. This selection is made
either directly on the front panel of the
DECS-200 (on page 2-16 on the DECS
200 instruction manual) or via the
computer with the Basler software Bestcoms (see beside).
4.7 Voltage matching circuit
The K3 contact 11-12 is used as a safety feature to control voltage matching. DECS AVR has
automatic voltage matching feature for synchronizing built-in. If the DECS 200 sees a different voltage at
sensing terminals E1-E2-E3 (terminals XA/06 to XA/08) than in bus bars terminals B1-B3 (terminals
XA/9_XA/10) it will try to match both voltages. However the AVR is designed so that it will not try to
match zero voltage and it requires the bus voltage to be within certain adjustable area before it starts
matching. The normal area is ±10% of rated voltage. When the generator breaker is closed, K3 is energized,
K3 contacts 11-12 are open and the voltage matching is disabled.
A resistor R2 is placed between the terminals BUS1 and BUS3 of the regulator to limit the
interference caused by the DECS.
5 Output contacts
5.1 Output relays #2 and #3
Those outputs are available from terminals XC/03 to XC/06. The settings of the 2 relays are described
hereunder:
VISA
After the installation, select the group “Protection”, then the screen “Protection options”. To enable the
protection options, select (click) on the ENABLE button (for the protection function desired).
Select the second screen labeled

“Protection Settings” and enter the settings
on the requested option.
Select the third screen labeled “Relay #2,3

logic” and select (click) the Protection
desired.
VISA
Fourth and last screen: “Relay Settings”. On this screen, select the tape of the “Contact Status” and the
“Contact Type”.
6 COMMISSIONING
The serial link allows the user to set additional alarm or shutdown parameters. It also provides access
and allows storing or saving all the DECS 200 functional parameters.
The DECS 200 are supplied with standard program described in the Instruction Manual.
The first operation is the configuration of DECS 200. It is mandatory to enter the right values in
DECS before any operation of the generator. Configuration of DECS 200 can be made on the mounting
plate as follows:
i Apply the 24Vdc voltage between terminals XD/06_XD07.
i Select the proper operating parameters of DECS as per Instruction Manual of DECS. Do not forget to
save them in the DECS and to record them on the commissioning report.
i proceed with normal starting procedure of generator/AVR
7 TROUBLESHOOTING
SYMPTOM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION

Generator voltage Generator output shorted or Remove load or short circuit
does not rise overloaded
Connections between voltage During the start up, measure voltage from AVR’s
transformer and AVR are poor voltage actual value terminals, excitation power
supply terminals and auxiliary voltage supply
terminals. Phase to phase voltage should be
greater than 10V in all terminals. If voltages
appear, skip the next three probable causes and
solution
Circuit breakers in voltage Close the circuit breakers and measure that
transformer are open or damaged circuit breakers switches are in order
Contactor K1 in AVR unit plate Check that contactor K1 has voltage that is
VISA
is not acting needed for excitation on function, measure that
K1’s switches are in order.
Circuit breaker QF1 in AVR unit Push the button in QF1 to set circuit breaker
plate is open ready check that QF1’s switches are in order
Excitation wires are not Connect terminals XD/01 and XD/02 from AVR
connected from AVR to unit to generator’s auxiliary terminal box. Make
generator sure by measuring the voltage that the AVR is
feeding exciter field winding. Check that
switches inside terminals XD/01 and XD/02 are
closed
Settings in AVR are incorrect Adjust settings in AVR so that they are according
to AVR test sheet
Generator voltage Circuit breaker QF1 in AVR unit Check that overcurrent setting in QF1 is about
rises but falls down plate is acting during start up 14A and overvoltage setting in overvoltage relay
again at once or is about 125%
voltage variation is Voltage transformer T4 in AVR Check that voltage transformer is correctly
between 60-100% at unit plate is incorrectly connected according to AVR connection diagram
rated voltage connected
Contactor K2 in AVR unit plate Measure that K2’s switches are in order
switches off the start excitation
too early
Settings in AVR are incorrect Adjust settings in AVR so that they match AVR
test sheet
Generator voltage Running speed not up to rated Adjust speed rated

too low or too high. speed
Voltage adjusting AVR is in P.F. mode Change AVR to voltage mode. Refer to AVR
scale smthg else connection diagram
than ± 10% from Poor connection of voltage actual Measure voltage from AVRs voltage actual value
rated voltage or value measurement terminals. If phase to phase voltage is not 110V,
adjusting has no check the wiring from voltage transformer to
effect AVR’s terminals
to AVR test sheet
No-load voltage Voltage phase order in AVR’s Check by measuring that voltages are connected
correct, but voltage terminals is incorrect or current to AVR’s terminals in order L1, L2 and L3. The
rises when generator transformer for droop sensing is current is measured by transformer from phase
is loaded in droop incorrectly wired L2 and is connected to terminals XA/01 and
mode XA/02 in order S1, S2
Reactive load no Rated voltage setting different Change voltage setting to be the same for all
equally shared between parallel operating parallel operating generators
between generators generators
in droop mode Droop setting different between Change droop setting to be the same for all
parallel operating generators parallel operating generators
Cross current loop operating Check wiring, operation of K3-K4.
incorrectly.
Generator is not able Voltage phase order in AVR’s Check by measuring that voltages are connected
to supply enough terminals is incorrect or current to AVR’s terminals in order L1, L2 and L3, the
reactive power transformer for droop sensing is current is measured by transformer from phase
incorrectly wired L2 and is connected to terminals XA/01 and
XA/02 in order S1, S2.
Fault in exciter’s rotating Check diodes in rectifier
rectifier
VISA
to AVR test sheet
Generator voltage is Improper settings in AVR for Check that settings in AVR are according to
unstable existing network AVR test sheet. Refer to stability adjustment
procedure in Instruction Manual
Fault in exciter’s rectifier Check diodes in rectifier
8 OPTION: PMG
8.1 Example of a three phase PMG connection:
8.2 Modifications that have to be made
i Connect the three phase PMG to the terminals XD/3 to XD/5.

i Nothing has to be connected to the terminals XA/3 to XA/5.
i It is not necessary to program the output relay#1 of the DECS-200 (under voltage function 27) as
described in the section 4-5 page 15.
9 Summary of modifications
- Revision A : First issue.

- Revision B : Inrush current reducer module added.
- Revision C : Inrush current reducer modules added in § 8.1
VISA
MOUNTING PLATE:
750(LENGHT) x 750(HEIGHT) x 175(WIDTH) mm
GALVANIZED MOUNTING CHASSIS
POWER REQUIREMENTS : POWER OUTPUT GENERATOR FIELD :
VOLTAGE SENSING : 3x___kV/120Vac (Y-Y) NOMINAL VOLTAGE : ___Vdc (125Vdc max)
CURRENT SENSING : In/1 or 5A NOMINAL CURRENT : ___Adc (15Adc max)
EXCITATION POWER : 3x___V@___kVA FORCING VOLTAGE : ___Vdc
CONTROL POWER : 24Vdc INTERNAL FORCING CURRENT : ___Adc
BUILD-UP POWER : ___Vdc
GENERATOR DATA :
POWER : _____kVA
VOLTAGE : _____V
CURRENT : ____A
FREQUENCY : __Hz
POWER FACTOR : ___
WIRING :
ALL WIRING CONFORM TO THE FOLLOWING UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ON SCHEMATICS :
PT WIRE SIZE : 1.5mm²
CT WIRE SIZE : 2.5mm²
CONTROL WIRE SIZE : 1.5mm²
MULTICOLOR WIRE MARKERS ON EACH END OF WIRE

TECHNICAL DRAWINGS
BASLER
R
This document is BASLER ELECTRIC COMPANY property and can not be duplicated, communicated or modified without its agreement.
DRAWINGS BY : A.THIEBAUT REV : H AS BUILT 18/10/2005
COVER SHEET
BASLER ELECTRIC REVIEWED BY : M.REMY REV : G UPDATE 31/08/2005
COMPANY APPROVED BY : C. DEL POPOLO REV : F ICRM-15 16/05/2005 DUAL DECS-200 MOUNTING PLATE CDE : PREVIOUS
PAGE :
THIS
PAGE :
NEXT
PAGE :
WASSELONNE
R REV : E UPDATE 14/04/2005 6-1103-91-297 A A B
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
SUMMARY MODIFICATION
FOLIO TITLE 1 TITLE 2 REV. VISA DATE REV. VISA DATE REV. VISA DATE REV. VISA DATE REV. VISA DATE REV. VISA DATE REV. VISA DATE REV. VISA DATE REV. VISA DATE REV. VISA DATE
05 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM C GR 23-12-2004 E GR 14-04-2005 G GR 31-08-2005 H FJ 18-10-2005

11 DEFINITION OF SYMBOLS A AT 04-11-2004 C GR 23-12-2004
12 CUSTOMER SENSING CONNECTIONS A AT 04-11-2004 B GR 16-11-2004 C GR 23-12-2004 G GR 31-08-2005
13 CUSTOMER POWER CONNECTIONS & CROSS CURRENT COMPENSATION A AT 04-11-2004 B GR 16-11-2004 C GR 23-12-2004 D GR 04-02-2005 G GR 31-08-2005
20 FRONT VIEW CUBICLE A AT 04-11-2004 B GR 16-11-2004 C GR 23-12-2004 E GR 14-04-2005 F AKO 16-05-2005 G GR 31-08-2005 H FJ 18-10-2005
40 EQUIPMENT LIST A AT 04-11-2004 B GR 16-11-2004 C GR 23-12-2004 E GR 14-04-2005 F AKO 16-05-2005 G GR 31-08-2005
45 NAME PLATES AND NAME TAGS A AT 04-11-2004 C GR 23-12-2004 G GR 31-08-2005
50 POWER CIRCUIT A AT 04-11-2004 B GR 16-11-2004 C GR 23-12-2004 F AKO 16-05-2005 G GR 31-08-2005
51 CONTROL CIRCUIT A AT 04-11-2004 C GR 23-12-2004 E GR 14-04-2005
52 CONTROL CIRCUIT A AT 04-11-2004 B GR 16-11-2004 C GR 23-12-2004
53 INFORMATION REPORT A AT 04-11-2004 B GR 16-11-2004 C GR 23-12-2004 G GR 31-08-2005
54 MASTER AVR CONTROL CIRCUIT A AT 04-11-2004 B GR 16-11-2004 C GR 23-12-2004
55 BACK-UP AVR CONTROL CIRCUIT A AT 04-11-2004 B GR 16-11-2004 C GR 23-12-2004 G GR 31-08-2005
56 AUXILIARY TERMINALS A AT 04-11-2004 B GR 16-11-2004 C GR 23-12-2004 G GR 31-08-2005
57 AUXILIARY TERMINALS A AT 04-11-2004 B GR 16-11-2004 C GR 23-12-2004 G GR 31-08-2005
This document is BASLER ELECTRIC COMPANY property and can not be duplicated, communicated or modified without its agreement. The customer part is drawn for INFORMATION ONLY
DRAWINGS BY : A.THIEBAUT REV : H AS BUILT 18/10/2005 SUMMARY
BASLER ELECTRIC REVIEWED BY : M.REMY REV : G UPDATE 31/08/2005
COMPANY APPROVED BY : C. DEL POPOLO REV : F ICRM-15 16/05/2005 DUAL DECS-200 MOUNTING PLATE CDE : PREVIOUS
PAGE :
THIS
PAGE :
NEXT
PAGE :
R
WASSELONNE REV : E UPDATE 14/04/2005 6-1103-91-297 A B 05
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
8 8
9 9 ALTERNATEUR SYNCHRONE, TRIPHASE RELAIS CABLE BLINDE

THREE PHASE SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR RELAY COIL SHIELDED WIRE
: :
*6___
CONTACTEUR VOYANT
EXCITATRICE TOURNANTE CONTACTOR COIL LIGHT
ROTARY EXCITER
DISJONCTEUR VARISTANCE
CIRCUIT BREAKER VARISTOR

ENROULEMENT D'EXCITATION
EXCITATION WINDING
CONTACT DE RELAIS CONNEXION BARRE DE CUIVRE

RELAY CONTACT BUS BAR CONNECTION
TRANSFORMATEUR MONOPHASE
SINGLE PHASE TRANSFORMER
CONTACT DE PUISSANCE APPAREIL DE MESURE / METER
*
POWER CONTACT * : Hz - FREQUENCE / FREQUENCY
V - TENSION / VOLTAGE
A - COURANT / CURRENT
P - POSITION / POSITION
NL - DIFFERENTIEL / NULL
DIODE DE PUISSANCE PF - cos PHI / POWER FACTOR
POWER DIODE W - PUISSANCE ACTIVE / ACTIVE POWER
VAR - PUISSANCE REACTIVE / REACTIVE POWER
TRANSFORMATEUR TRIPHASE
XX 00 00
THREE PHASE TRANSFORMER
NUMERO D'ORDRE DU SYMBOLE / SYMBOL SEQUENCE NUMBER
BOUTON POUSSOIR NUMERO DE PAGE / SHEET NUMBER
PUSH BUTTON RACINE DU SYMBOLE / SYMBOL ROOT
4.0 WH-5006
NUMERO DU FIL / WIRE NUMBER
COUPLAGE ETOILE / STAR COUPLING
COULEUR DU FIL / WIRE COLOR
RESISTANCE SECTION DU FIL / WIRE SECTION
RESISTOR BK=BLACK
WH=WHITE
RD=RED
DB=DARK BLUE
COUPLAGE TRIANGLE / DELTA COUPLING
LB=LIGHT BLUE
GR=GREY
TERRE PK=PINK
GROUND OR=ORANGE
BR=BROWN
TRANSFORMATEUR DE COURANT
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
BORNE
TERMINAL BLOCK
PRISE DE COURANT FOLIO-COLONNE (CONTINUATION)

OUTLET PAGE-COLUMN (CONTINUATION)
DRAWINGS BY : A.THIEBAUT REV : DEFINITION OF SYMBOLS
BASLER ELECTRIC REVIEWED BY : M.REMY REV :
COMPANY APPROVED BY : C. DEL POPOLO REV : C STANDARD PLATE 23/12/2004 DUAL DECS-200 MOUNTING PLATE CDE : PREVIOUS
PAGE :
THIS
PAGE :
NEXT
PAGE :
R
WASSELONNE REV : A DRAWINGS SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL 04/11/2004 6-1103-91-297 05 11 12
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
In/1 or 5A In/1 or 5A In/1 or 5A

CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT
SENSING SENSING SENSING
CT CT CT
(EITHER PHASE or NEUTRAL SIDE) (EITHER PHASE or NEUTRAL SIDE) (EITHER PHASE or NEUTRAL SIDE)
P1 P2 A A A
S1 S2
P1 P2
B B B
S1 S2
P1 P2
C C C
S1 S2
IF CROSS CURRENT IF CROSS CURRENT IF CROSS CURRENT

IS USED, IS USED, IS USED,
DO NOT CONNECT DO NOT CONNECT DO NOT CONNECT
THE EARTH THE EARTH THE EARTH
3xUn 3xUn 3xUn
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
VT VT VT
120V 120V 120V
XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA
1 2 6 7 8 1 2 6 7 8 1 2 6 7 8
PHASE ROTATION : A , B and C PHASE ROTATION : A , B and C PHASE ROTATION : A , B and C

A PHASE CURRENT SENSING B PHASE CURRENT SENSING C PHASE CURRENT SENSING
THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE SENSING THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE SENSING THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE SENSING
In/1 or 5A In/1 or 5A In/1 or 5A

CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT
CT CT CT
(EITHER PHASE or NEUTRAL SIDE) (EITHER PHASE or NEUTRAL SIDE) (EITHER PHASE or NEUTRAL SIDE)
P1 P2
A A A
S1 S2
B P1 P2 B B
S1 S2
C C P1 P2 C
S1 S2
IF CROSS CURRENT P1 P2 IF CROSS CURRENT P1 P2 IF CROSS CURRENT P1 P2

IS USED, IS USED, IS USED,
DO NOT CONNECT DO NOT CONNECT DO NOT CONNECT
THE EARTH THE EARTH THE EARTH
Un Un Un
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
VT VT VT
120V 120V 120V

S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA
1 2 6 7 8 1 2 6 7 8 1 2 6 7 8
PHASE ROTATION : A , B and C PHASE ROTATION : A , B and C PHASE ROTATION : A , B and C

A PHASE CURRENT SENSING B PHASE CURRENT SENSING C PHASE CURRENT SENSING
SINGLE-PHASE VOLTAGE SENSING SINGLE-PHASE VOLTAGE SENSING SINGLE-PHASE VOLTAGE SENSING
DRAWINGS BY : A.THIEBAUT REV : G UPDATE 31/08/2005 CUSTOMER SENSING CONNECTIONS
BASLER ELECTRIC REVIEWED BY : M.REMY REV : C STANDARD PLATE 23/12/2004
COMPANY APPROVED BY : C. DEL POPOLO REV : B AS BUILT 16/11/2004 DUAL DECS-200 MOUNTING PLATE CDE : PREVIOUS
PAGE :
THIS
PAGE :
NEXT
PAGE :
R
WASSELONNE
REV : A DRAWINGS SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL 04/11/2004 6-1103-91-297 11 12 13
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
BOOST CT BOOST CTs BOOST CTs CROSS CURRENT COMPENSATION

(ANY PHASE) (ANY PHASE) (ANY PHASE) (ANY PHASE)
(EITHER PHASE or NEUTRAL SIDE) (EITHER PHASE or NEUTRAL SIDE) (EITHER PHASE or NEUTRAL SIDE) (EITHER PHASE or NEUTRAL SIDE)
P1 P2 P1 P2 GEN 1 GEN 2 GEN n GEN n+1
S1 S2 S1 S2
P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2 S1 S2
P1 P2 P1 P2
S1 S2 S1 S2
* * * *
R R R R
XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA XA
3 4 5 3 4 5 3 4 5 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11
MOUNTING MOUNTING MOUNTING MOUNTING
PLATE 1 PLATE 2 PLATE n PLATE n+1
* CCC ENABLE CONTACT
SINGLE-PHASE BOOST CURRENT TWO-PHASE BOOST CURRENT THREE-PHASE BOOST CURRENT CROSS CURRENT COMPENSATION
a
EXTERNAL
POWER
SOURCE
L1 L2 L3 (ANY PHASE ORDER) L1 L2 L3 (ANY PHASE ORDER) L1 L2 L3 (ANY PHASE ORDER) (ANY PHASE ORDER)
(FOR SINGLE PHASE, DO NOT (FOR SINGLE PHASE, DO NOT (FOR SINGLE PHASE, DO NOT (FOR SINGLE PHASE, DO NOT
CONNECT L2) CONNECT L2) CONNECT L2) CONNECT L2)
XD XD XD XD XD XD XD XD XD XD XD XD
3 4 5 3 4 5 3 4 5
3 4 5
(ASK FOR INRUSH CURRENT (ASK FOR INRUSH CURRENT

LIMITER NECESSITY) LIMITER NECESSITY)
POWER CONNECTIONS POWER CONNECTIONS POWER CONNECTIONS POWER CONNECTIONS
THREE-PHASE AUXILIARY WINDING THREE-PHASE PMG THREE-PHASE EXTERNAL POWER SOURCE THREE-PHASE "SHUNT" TRANSFORMER
DRAWINGS BY : A.THIEBAUT REV : G UPDATE 31/08/2005 CUSTOMER POWER CONNECTIONS
BASLER ELECTRIC REVIEWED BY : M.REMY REV : D CROSS CURRENT COMPENSATION 04/02/2005 & CROSS CURRENT COMPENSATION
PAGE :
THIS
PAGE :
NEXT
PAGE :
R
WASSELONNE
REV : B AS BUILT 16/11/2004 6-1103-91-297 12 13 20
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
QTY ITEM DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER REFERENCE PART-NUMBER

21 D(9-29) Terminal block equiped with a free wheel diode, spring connector, type ST2.5-quattro-DIO/L-R PHOENIX CONTACT 3036233 6620900314
2 QS1 ST10 Fuseholder, single, for 13/32" x 1 1/2" ferrule style fuses, 690 Volt FERRAZ G081219 6611600101*
1 GS1 Power supply DC,85-264Vac (45-65Hz) or 90-350Vdc/24Vdc-5A PHOENIX CONTACT 2938581 37235
1 KT1 Timer 0.1s/100h, 12-240Vac/dc, multifonction (A-At-B-C-H-Ht-Di-D-Ac-Bw) CROUZET 88865103 35097
5 K(3-4)\K(7-9) Relay, industrial, miniature, 4PDT, 5 Amp @ 250VAC/30VDC rated, 24VDC coil, with free wheel diode. FINDER 553490240090 6611200250
5 K(3-4)\K(7-9) Support for relay (4 form-c), 5A (max 300Vac), serie 58 FINDER / SCHRACK 9474.1/ZG78700 6611200059*
1 KB Contactor 4x32A AC1, 4 poles (2NO + 2NC), coil 24Vdc ALLEN-BRADLEY 100-C23ZJ200 6611200139
2 KB\KM Relay Accessory, mechanical latch, 1 N.O. and 1 N.C. contact, 48VAC @ 50/60HZ coil 100-FL11KY 6611200145
2 K(1-2) Auxiliary contacts 2NO+2NC, CA5-22E ABB 212110 6611200218*
3 K(1-2)\K10 Contactor 4x28A, BC16-40-00, 24Vdc coil, 4xNO contats 55791 6611200027*
1 KM Contactor 4x32A AC1, 4 poles (4NO), coil 24Vdc ALLEN-BRADLEY 100-C23ZJ400 6611200138
2 KB\KM Relay Accessory, diode module, surge suppressor DC, 12-250VDC 100-FSD250 34169
2 KB\KM Auxiliary contacts 1NO+1NF 100-SB11(LEFT) 6611200121
1 KM 100-SB11(RIGHT)
1 KB Auxiliary contacts 2NO 100-SB20(RIGHT) 6611200147
1 M-PLATE Mounting plate, 750 x 750 x 2.5mm SAREL 55745 35462
1 QF2 Circuit breaker Accessory, auxiliary contacts, 1 C-form contact ABB 359600-1 6611200330
1 QF1 Auxiliary contacts 1NO+1NF (left) SIEMENS 5ST3010(L) 6611400308
1 QF1 Auxiliary contacts 1NO+1NF (right) 5ST3010(R)
1 QF1 Emission trigger (trip coil) 24-48Vdc 5ST3031 6611400316
1 QF1 Circuit breaker, 3pole, 20 amp, C curve, 50/60Hz 5SY6 320-7 6611400309
1 QF2 Circuit Breaker, 2x4A, C curve, Umax = 400VAC. ABB 352232 6611400029
2 QS1 Fuse 6A aM 500V 10x38 FERRAZ F222208 6611600078
1 R1 Résistor 10 ohm /100W, type HS100 ARCOL 188-122 33921
1 R2 Resistor, fixed, carbon film, 100K ohms +/-5%, 1/2 watt, axial leads NEOHM 132-977 6610900073
1 R3 Resistor mounting bracket set, for use with power resistor size 20 x 117mm SFERNICE 2EKN 6611700082
1 R3 Resistor, adjustable, wirewound, 10 ohms +/-10%, 100 Watt, -25/+80ppm/Deg C temp.coeff., 20 x 117 size, panel mount RSSD100-10R 35338
1 RS1 Shunt, 15 Amp, 100mV, Class 1, mounted in a terminal. SPM SHMO-15/100 35255
1 RE2 DECS redundance communication cable BASLER 9310300032 9310300032
2 RE(1-2) Automatic voltage regulator, 24/48Vdc power supply Internal/External Autotracking DECS200-2L 9360100103
2 RE(3-4) Inrush current reduction module, 18A, 90-277V, 50-400Hz ICRM-15 9387900104
1 RP3 Relay, overvoltage sensing, 3 phase, 3 wire, 120V input, 50/60Hz BE3-59T-3A1N1 9319600104
2 RP(1-2) Relay, DC Overvoltage Sensing, 100mV input, 24Vdc power supply BE3-74SH-7G5E1 9320900104
4 D1-D2\D3-D4\D5-D6\D7-D8 Rectifier bridge, single phase, 35A, 600V G.I. GBPC-3506 24982
2 G(1-2) Semiconductor, rectifier bridge, three phase, 1200 Volt, 30 Amps @ 94°C SEMIKRON SKD30/12 6620900001
1 R2 Terminal Block, component holder, internal solder connectors ENTRELEC 011517714 33795
1 X+/X- Potential distributor +/-, 250Vac/dc max, 30A max, spring connector,type :UMK.PVB-2/24/ZFKDS PHOENIX CONTACT 2302366 6611000307
3 GND-\GND-\GND- Terminal bloc, spring connection for 3 wires, wire section 0.2-2.5mm², GREEN/YELLOW color, 800V/28A, UL/CSA certified 30 31 26 7 6621300336
24 XC-(1-24) Terminal bloc, spring connection for 3 wires, wire section 0.2-2.5mm², ORANGE color, 800V/28A, UL/CSA certified 30 31 98 2 6621300335
59 XA-(1-12)\XB-(1-27)\XD-(1-9)\XF-(1-11) Terminal bloc, spring connection for 3 wires, wire section 0.5-6mm², GREEN/YELLOW color, 800V/28A, UL/CSA certified 30 36 48 2 6621300339
DRAWINGS BY : A.THIEBAUT REV : G UPDATE 31/08/2005 EQUIPMENT LIST
BASLER ELECTRIC REVIEWED BY : M.REMY REV : F ICRM-15 16/05/2005
COMPANY APPROVED BY : C. DEL POPOLO REV : E UPDATE 14/04/2005 DUAL DECS-200 MOUNTING PLATE CDE : PREVIOUS
PAGE :
THIS
PAGE :
NEXT
PAGE :
R
WASSELONNE 6-1103-91-297
REV : C STANDARD PLATE 23/12/2004 20 40 45
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
NOTE 2: DEFAUT SETTING: SET THE VALUE TO MAXIMUM POSITION.
CURRENT VOLTAGE CROSS CURENT

SENSING SENSING COMPENSATION
DC OUTPUT
AC INPUT CIRCUIT CIRCUIT VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
EXCITATION CIRCUIT
BOOST CIRCUIT POWER CIRCUIT (SEE PAGE 12) (SEE PAGE 12) MATCHING (SEE PAGE 13)
(CONNECTED TO THE FIELD
(SEE PAGE 13) (SEE PAGE 13) 1 or 5A 3x120V CIRCUIT 1 or 5A
WINDING)
L1 L2 L3 F+ F- L1 L2 L3 S1 S2 L1 L2 L3 L1 L3 S2 S1
XA XA XA XD XD XD XD XD GND GND GND XA XA XA XA XA XA XA
3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
NOTE 1
2.5BK-5007
2.5BK-5008
2.5BK-5009
1 3 5
QF1
1.5GR-5040
2.5BK-5015
20.00 A
2 4 6
1.5GR-5022
NO/53-25
NF/53-19
1.5PK-5044 RS1 NO/55-31
100 mV NF/55-33
2.5BK-5021
2.5BK-5020
2.5BK-5006
2.5BK-5005
2.5BK-5004
1.5PK-5045 15 A 1 3 5 12 14
K1 K3
2.5BK-5024
- + - +
1.5GR-5043
52-5 51-35
1.5GR-5042
1.5GR-5041
2 4 6 11
RP2 RP1 2.5BK-5052
BE3-74SH BE3-74SH 2.5BK-5051
(40 to 120% of In) (40 to 120% of In)
2nd level 1st level 2.5BK-5050
2.5BK-5033
R2
52-27 52-23
1 3 5
22 31 100kOhms
KM
K1 K1 51-11 0.5W
2 4 6
52-5 52-5
2.5WH-5038
32
2.5WH-5039
21
7
2.5BK-5014
R1
2.5BK-5002
K1
2.5BK-5003
2.5BK-5001
10 Ohms
52-5
8 100W A B C A B C
IN IN L1 L2 L3
2.5WH-5034
2 4 5 7 RE3 RE4 RP3

OUT OUT
2.5WH-5035
BE3-59T-3A1N1 1.5GR-5023
52-31
A B C A B C 53-1
2.5BK-5053
1 3 6 8
- +
K2 K2
52-11 52-11
2.5BK-5012
2.5BK-5017
2.5BK-5018
2.5BK-5046
2.5BK-5047
2.5BK-5048
G2
NOTE 2
a
a
a
C1 C2 C3 C4 C1 C2 C3 C4 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5
R3 RE2 RE1
10 Ohms G A B C G A B C E1 E2 E3 B1 B3 E1 E2 E3 B1 B3
INPUT POWER INPUT POWER DECS-200 DECS-200
BACK-UP GENERATOR BUS MASTER GENERATOR BUS
RE1 RE2 52-19 52-17
QS1 DECS-200 DECS-200 100/120V 100/120V
MASTER BACK-UP 50/60Hz 50/60Hz
a
a
a
1.5DB-1 2.5BK-5019 2.5BK-5011 2.5BK-5013
51-9 1.5DB-1 52-17 52-19
3 4 GENERATOR CROSS GENERATOR CROSS
G1 24Vdc DC FIELD DC FIELD b-PHASE CURRENT b-PHASE CURRENT
1.5DB-2 2.5BK-5016 OUTPUT OUTPUT SENSING CCCT SENSING CCCT
51-9 1.5DB-2
- + 1 2 F+ F- F+ F- COM5A 1A 1A 5ACOM COM5A 1A 1A 5ACOM
6A C5 C6 C5 C6 B3 B2 B1 B4 B5 B6 B3 B2 B1 B4 B5 B6
K10
52-9
2.5BK-5010
2.5WH-5037
2.5BK-5025
2.5BK-5028
2.5BK-5030
2.5BK-5029
2.5BK-5031
2.5BK-5032
D5-D6 D3-D4 D1-D2 R3 R5 1 7
+
+
+
- 2.5BK-5026 - 2.5BK-5027 - NOTE 1
KB KB KB KB
51-19 51-19 51-19 51-19 NOTE 1
R4 R6 2 8
2.5WH-5036
NOTE 1
NOTE 1: PLEASE SELECT EITHER THE
5A OR THE 1A INPUT CURRENT
DRAWINGS BY : A.THIEBAUT REV : G UPDATE 31/08/2005 POWER CIRCUIT
BASLER ELECTRIC REVIEWED BY : M.REMY REV : F ICRM-15 16/05/2005
PAGE :
THIS
PAGE :
NEXT
PAGE :
R
WASSELONNE
REV : B AS BUILT 16/11/2004 6-1103-91-297 45 50 51
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
85 to 264Vac (45-65Hz) 24Vdc
or 90 to 350Vdc POWER SUPPLY
NOTE: THIS INPUT IS NOT FUSED
POWER SUPPLY (NOTE)
+ COM + COM
XD XD XD XD
6 7 8 9
1.5DB-5101
1.5DB-5111
1.5DB-5114
D7-D8
X+
+
52-1
1.5DB-1
a
1 3
-
QF2
a
XB XB
4.00 A
2 4 XB XB XB 7 9
-- A13 12 14 12 14
OF/53-27 1 3 5
RE1
DECS-200
MASTER MACHINE GRID
MASTER 23 22 24 32 34 BACK-UP 43 C. B. C. B.
1.5DB-5115
1.5DB-5112
1.5DB-5113
1.5DB-1
AVR KB K7 K8 AVR KM RESET RP1 RP2
WATCH
51-19 51-25 51-29 51-11 DOG BE3-74SH BE3-74SH
24 21 31 44
1st level 2nd level
XB XB
1.5DB-5102(1)
L N + XB XB 52-17 A14 XB 52-23 11 52-27 11 8 10
2 4 6
1.5DB-5107
GS1 TO FIELD 50-7
85-264Vac 1.5DB-1
90-350Vdc FLASHING
1.5DB-5102
24Vdc / 5A
CIRCUIT 50-7
1.5DB-2
32 34
GND
1.5DB-2
K7 12 14 12 14 12 14
-
51-25 K7 K8 K9
31
51-25 51-29 51-33
1.5DB-5122
1.5DB-5121
11 11 11
1.5DB-5103
PE
1.5DB-5108
22 24
1.5DB-5119
1.5DB-5120
K8
51-29
21
1.5DB-5104
65 13 65 13
KM KM KB KB
1.5DB-5110
1.5DB-5118
1.5DB-5109
51-11 51-11 51-19 51-19

66 14 66 14
1.5DB-5105
1.5DB-5106
1.5DB-5116
1.5DB-5117
A1 E1 A1 E1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
KM KB K7 K8 K9 K3 K4
24 V A2 E2 24 V A2 E2 24 V A2 24 V A2 24 V A2 24 V A2 24 V A2
MASTER BACK-UP WD MASTER 1st level 2nd level 52G 52L
X-
52-1
1.5DB-2
MASTER AVR BACK-UP AVR WATCHDOG OVER-EXCITATION OVER-EXCITATION MACHINE GRID
CONTACTOR CONTACTOR MASTER AVR 1st LEVEL 2nd LEVEL CIRCUIT BREAKER CIRCUIT BREAKER
DRAWINGS BY : A.THIEBAUT REV : CONTROL CIRCUIT
BASLER ELECTRIC REVIEWED BY : M.REMY REV : E UPDATE 14/04/2005
PAGE :
THIS
PAGE :
NEXT
PAGE :
R
WASSELONNE
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
51-39
1.5DB-1
A11 A11 A15 A15
RE1 RE2 RE1 RE2

DECS-200 DECS-200 DECS-200 DECS-200
MASTER BACK-UP MASTER BACK-UP
13 16 18
1.5DB-1
K1 EXCITATION EXCITATION
KT1 OUTPUT OUTPUT
52-5 CONTACTOR CONTACTOR 52-3 RELAY1 RELAY1
14 15 (27T) (27T)
52-17 A12 52-19 A12 52-17 A16 52-19 A16
1.5DB-5203
1.5DB-5206
B7 B7 A1 A1 12 14
+ 52-5 + 52-7 + 51-29 + 51-31
31 21 24Vdc 51-25 24Vdc 53-15 24Vdc -- 24Vdc --
52-11 52-15 50-11 50-9
53-7 53-5
KB KM 50-19 50-31
53-11 53-9
51-19 51-11 RE1 50-37 RE2 53-19 RP1 RP2
32 22 53-15 55-9
DECS 200 54-7 DECS 200 50-23 BE3-74SH BE3-74SH
MASTER BACK-UP 1st level 2nd level RP3
BE3-59T
- - - -
1.5DB-5202
B8 B8 A2 A2 50-27 11
1.5DB-5204
1.5DB-5207
1.5DB-5201
1.5DB-5205
1.5DB-2
D20 D21 D22
A1 A1 A1 A1 C1
KT1 K1 K10 K2 QF1
24 V A2 24 V A2 24 V A2 V A2 C2
2s CEX F.FLASH BOOST
(H)
51-39
1.5DB-2
FIELD FLASHING EXCITATION FIELD SHORT CIRCUIT OVER VOLTAGE
TIMER CONTACTOR FLASHING CONTACTOR PROTECTION
DRAWINGS BY : A.THIEBAUT REV : CONTROL CIRCUIT
PAGE :
THIS
PAGE :
NEXT
PAGE :
R
WASSELONNE
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
OVER VOLTAGE
(MOMENTARY)
PROGRAMMABLE
PROGRAMMABLE
AVR FAIL (BACK-UP)
"WATCHDOG ALARM"
-> TRIP EXCITATION
MASTER AVR
SELECTED
EXCITATION BREAKER
TRIP
EXCITATION ON
EXCITATION BREAKER
TRIP
24Vdc BATTERY
BREAKER TRIP
BACK-UP AVR
SELECTED (ALARM)
OVER-EXCITATION
1st LEVEL (ALARM)
OVER-EXCITATION
2nd LEVEL (TRIP)
XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 23 24 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1.5OR-5301
1.5OR-5302
1.5OR-5324
1.5OR-5304
1.5OR-5305
1.5OR-5306
1.5OR-5307
1.5OR-5308
1.5OR-5309
1.5OR-5310
1.5OR-5314
1.5OR-5311
1.5OR-5312
1.5OR-5313
1.5OR-5315
1.5OR-5318
1.5OR-5317
1.5OR-5320
1.5OR-5319
1.5OR-5321
1.5OR-5322
1.5OR-5323 1.5OR-5303
22 24 A17 A17 A19 A19 A13
RE2 RE1 RE2 RE1 RE2
1.5OR-5316
DECS-200 DECS-200 DECS-200 DECS-200 DECS-200 57 21(L) 43 13(L) 112 114 43 42 44 22 24
BACK-UP MASTER BACK-UP MASTER BACK-UP
KM QF1 K1 QF1 QF2 KB K8 K9
51-11 50-19 52-5 50-19 51-3 51-19 51-29 51-33
RP3 OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT WATCH
58 22(L) 44 14(L) 111 44 41 21
BE3-59T RELAY 2 RELAY 2 RELAY 3 RELAY 3 DOG
50-27 21 52-19 A18 52-17 A18 52-19 A20 52-17 A20 52-19 A14
5359 XF
1 A
5358 XF
2 B MODBUS
5357 XF
3 C COMMUNICATION
XF
4
$ $ $ $ $ $
A B C A B C
RE1 RE2
DECS-200 DECS-200
MASTER BACK-UP
52-17 52-19
DRAWINGS BY : A.THIEBAUT REV : G UPDATE 31/08/2005 INFORMATION REPORT
PAGE :
THIS
PAGE :
NEXT
PAGE :
R
WASSELONNE
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
ANALOG CONTROL
INPUT (+/- 10Vdc) USED FOR THE CONTROL SIGNALS FROM PSS-100 (IF USED)
NOTE 3:
52J-K 52L-M TO THE BACK-UP
55-7
DROOP MODE ACTIVE 1 0 5425 AVR (DECS-200) XF
CLOSE OPEN
9 10 11
VAR/PF MODE ACTIVE 0 0
OPEN OPEN
VOLTAGE MODE ACTIVE 1 1
5425
5433
NO DROOP NO VAR/PF CLOSE CLOSE ANALOG 55-25
SETPOINT CONTROL 5432 5433
(4-20mA) 55-25
THIS INPUT CAN NOT BE XF 5432
USED IF PSS-100 IS 8
CONNECTED 5430
5
55-25
CUSTOMER'S 5431 5430
SHIEDED WIRE 6
55-25
GROUNDED ON 5431
5434
CUSTOMER 7
A9 A10 A8 A6 A7
I-
RE1
I+
V-
V+
COM1 DECS-200
GND
MASTER
REDUNDANT 52-17 ANALOG ACC INPUT
DECS 200
CONNECTION
A A43
EXCITATION COM2
AUTO/MANUAL CONTROL SET POINT CONTROL START/STOP CONTROL RS485 B A44
C A45
ALARM RESET
COM
SECONDARY UNIT
COM
PREPOSITION
COM
PARALLEL
(52L/M)
COM
VAR/PF ENABLE
(52J/K)
COM
MANUAL (FCR)
COM
AUTO (AVR)
COM
RAISE
COM
LOWER
COM
STOP
COM
START
COM
A41A42 A39A40 A33A34 A35 A36 A37A38 A27 A28 A25 A26 A29A30 A31 A32 A23 A24 A21 A22
1.5DB-5401
1.5DB-5402
1.5DB-5403
1.5DB-5404
1.5DB-5405
1.5DB-5406
1.5DB-5407
1.5DB-5408
1.5DB-5420
1.5DB-5421
57
KB
1.5DB-5409
1.5DB-5410
1.5DB-5419
1.5DB-5418
51-19
58
D16 D17
22 24 12 14
D9 D10 D11 K3 K4 D12 D13 D14 D15

51-35 51-37
21 11
1.5DB-5424
55-27
1.5DB-5424
NOTE 3
1.5DB-5423 TO THE BACK-UP
1.5DB-5411
1.5DB-5412
1.5DB-5413
1.5DB-5414
1.5DB-5415
1.5DB-5417
1.5DB-5416
55-27
1.5DB-5423 AVR (DECS-200)
XB XB XB XB XB XB XB
55-27
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1.5DB-5435
1.5DB-5435
55-1
1.5DB-5435
RAISE
RESET
LOWER
SET-POINT
SET-POINT
AUTOMATIC
REGULATION
REGULATION
REGULATION
REGULATION
PREPOSITION
TRANSFER TO
TRANSFER TO
FIELD CURENT
DROOP INHIBIT
(VOLTAGE-VAR/PF)
DRAWINGS BY : A.THIEBAUT REV : MASTER AVR CONTROL CIRCUIT
PAGE :
THIS
PAGE :
NEXT
PAGE :
R
WASSELONNE
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
5425
54-9 NOTE 3:
5425
52J-K 52L-M
54-29
DROOP MODE ACTIVE 1 0 5433
CLOSE OPEN 54-29
5432
VAR/PF MODE ACTIVE 0 0
OPEN OPEN 5430
54-29
VOLTAGE MODE ACTIVE 1 1 5430 5431
NO DROOP NO VAR/PF CLOSE CLOSE 54-29
5431
5433
5432
A9 A10 A8 A6 A7
I-
RE2
I+
V-
V+
COM1 DECS-200
GND
BACK-UP
REDUNDANT 52-19 ANALOG ACC INPUT
DECS 200
CONNECTION
A A43
EXCITATION COM2
AUTO/MANUAL CONTROL SET POINT CONTROL START/STOP CONTROL RS485 B A44
C A45
ALARM RESET
COM
SECONDARY UNIT
COM
PREPOSITION
COM
PARALLEL
(52L/M)
COM
VAR/PF ENABLE
(52J/K)
COM
MANUAL (FCR)
COM
AUTO (AVR)
COM
RAISE
COM
LOWER
COM
STOP
COM
START
COM
A41A42 A39A40 A33A34 A35 A36 A37A38 A27 A28 A25 A26 A29A30 A31 A32 A23 A24 A21 A22
1.5DB-5512
1.5DB-5513
1.5DB-5504
1.5DB-5505
1.5DB-5508
1.5DB-5516
1.5DB-5509
7
1.5DB-5518
KM D18 D19
1.5DB-5519
51-11
8
1.5DB-5517
1.5DB-5521
1.5DB-5520
1.5DB-5522
1.5DB-5523
1.5DB-5424
54-33 1.5DB-5424
TO THE MASTER
54-33 1.5DB-5423
32 34 22 24 AVR (DECS-200)
K3 K4 54-33 1.5DB-5435
D23 D24 D25 51-35 51-37
31 21
1.5DB-5423
13(R) 21(R)
D26 D27 D28 D29
NOTE 3 QF1 QF1
50-19 50-19
14(R) 22(R)
1.5DB-5503
1.5DB-5506
1.5DB-5507
1.5DB-5501
1.5DB-5502
1.5DB-5510
1.5DB-5511
1.5DB-5515
XB XB XB XB XB XB XB XB XB XB
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
1.5DB-5435
54-33 1.5DB-5435
RAISE
RESET
LOWER
SET-POINT
SET-POINT
COMMAND
COMMAND
AUTOMATIC
REGULATION
REGULATION
REGULATION
REGULATION
PREPOSITION
TRANSFER TO
TRANSFER TO
FIELD CURENT
DROOP INHIBIT
EXCITATION ON
EXCITATION OFF
(VOLTAGE-VAR/PF)
CONTROL COMMON
("FIELD BREAKER TRIP")
DRAWINGS BY : A.THIEBAUT REV : G UPDATE 31/08/2005 BACK-UP AVR CONTROL CIRCUIT
PAGE :
THIS
PAGE :
NEXT
PAGE :
R
WASSELONNE
1
GND
3
WASSELONNE
COMPANY
5
XA
BASLER ELECTRIC
RE1/B2
2.5WH-5035 50-25 2.5WH-5035
RE2/B3
1
2.5WH-5034 2.5WH-5034
2 50-27
2.5BK-5024 50-1 2.5BK-5024
3
2.5BK-5021 2.5BK-5021
7
4 50-3
2.5BK-5020 2.5BK-5020
REVIEWED BY :
DRAWINGS BY :
5 50-5
1.5GR-5041 1.5GR-5041
6 50-31
1.5GR-5042 50-31 1.5GR-5042
7
M.REMY
1.5GR-5043 1.5GR-5043
8 50-31
A.THIEBAUT
1.5GR-5040 50-35 1.5GR-5040

9
K3/12
9
APPROVED BY : C. DEL POPOLO
1.5GR-5022 1.5GR-5022
10 50-37
RE1/B6
2.5WH-5039 50-39 2.5WH-5039
RE2/B5
11
2.5WH-5038 2.5WH-5038
12 50-39
11
XB
1.5DB-1
1 51-11
K7/32 1.5DB-5102 1.5DB-5102
2 51-11
REV :
REV :
REV :
REV :
1.5DB-1
3 51-19
A
B
C
G
13
1.5DB-5108
4 51-19
1.5DB-1
5 51-27
1.5DB-5107
6 51-27
1.5DB-1
UPDATE
51-35
AS BUILT
K3/A1
7
1.5DB-5119
8 51-35
1.5DB-1
15
9 51-37
STANDARD PLATE
K4/A1 1.5DB-5120
10 51-37
1.5DB-5411 1.5DB-5411
11 54-1
1.5DB-5412 1.5DB-5412
12 54-3
1.5DB-5413 1.5DB-5413
13 54-3
1.5DB-5414 1.5DB-5414
54-11
17
14
DRAWINGS SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL

1.5DB-5415 1.5DB-5415
15 54-13
1.5DB-5417 1.5DB-5417
16 54-21
1.5DB-5416 1.5DB-5416
17 54-21
1.5DB-5503 1.5DB-5503
18 55-3
1.5DB-5506 1.5DB-5506
19 55-5
19
1.5DB-5507 1.5DB-5507
20 55-5
1.5DB-5501 1.5DB-5501
21 55-13
1.5DB-5502 1.5DB-5502
22 55-15
04/11/2004
16/11/2004
23/12/2004
31/08/2005
1.5DB-5510 1.5DB-5510
23 55-21
1.5DB-5511 1.5DB-5511
24 55-23
21
1.5DB-5423 1.5DB-5423
25 55-29
1.5DB-5515 55-31 1.5DB-5515
26
1.5DB-5435 1.5DB-5435
27 55-33
23
XC
RP3/24
1.5OR-5301 EX 53-1
RP3/21
1
1.5OR-5302 EX 2 53-3
1.5OR-5323 EX 53-5
3
1.5OR-5324
25
EX 4 53-7
1.5OR-5303 EX 53-9
5
1.5OR-5304 EX 6 53-13
RE2/A13
1.5OR-5305 EX 53-15
RE2/A14
7
1.5OR-5306 EX 8 53-15
QF1/21(L)
1.5OR-5309 EX 53-19
27
QF1/22(L)
9
1.5OR-5310 EX 10 53-21
K1/43
1.5OR-5314 EX 53-21
K1/44
11
1.5OR-5311 EX 12 53-23
DUAL DECS-200 MOUNTING PLATE

QF1/13(L)
1.5OR-5312 EX 53-25
QF1/14(L)
13
1.5OR-5313 EX 53-25
29
QF2/114
14
1.5OR-5315 EX 53-27
QF2/111
15
1.5OR-5316 EX 16 53-29
KB/43
1.5OR-5318 EX 53-31
KB/44
17
1.5OR-5317 EX 18 53-31
K8/44
1.5OR-5320 EX 53-33
19
31
K8/41
1.5OR-5319 EX 20 53-33
K9/24
1.5OR-5321 EX 53-35
K9/21
21
1.5OR-5322 EX 22 53-37
KM/57
1.5OR-5307 EX 53-17
KM/58
23
1.5OR-5308 EX 24 53-17
33
AUXILIARY TERMINALS
6-1103-91-297
35
CDE :
37
55
PAGE :
PREVIOUS
THIS
56
PAGE :
39
LEGEND : - EX : ORANGE TERMINALS

- M : TESTABLE TERMINALS
NEXT
57
PAGE :
1
XD
RS1
3
2.5BK-5015 2.5BK-5015
1 50-15
2.5BK-5014 50-15 2.5BK-5014
QF1/1
2
WASSELONNE
2.5BK-5007 2.5BK-5007
COMPANY
3 50-19
QF1/3
2.5BK-5008 50-19 2.5BK-5008
QF1/5
4
2.5BK-5009 2.5BK-5009
5 50-21
QF2/1
5
1.5DB-5111 51-3 1.5DB-5111

QF2/3
6
1.5DB-5114 1.5DB-5114
51-3
BASLER ELECTRIC
D7-D8/E3
7
1.5DB-5101 51-5 1.5DB-5101
8
1.5DB-2 1.5DB-2
9 51-5
7
REVIEWED BY :
DRAWINGS BY :
XF
5359 53-25 5359
1
M.REMY
5358 5358
2 53-25
A.THIEBAUT
5357 53-25 5357

9
3
APPROVED BY : C. DEL POPOLO
4 53-25
RE2/A7
5430 54-21 5430
5
5431 5431
6 54-21
RE1/A6
5434 54-21 5434
7
8 54-21
11
5433 54-25 5433

9
5432 5432
10 54-25
11 54-25
REV :
REV :
REV :
REV :
A
B
C
G
13
UPDATE
AS BUILT
15
STANDARD PLATE
17
DRAWINGS SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL

19
04/11/2004
16/11/2004
23/12/2004
31/08/2005
21
23
25
27
DUAL DECS-200 MOUNTING PLATE

29
31
33
AUXILIARY TERMINALS
6-1103-91-297
35
CDE :
37
56
PAGE :
PREVIOUS
THIS
57
PAGE :
39
LEGEND : - EX : ORANGE TERMINALS

- M : TESTABLE TERMINALS
NEXT
57
PAGE :
Technical Data
Technische Daten / technical data DIG 161 n/6L
Nenndaten / nominal data

Leistung SN: 7125 kVA cos ϕ: 0,80
rating power p.f.
Spannung UN: 11000 V Strom IN: 374 A
voltage current
Frequenz f: 50 /s 6 polig Drehzahl n: 1000 /min
frequency poles speed
Reaktanzen und Zeitkonstanten / reactances and time constants

sat. unsat. sat. unsat.
xd: 1,28 1,43 p.u. xq: 0,71 0,71 p.u. Td0': 4,20 s
xd': 0,196 0,196 p.u. xq': 0,71 0,71 p.u. Td': 0,58 s
xd''sat: 0,111 0,122 p.u. xq'': 0,134 0,134 p.u. Td'': 0,035 s
x2: 0,122 0,128 p.u. x0: 0,033 0,037 p.u. Ta: 0,089 s
ra:(20°C) 0,0043 p.u. SCR: 0,78 ZN: 16,982 Ohm
Wirkungsgrad / efficiency
1/4*PN 2/4*PN 3/4*PN 4/4*PN
η [%] p.f.=0.8 93,70 96,25 97,10 97,40
η [%] p.f.=0.85 93,73 96,30 97,16 97,48
η [%] p.f.=0.9 93,75 96,35 97,23 97,55
η [%] p.f.=1.0 93,80 96,45 97,35 97,70
Kurzschlußdaten / short circuit data

p.u.
Ik'': 3382 A Anfangskurzschlußwechselstrom (3~) / initial short circuit current ( 3~) 9,04
iS: 8607 A Stoßkurzschlußstrom (3~) / max. peak current (3~) 23,02
Ik: 1122 A Dauerkurzschlußstrom (3~) / sustained short circuit current (3~) 3,00
Mk2: 799,9 kNm Stoßkurzschlußmoment (2~) / initial short circuit torque (2~) 11,75
Mf: 1719,7 kNm Max.Fehlsynchronisationsmoment / max. faulty synchron.torque 25,27
MSN: 68,04 kNm Nennscheinmoment / rated kVA torque= 1,00
MN: 54,44 kNm Nennmoment / rated torque 0,80
dU': -16,4 % Transienter Spannungseinbruch bei Nennlaststoß / TVD at rated load application
dSmax.<= 5451 kVA Max. Laststoß bei p.f.0.2 mit dU'<=15% / Max. load application at p.f.0.2 for TVD<=15%
Sonstige Daten / other data

2
Trägheitmoment J: 1745 kgm * Gewicht m: 31000 kg*
moment of inertia weight
3
Kühlluftmenge QL: 5,5 m /s Kühlmitteltemp.: 64 °C
cooling air volume cooling medium temp
Schutzart: IP55 Isolationsklasse: F
enclosure with CACA; ambient temp.<=49°C insulation class
Bemerkungen / remarks
8428196A003,B001 *exact values see valid drawing
Temperature rise according to B for S<=6250kVA

Temperature rise according to B+10K for S<=6700kVA
Temperature rise according to F for S<=7125kVA
Voltage/Frequency range according to EN60034-1,zone B, voltage range extended to +-10%
dU<=15% at application of totally 7806kVA,p.f.0,2 on 3 alternators running in parallel
17.07.06 Rev.1/Di 03.08.06 Rev.2/Di
Alle Angaben sind gemäß VDE 0530, IEC 34 All data are in accordance to VDE 0530, IEC 34

rating power p.f.
voltage current

xd: 1,21 1,34 p.u. xq: 0,67 0,67 p.u. Td0': 4,20 s
xd': 0,184 0,184 p.u. xq': 0,67 0,67 p.u. Td': 0,58 s
xd''sat: 0,104 0,114 p.u. xq'': 0,126 0,126 p.u. Td'': 0,035 s
x2: 0,115 0,120 p.u. x0: 0,031 0,034 p.u. Ta: 0,089 s
ra:(20°C) 0,0041 p.u. SCR: 0,83 ZN: 18,060 Ohm
1/4*PN 2/4*PN 3/4*PN 4/4*PN
η [%] p.f.=0.8 93,10 96,10 97,00 97,35
η [%] p.f.=0.85 93,20 96,16 97,08 97,43
η [%] p.f.=0.9 93,30 96,23 97,15 97,50
η [%] p.f.=1.0 93,50 96,35 97,30 97,65

p.u.

2
3

17.07.06 Rev.1/Di 03.08.06 Rev.2/Di

rating power p.f.
voltage current

xd: 1,13 1,25 p.u. xq: 0,63 0,63 p.u. Td0': 4,20 s
xd': 0,172 0,172 p.u. xq': 0,63 0,63 p.u. Td': 0,58 s
xd''sat: 0,097 0,107 p.u. xq'': 0,117 0,117 p.u. Td'': 0,035 s
x2: 0,107 0,112 p.u. x0: 0,029 0,032 p.u. Ta: 0,089 s
ra:(20°C) 0,0038 p.u. SCR: 0,89 ZN: 19,360 Ohm
1/4*PN 2/4*PN 3/4*PN 4/4*PN
η [%] p.f.=0.8 92,90 95,90 96,90 97,20
η [%] p.f.=0.85 92,95 95,96 96,96 97,29
η [%] p.f.=0.9 93,00 96,03 97,03 97,38
η [%] p.f.=1.0 93,10 96,15 97,15 97,55

p.u.

2
3

17.07.06 Rev.1/Di 03.08.06 Rev.2/Di
Technisches Datenblatt - Diagramme
Technical data sheet - Diagrams FM 7.3-5.2
Alternator : DIG161n/6L
Rated output [kVA] 6250 Rated power factor: 0,8 Rated voltage [kV]: 11
Rated frequency [Hz] 50 Rated speed [rpm] 1000
Wirkungsgrad-Kennlinie - Efficiency Curve
98,0
97,0
96,0
95,0
94,0
Eta [%]
93,0 PF=0,8
PF=0,9
92,0 PF=1
PF rated
91,0
Load [% rated load]
90,0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
28196-dias-6250kVA.xls/Efficiency 5.2 A vom 30.05.05
Stand: A vom 21.08.06 AvK Deutschland GmbH Co. KG Seite 1 von 1
Transient Voltage rise or drop for sudden load removal or application
20
15
1 p.f.
10 0,8 p.f.
0,4 p.f.
5
0,1 p.f.
[%]
-5
-10
-15
Transient voltage drop / Transient voltage rise

-20
-25
-100 -75 -50 -25 0 25 50 75 100 125
Sudden load removal / sudden load application in [%] of rated load depending from power factor
28196-dias-6250kVA.xls/Voltage drop-rise 5.3 A vom 30.05.05
Rated frequency [Hz] 50 Rated speed [rpm] 1000 MSN related to kVA: 59,68 KNm
Kurzschlußmomenten-Verlauf 2-poliger KS
Short circuit torque at 2-phase SC
20
15
10
Mk/MSN in p.u.
1 9 17 25 33 41 49 57 65 73 81 89 97 105 113 121 129 137 145 153 161 169 177 185 193 201 209 217 225 233 241 249 257 265 273 281 289 297
-5
-10
-15
t / ms
28196-dias-6250kVA.xls/MK2 5.5 A vom 30.05.05
Nenndaten / nominal data DIG161n/6L

Rating p.f.
Spannung UN: 11,00 kV Strom IN: 328 A
Voltage Current
Frequenz f: 50 Hz Drehzahl n: 1.000 min-1
Frequency Speed
Schutzart IP55
Protection
Kurzschlussstrom Ik3phasig / IN [p.u.]
Short-circuit current Ik3phase / IN [ p.u. ]
Stosskurzschluss-Strom, 3-phasig, asymmetrisch /

Sudden short circuit current, 3-phase, asymmetrical
30,0
25,0
20,0
15,0
10,0
5,0
0,0
-5,0
-10,0
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5
Zeit [sec.]
Time
Notizen / remarks:
Maximum asymmetric peak value Ispeak= 8134 A or 24,80 p.u.
Alle Angaben gemäß VDE 0530, IEC600 34 All data according VDE 0530, IEC600 34
28196-dias-6250kVA.xls/IKasym3- 5.7 A vom 30.05.05

Rating p.f.
Voltage Current
Frequenz f: 50 Hz Drehzahl n: 1000 min-1
Frequency Speed
Schutzart IP55
Protection
Überlast Kennlinie
Overload capability
5,0
Strom I1/IN [p.u.]
4,5
Current
4,0
3,5
3,0
2,5
2,0
1,5
1,0
0,5
0,0
1 10 100 1000 Zeit [s] 10000
Time
Notizen / remarks:
Strom / Zeit Kriterien: ( I / IN )2*t =45s
Current/time characteristics: 1,5*IN for 30 s
1,1*IN for 1 h in 6h
28196-dias-6250kVA.xls/Overload 5.8 A vom 30.05.05
3
2
,
5
u]
Rating SN: 6250 kVA p.f. 0,80

Bemessungsleistung Leistungsfaktor cos ϕ:
Nominal voltage UN: 11,00 kV Nominal current IN: 328 A
Bemessungsspannung Bemessungsstrom
-1
Frequency fN: 50 Hz Speed n: 1000 min
Frequenz Drehzahl
Protection: IP55
Schutzart
Inverse current or unbalanced negative sequence current
Failure operation / im Fehlerfall

(I2/IN)2 x t = 20 IEC60034-1
(I2/IN)2 x t = 40 NEMA MG1
Continuous operation / im Dauerbetrieb
2,5 I2/IN = 0,08 IEC60034-1
I2/IN = 0,10 NEMA MG1
2
Inverse current I2/IN [pu]
1,5
Invers-Strom
0,5
0
1 10 100 1.000 10.000
Time [s]
Zeit
Remarks / Notizen:
All data according IEC 60034-1, NEMA MG1
28196-dias-6250kVA.xls/Inverse current 5.9 A vom 30.05.05
Rated output [kVA] 6250 Rated power factor 0,8 Rated voltage [kV]: 11
P/Q Leistungsdiagramm / P/Q Capability diagram

1,2
1,1
Active load (p.u)

0,9
Wirkleistung (p.u.)
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0,0
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,1
1,2
-0,8
-0,7
-0,6
-0,5
-0,4
-0,3
-0,2
-0,1
untererregt Blindleistung (p.u.) übererregt
underexcited Reactive load (p.u.) overexcited
Wirkleistung Cos phi 0,95 Cos phi 0,9 cos phi 0,8
cos phi 0,6 cos phi 0,4 cos phi 0,2
28196-dias-6250kVA.xls/PQ-Diagram-Standard 5.10 A vom 30.05.05
Wirkungsgrad-Kennlinie - Efficiency Curve
98,0
97,0
96,0
95,0
94,0
Eta [%]
93,0 PF=0,8
PF=0,9
92,0 PF=1
PF rated
91,0
Load [% rated load]
90,0
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
28196-dias-7125kVA.xls/Efficiency 5.2 A vom 30.05.05
Transient Voltage rise or drop for sudden load removal or application
25
20
15 1 p.f.
0,8 p.f.
10
0,4 p.f.
5 0,1 p.f.
[%]
-5
-10
-15
-20
Transient voltage drop / Transient voltage rise

-25
-30
-100 -75 -50 -25 0 25 50 75 100 125
Sudden load removal / sudden load application in [%] of rated load depending from power factor
28196-dias-7125kVA.xls/Voltage drop-rise 5.3 A vom 30.05.05
Kurzschlußmomenten-Verlauf 2-poliger KS
Short circuit torque at 2-phase SC
15
10
0
1 9 17 25 33 41 49 57 65 73 81 89 97 105 113 121 129 137 145 153 161 169 177 185 193 201 209 217 225 233 241 249 257 265 273 281 289 297
Mk/MSN in p.u.
-5
-10
-15
t / ms
28196-dias-7125kVA.xls/MK2 5.5 A vom 30.05.05

Rating p.f.
Voltage Current
Frequenz f: 50 Hz Drehzahl n: 1.000 min-1
Frequency Speed
Schutzart IP55
Protection
Kurzschlussstrom Ik3phasig / IN [p.u.]
Short-circuit current Ik3phase / IN [ p.u. ]
Stosskurzschluss-Strom, 3-phasig, asymmetrisch /

Sudden short circuit current, 3-phase, asymmetrical
25,0
20,0
15,0
10,0
5,0
0,0
-5,0
-10,0
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5
Zeit [sec.]
Time
Notizen / remarks:
Maximum asymmetric peak value Ispeak= 8099 A or 21,66 p.u.
28196-dias-7125kVA.xls/IKasym3- 5.7 A vom 30.05.05
5
,
0
Strom I 1/IN [p.u.]
4
,
5
Current
4
,
0
3 Nenndaten / nominal data DIG161n/6L
Rating p.f.
Voltage Current
Frequenz f: 50 Hz Drehzahl n: 1000 min-1
Frequency Speed
Schutzart IP55
Protection
Überlast Kennlinie
Overload capability
5,0
Strom I1/IN [p.u.]
4,5
Current
4,0
3,5
3,0
2,5
2,0
1,5
1,0
0,5
0,0
1 10 100 1000 Zeit [s] 10000
Time
Notizen / remarks:
Strom / Zeit Kriterien: ( I / IN )2*t =45s
Current/time characteristics: 1,5*IN for 30 s
1,1*IN for 1 h in 6h
28196-dias-7125kVA.xls/Overload 5.8 A vom 30.05.05
3
2
,
5
u]
Rating SN: 7125 kVA p.f. 0,80

Bemessungsleistung Leistungsfaktor cos ϕ:
Nominal voltage UN: 11,00 kV Nominal current IN: 374 A
Bemessungsspannung Bemessungsstrom
-1
Frequency fN: 50 Hz Speed n: 1000 min
Frequenz Drehzahl
Protection: IP55
Schutzart
Inverse current or unbalanced negative sequence current
Failure operation / im Fehlerfall

(I2/IN)2 x t = 20 IEC60034-1
(I2/IN)2 x t = 40 NEMA MG1
Continuous operation / im Dauerbetrieb
2,5 I2/IN = 0,08 IEC60034-1
I2/IN = 0,10 NEMA MG1
2
Inverse current I2/IN [pu]
1,5
Invers-Strom
0,5
0
1 10 100 1.000 10.000
Time [s]
Zeit
Remarks / Notizen:
All data according IEC 60034-1, NEMA MG1
28196-dias-7125kVA.xls/Inverse current 5.9 A vom 30.05.05
Rated output [kVA] 7125 Rated power factor 0,8 Rated voltage [kV]: 11
P/Q Leistungsdiagramm / P/Q Capability diagram

1,2
1,1
Active load (p.u)

0,9
Wirkleistung (p.u.)
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0,0
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,1
1,2
-0,8
-0,7
-0,6
-0,5
-0,4
-0,3
-0,2
-0,1
untererregt Blindleistung (p.u.) übererregt
underexcited Reactive load (p.u.) overexcited
Wirkleistung Cos phi 0,95 Cos phi 0,9 cos phi 0,8
cos phi 0,6 cos phi 0,4 cos phi 0,2
28196-dias-7125kVA.xls/PQ-Diagram-Standard 5.10 A vom 30.05.05

Generator Manual 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Generator Manual 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Generator Manual 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

COMMENTS AS NOTED GALLIOU - DN: cn=LOIG

PURCHASER'S PERMISSION TO PROCEED OR REVIEW TAKEN ON VENDOR

Project Emergency Diesel Generator Sets

Vendor Document No: QCSE1D5003-B-8005

B1 11.03.2007 FOR APPROVAL VN VN NQ

1.1 Important notes for users The technical information

The operating instructions are to be kept Any unauthorized modifications and

2. Safety Precautions At particular dangerous points on the

Beside all safety notes in the operating Transportsicherungen.

Maschine nicht betriebsfähig!

Danger! This sign is mounted when the installation

All safety devices like covers, barriers and

ABSTANDSMAß-PROTOKOLL For operating the electrical machine the

If damages that were not noticeable by the

3.4 Unloading the generator

The unloading has to be performed in

Please refer to the freight

3.5 Storage of the generator

After unloading, the

Wrapped parts and assessories must not

The machine and packages have to be

If it is planned to store the

AvK Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG

Order No.: .............................................................

Generator Type: .............................................................

Operation Hours: .............................................................

Bearing design: Roller bearing 

Pos. 1.1 - 1.19

II. Mechanical Inspection

Pos. 2.1 - 2.20

III. Test Run

Pos. 3.1 - 3.14

IV. Maintenance Result

AvK Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG / Service Date: 22.07.2002

a) Location: building  marine 

b) Atmosperic conditions: dry  high humidity 

c) Ventilation: unrestricted  adequate 

a) Site duty: single  parallel  idle 

b) Duty cycle: 24 hours  daily  occasionally  standby 

c) Load condition: inductive  non linear 

d) Operation: manned  unmanned 

a) Dirt content: slight dust  light layer dirt 

b) Corrosion: none, very little  steel/iron 

c) Engine: Type: ....................

AvK Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG / Service Date: 22.07.2002

 1.1 Examination of cable entry and cable shoes 

 1.2 Examination of strain relief of connecting power cables 

 1.3 Check of fixation of transformers installed 

 1.4 Examination of cable entry and cable shoes 

 1.5 Check of strain relief of connection cables 

 1.6 Insulation test of stator windings 

 a) Stator winding phase U against ground 

 b) Stator winding phase V against ground 

 c) Stator winding phase W against ground 

1.7 Insulation test of stator windings

 a) Stator winding phase U against phase V 

 b) Stator winding phase U against phase W 

 c) Stator winding phase W against phase V 

 1.8 Resistance measurement of stator 

AvK Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG / Service Date: 22.07.2002

Bearing design: Roller bearing

a) Location: building marine

b) Atmosperic conditions: dry high humidity

c) Ventilation: unrestricted adequate

a) Site duty: single parallel idle

b) Duty cycle: 24 hours daily occasionally standby

c) Load condition: inductive non linear

d) Operation: manned unmanned

a) Dirt content: slight dust light layer dirt

b) Corrosion: none, very little steel/iron

1.1 Examination of cable entry and cable shoes

1.2 Examination of strain relief of connecting power cables

1.3 Check of fixation of transformers installed

1.4 Examination of cable entry and cable shoes

1.5 Check of strain relief of connection cables

1.6 Insulation test of stator windings

a) Stator winding phase U against ground

b) Stator winding phase V against ground

c) Stator winding phase W against ground

a) Stator winding phase U against phase V

b) Stator winding phase U against phase W

c) Stator winding phase W against phase V

1.8 Resistance measurement of stator

1.9 Check and re-tightening of all screws and nuts

1.10 Cleaning and examination of insulators for cracks

1.11 Re-tightening of contact screws and nuts on

1.12 Resistance measurement of auxiliary windings

1.13 Insulation test of auxiliary windings

1.14 Examination of anti-condensation heater

1.15 Insulation resistance measurement of rotor winding

a) Insulation measurement main rotor

b) Insulation measurement exciter rotor

1.16 Resistance measurement of rotor

1.17 Inspection of rotating rectifiers

1.18 Inspection of stator end winding with endoscope

Inspection of stator end winding without endoscope

1.19 Inspection of rotor winding with endoscope

Inspection of rotor winding without endoscope

2.1 Check of oil level in sleeve bearing

2.2 Check for leakage of sleeve bearings

2.3 Inspection of sleeve bearing with endoscope

Inspection of sleeve bearing without endoscope

2.4 Check of oil quantity of oil lubrication system

2.5 Check of oil pressure of oil lubrication system:

2.6 Check of oil temperature of oil lubrication system

2.7 Check of oil pressure inside the bearing housing

2.8 Check of lubrication ring

2.10 Oil viscosity used: according to ISO VG .................

2.11 Relubrication of roller/ball bearing according to operating instructions

2.12 Removal of surplus grease

2.13 Removal of old grease from bearing covers

2.14 Inspection of abrasion of earthing brush

2.15 Inspection of base frame for mechanical deviations

2.16 Visual inspection of the drive coupling

2.18 Check of inlet and outlet airducts for corrosion

2.19 Cooler / leakage monitoring

2.20 Check of drainage stoppers / drainage for condensation

3.1 Check whether earthing switch is disconnected

3.2 Check of bearing noise

3.3 SPM bearing analysis: DE: LR .......... HR ..........

NDE: LR .......... HR ..........

3.4 Check of oil amount in sleeve bearings during operation

3.5 Effectivity of lubrication ring

3.6 Tripping of temperature protector for check

3.7 Vibration test / Vibration values (mm/s)

3.8 Check of regulator functions at no-load operation

3.9 Check of parallel operation

3.10 Check of overcurrent and short circuit protection trip

3.11 Check of differential protective trip

3.12 Check of exciter monitoring system

3.13 Check of generator voltage in parallel operation